JP7046035B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

Conventionally, some game consoles have set values that differ in the degree of advantage of the player (for example, Patent Document 1). This set value can be changed, and whether or not the set value has been changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change") is a concern of the player, which leads to a decrease or improvement in the motivation for playing. For example, if the set value is advantageous to the player and the player knows that the set value has been changed to an unfavorable value, the motivation for playing is reduced. On the contrary, if the set value is disadvantageous to the player and the player knows that the set value has not been changed, the motivation for playing is not improved.

The setting is changed by the setting operation immediately after the power is turned on. At the game store, turn on the power of all the game consoles on the entire game island, and after a while, if you want to change the settings of only one of them, turn off the power of only one of them and then restore the power. The settings will be changed. Further, when the setting of only one game console is changed while the power of the game consoles of the entire game island is turned off, the power of only one of the game consoles is turned on and the setting is changed. After that, in order to turn on the power of the game consoles of the entire game island at once, the power of the game consoles whose settings have been changed is turned off once, and then the power of the game consoles of the entire game island is turned on at once. In this way, the game console may be repeatedly disconnected and restored.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-176417

However, there is room for improvement in the production performed after the power is restored in the conventional game table.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game table characterized by an effect performed after power recovery .

The game console of the present invention for solving the above problems is
With the start lever ,
Directing means and
It is a game table equipped with
The game console is a slot machine.
The effect means is a means capable of executing the effect of the interlocking pattern .
The effect means is a means capable of executing the effect of the demo display .
The effect of the interlocking pattern is an effect in which the first effect is started and then the second effect is started.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the effect of the demo display is executed.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the effect of the demo display after the first case , the effect of the demo display is executed.
An effect that is executed when the start lever is operated without going through the power cutoff / recovery after the start of the first effect, and an effect that is performed after the power failure / recovery is performed after the start of the first effect. Unlike the effect that is performed when the start lever is operated,
The effect executed when the start lever is operated after the start of the first effect without going through the power interruption and recovery is the second effect.
The effect executed when the start lever is operated after the power is cut off and restored after the start of the first effect is the first effect.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by an effect performed after power recovery .

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which unfolds and shows the arrangement of the design applied to each reel in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state together with the type of the internal winning combination. (A) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and (b) is a transition diagram of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of various lottery processing (step S105) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the item addition process (step S1203) in FIG. 12, (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the table used for the lottery in step S1305, (d) and (E) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery in step S1315. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the table used for setting the confrontation mode. (B) is a figure which shows the table used for setting the precursor start zone. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG. 12, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for the point specialization B state transition lottery. be. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table for acquiring "one defeated" item, (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for adding a defeat rate by a "defeat rate UP" item, and (c) is a diagram showing an AT balance. It is a figure which shows the game number lottery table, (d) is a figure which shows AT direct hit lottery table, (e) is a figure which shows a pseudo BB lottery table, (f) is a figure which shows AT addition game number lottery. It is a figure which shows the table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the state update process (step S117) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG. 19, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery to determine the value of the acquired points. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point-specific A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG. 19, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG. c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG. 19, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect control process (step S309) in FIG. 25. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG. 26, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the display item management process (step S3005) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in FIG. 28. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500, and (d) is the flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect executed until the effect state shifts from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false precursor state, and returns to the normal state. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect of item acquisition when the effect state is a normal state. The flow from the normal state to the sign state and the confrontation state will be explained. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true precursor state and then to the confrontation state. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of item acquisition when the effect state is the confrontation state, and (d) to (f) are the items use effects when the effect state is the confrontation state. It is a figure which shows an example, (g) is a figure which shows the state which the confrontation effect has started. It is a figure which shows the example of the case which wins all the confrontation production. It is a figure which shows the example of the case of being defeated in the confrontation production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect executed until the transition from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example at the time of power failure and power recovery in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the modification of the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the interlocking effect setting process (step S3008) shown in FIG. 51. (A) is a diagram showing a demo display displayed on the effect image display device 157 by the demo effect set in step S3008b of FIG. 52, and (b) is a display of a normal background in step S3008i and step S3008m of FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows the normal background which is displayed on the effect image display apparatus 157 by setting, (b') is the figure which shows the modification of the normal background which is shown in (b). (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 1 in the effect image display device 157, (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 2 in the effect image display device 157, and (c) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 2. It is a figure which shows the display example of the interlocking effect 3 in a display device 157. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 4 in the effect image display device 157, (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 5 in the effect image display device 157, and (c) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 5. It is a figure which shows the display example of the interlocking effect 6 in the display device 157, and (d) is the figure which shows the state of the interlocking effect before the stop operation is performed in interlocking pattern 2. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the interlocking pattern 1, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the interlocking pattern 2. (A) is a diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs before the bet operation and the power is immediately restored while the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the power is restored immediately. It is a figure which shows the flow in the case where a power failure and a power recovery occur again after it occurs. (A) is a diagram showing a flow when a power failure occurs after a bet operation and the power is immediately restored while the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the power is restored immediately after the bet operation, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow in the case where a power failure and a power recovery occur again after that. It is a figure which shows the flow in the case where the first power failure / recovery occurs before the bet operation and the second power failure / recovery occurs after the bet operation in the state where the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of a modification of the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 26, and (b) is the point-specific A state process (step S3018) shown in FIG. 26 (a). It is a flowchart which shows the flow. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the display point management process (step S3013) shown in FIG. 60 (a). (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the display item management process (step S3015) shown in FIG. 60 (a), and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the possessed item information update process in step S3015b. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which the setting is changed, the initial state is changed to the point-specialized A state, and then the normal state is changed. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which electricity was generated. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which power interruption and recovery occurred while in the point-specialized A state after t1 in the example of FIG. 63 (a), and FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example in which power interruption and recovery occurred. It is a figure which shows the example that the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts while the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 do not match after t2 in the above example. It is a figure which shows the example which the value of the cumulative point and the timing when the display of an item is started are different. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which the cumulative points are displayed before the cumulative points are used and the possessed items are displayed before the possessed items are used after the normal state is reached after t3. (B). ) Is a diagram showing an example in which the cumulative point is displayed when the cumulative point is used and the possessed item is displayed when the possessed item is used after the normal state is reached. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which points are not consumed in the point specialization A state that shifts from the initial state after the setting change, but are consumed in the normal state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the power is cut off and restored from the normal state. However, it is a figure which shows the example which does not consume the point in the point specialization A state which shifts to the effect state of the 1st sub-control unit 400, but consumes in a normal state. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which unfolds and shows the arrangement of the design applied to each reel in a plane. (A) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payout of each winning combination, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of internal winning combinations and special combination 2 internal winning. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the internal winning combination in a state. (A) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, and (b) is a transition diagram of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68. It is a figure which showed the display screen which is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in each effect state. It is a figure which shows the transition pattern of the production state in the special role 2 internal winning state. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change processing in the main control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of various lottery processing in the main control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the character addition deletion processing in various lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the point setting processing in various lottery processing. It is a figure which shows the various lottery tables used in the point setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point increase erasing process in various lottery processes, and (b) is a figure which shows the point increase setting table prepared in ROM 306 of a main control unit 300. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT lottery processing in various lottery processing. It is a figure which shows various lottery tables used in AT lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the state update process in the main control part main process. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of non-AT state processing in the state update processing, (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of G number ceiling determination processing, and (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of point ceiling determination processing. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the confrontation precursor state processing in the state update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the confrontation state processing in the state update processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of pseudo BB state processing in the state update process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of AT state processing in the state update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the CZ state processing in the state update processing. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is the first sub. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. (A) is a flowchart of the effect control process (step S35) in FIG. 92 (a), and (b) is a flowchart of the character addition / erasure process (step S351). (A) is a flowchart of the point increase erasure process (step S352), (b) is a flowchart of the zone display additional erasure process (step S353), and (c) is a table showing whether or not the zone display is displayed. be. It is a flowchart of a counter display process (step S354). (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500, and (c) is the second sub. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of a control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of an image control process of a second sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows the example which the count value of the 1st P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 rises in a non-AT state. It is a figure which shows the other example in which the count value of the 1st P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 rises in a non-AT state. It is a figure which shows the example which the count value of the 1st P counter rises in a confrontation state. It is a figure which shows the other example in which the count value of the 1st P counter rises in a confrontation state. It is a figure which shows the example which the true confrontation effect is performed, and it shifts to a pseudo BB state and an AT state. It is a figure which shows the example which is defeated by the confrontation production and shifts to the non-AT state. It is a figure which shows the example which the 1st P counter is reset. It is a figure which shows the example which power was cut off and restored. It is a figure which shows the example which the count value of a 2nd P counter matches the count value of a 1st P counter after power is cut and restored. It is a figure which shows the example which applied the production example explained so far to a pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the embodiment of the game console of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment described below starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. At the same time, based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate the reels. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is paid out. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out the game medium.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and has a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and openable and closable with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. More specifically with reference to FIG. 2, the symbol displayed on the upper stage (position 1 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110 is displayed on the upper stage design of the left reel and the middle stage (position 2 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure). The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the symbol on the upper part of the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle part of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the right reel. The symbols displayed in the middle symbol and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) are called the lower symbols of the right reel, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is connected to each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three in each vertical direction, a total of nine are displayed. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of the optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIG. 5 is displayed. In this embodiment, the left reel middle symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right are determined. Only one line of the middle-stage winning line L1 composed of the reel middle-stage symbols is provided. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires 2 to 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid, and when 2 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet. When it is done, the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that rise to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

For example, the notification lamp 123 has been internally elected to a specific winning combination (specifically, special role 1 and special role 2) in the internal lottery described later, or the special role internal winning state (special role) described later. It is a lamp that informs the player that it is in the 1 internal winning state or the special combination 2 internal winning state) or the special gaming state (BB1 operating state or BB2 operating state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. When the re-game lamp 122 wins a re-game combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, the re-game is replayable (no medal is required). It is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one sheet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the following, it may be expressed that it is given to the player in the same meaning as being paid out to the player. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) provided below the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 is output to the outside on the upper part of the effect device 160. A sound hole 143 for the purpose is provided. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ) Has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface. The effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. Therefore, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 And the data capacity of RAM 308 is limited. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a first updating means, a state setting means, an advantage setting means, a storage means, and a privilege lottery means. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 corresponds to an example of the second updating means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel design. A ROM 306 that stores an array, stop position, etc., a RAM 308 that temporarily stores data, an I / O 310 that controls input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 that measures time, number of times, etc. And, WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). Start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 The state of the optical sensor, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the loading operation when loading. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and are provided on the reel frame to block light. Every time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotated from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. It is provided with a drive circuit 328 for driving a device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. The RAM 408, the I / O 410 for controlling the input / output of various devices, and the counter timer 412 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (Reel backlight, etc.) is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (10 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 1 on the left reel 110 is a "watermelon symbol", the frame number 4 on the middle reel 111 is a "bell 1 symbol", and the frame number 6 on the right reel 112 is "seven". "1 symbol", are arranged respectively.

In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in the present embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retracting range (less than 5 frames in the present embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles 1 and 2, replaying roles 1 to 3, and small roles 1 to 7. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special winning combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a BB1 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. be. In this embodiment, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state. This special role 1 is a role to be won only when three medals are inserted in the normal game state described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 5).

The special role 2 is a role (operating role) for shifting to a special gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a BB2 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning a prize. In this embodiment, only two medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state. This special role 2 is a winning combination only when two medals are inserted in the normal gaming state (see the remarks column in FIG. 5).

In addition, the replaying roles 1 to 3 are roles that enable replaying without inserting a new medal. These special roles 1 and 2 and replay games 1 to 3 may be referred to as "actuating roles". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1 to 1 to 2. Includes prizes for replaying roles 1-3. In addition, special roles 1 and 2 are special roles that are carried over to the next game if they are not determined to be a prize, and other roles are not carried over to the next game if they are not determined to be a prize. It is a role.

For special roles 1 and 2, medals will not be paid out due to winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Bell 2-Watermelon-Replay 2" for the special role 1 and "Bell 2-Seven 1-Replay 2" for the special role 2. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1", the special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and the special role 1 and the special role 2 may be collectively referred to as "special role" or "BB". be.

When the special winning combination 1 or 2 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each of the special winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special role 1 is set to on, the main control unit 300 shifts the state of the game to the special role 1 internal winning state. When the flag corresponding to the special role 2 is set to on, the main control unit 300 shifts the state of the game to the internal winning state of the special role 2. These flags are kept on until the corresponding operating combination is won, and it becomes easy to win these operating combinations in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if you do not win those roles in the games that have been internally won in the special roles 1 and 2, the state will be the same as in the state in which you have been internally won in the special roles 1 and 2 in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations will be obtained. It will be easy to win a prize.

The internal winning state of special role 1 and the internal winning state of special role 2 will be described in detail later, but if the internal winning state of special role 2 is internally won by a role other than special role 2, other roles The reel stop control is executed so that the symbols constituting the above are preferentially aligned.

The replaying roles 1 to 3 are winning roles (actuating roles) that allow the game to be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning, and the medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be executed again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted cards. In the corresponding symbol combination, the re-game combination 1 is "replay 1 / 2-replay 1 / 2-replay 1/2", the re-game combination 2 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", and the re-game The role 3 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2". Among the above-mentioned replaying roles, the replaying combination 1 may be referred to as a "normal replay", the replaying combination 2 may be referred to as a "seven 1 matching replay", and the replaying combination 3 may be referred to as a "seven 2 matching replay". Further, if the player wins the replay combination 2 in the AT state described later, the player shifts to the pseudo BB1 state described later, and if the player wins the replay combination 3 in the AT state, the player shifts to the pseudo BB2 state described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 5). ). The symbol combination of the replaying combination 2 is a pseudo BB1 transition symbol, and the symbol combination of the replaying combination 3 is a pseudo BB2 transition symbol. The pseudo BB1 state lasts 50 games, while the pseudo BB2 state lasts only 20 games.

The re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 may be any role as long as the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the replay, the medal insertion may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number storage area prepared in the RAM 308), or the replay may be performed. The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small roles 1 to 8 are winning roles in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BAR-Watermelon-Replay 1" for the small role 1, "Watermelon-Cherry-Replay 1" for the small role 2, and "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" for the small role 3. Yes, the small role 4 is "BAR-Replay 1 / 2-Replay 1/2", the small role 5 is "Bell 2-Bell 1-Bell 1", and the small role 6 is "Bell 1-Bell 1 /". 2-Bell 1/2 ", small role 7 is" Bell 1-Bell 1 / 2-Replay 1/2 ", and small role 8 is" Bell 1-Replay 1 / 2-Bell 1/2 ". be. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG.

Of the above small roles, small role 1 is "watermelon", small role 2 is "weak cherry", small role 3 is "strong cherry", small role 4 is "chance eye", small role 5 is "common bell", The small winning combination 6 may be referred to as a “pushing order bell”, and the small winning combination 7 and the small winning combination 8 may be referred to as a “single bell”. Strong cherries are easier to get benefits than weak cherries, and chances are easier to get benefits. Further, when the push order bell is internally won, the winning combination is not won unless the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, and the winning combination is always won regardless of the operation timing if the operation order is correct. The one bell is a winning combination when the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is wrong.

<Types of internal winners>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows the type of the internal winning combination and the lottery table of the internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state.

FIG. 6 shows 12 types of condition devices (condition device numbers 1 to 12) in which the combinations described in FIG. 5 are combined. The winning combination in the game is one of the winning combination corresponding to this conditional device. These condition devices are determined by a lottery at the start operation of the game. At this time, the combination corresponding to the conditional device is referred to as an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination is determined by the lottery at the start operation of the game. In the following description of this operation, it may be referred to as an internal winning combination.

As will be described later, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a gaming table in which the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) tends to be the longest. FIG. 6 shows a lottery table for each internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2).

Conditional device number 1 is a conditional device configured by a replay combination. As described above, in the present embodiment, the re-game combination is from the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 3, and if the pseudo BB1 state schedule flag described later is set to ON, the symbol combination of the re-game combination 2 can be stopped. If the pseudo BB2 state schedule flag described later is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 can be stopped. If none of these pseudo BB state schedule flags is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 can be stopped.

Conditional device numbers 2 to 12 are internal winning combinations composed of small combinations. Of these, the condition device numbers 7 to 12 are duplicated in the small winning combination 6, the small winning combination 7, and the small winning combination 8, and six types A to F are prepared. There are 6 patterns of operation order (pressing order) of stop buttons 137 to 139: "left and right middle", "left middle right", "right left middle", "right middle left", "middle left and right", and "middle right left". There are six types, A to F, in which each of these six patterns is associated with the correct operation order. That is, in the condition device numbers 7 to 12, the correct answers in the pushing order are different from each other. When the condition device numbers 7 to 12 are internally won, if the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in the correct operation order, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 is stopped (15 cards are paid out). On the other hand, if the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in an operation order different from the correct operation order (incorrect operation order), the symbol combination of the small winning combination 7 or the small winning combination 8 is stopped (1 sheet). Withdrawal).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values having different degrees of advantage for the player are set. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player tends to be.

In the lottery table of the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 6, the value obtained by dividing the displayed numerical value by 65536 is the internal winning probability. This internal winning probability is determined for each set value, but in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT2), only the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 5 of the condition device 6 is different. In other gaming states (for example, a normal state, a special gaming state, etc.), the higher the set value of the internal winning probability, the higher the advantage of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the conditional devices of the conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are equal, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If the combination of each condition device is not won, it will be lost and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the player did not win the role of any of the conditional devices may be expressed as "winning the loss".

As described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state, when an internal winning other role other than the special role 2 is internally won, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting the other winning combinations are preferentially aligned. Is executed. Therefore, in order to shift from the internal winning state of the special role 2 to the BB2 operating state which is the special gaming state, it is necessary to insert two medals, win the internal winning of the loss, and then win the special role 2.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the transition of the gaming state will be described. FIG. 7A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 7A, the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a special winning combination 1 internal winning state, a special winning combination 2 internal winning state, a BB1 operating state, and a BB2 operating state. It is configured so that five gaming states having different advantages of the player can be switched, and the advantage is changed by the transition of these states to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, five states of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as states in which the types and probabilities of the re-game combinations to be internally won are different. And RT have a one-to-one relationship. That is, it is RT0 in the normal gaming state, RT1 in the special winning combination 1 internal winning state, RT2 in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state, RT3 in the BB1 operating state, and RT4 in the BB2 operating state. The gaming state is controlled by the main control unit 300. It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are easier to win the re-game role internally than RT0. In addition, RT1 is easier to win the re-game role internally than RT3, and RT2 is easier to win the re-game role internally than RT4. Further, the internal winning probabilities of the re-games of RT1 and RT2 may be the same or different, and the internal winning probabilities of the re-games of RT3 and RT4 may be the same or different. May be.

The normal gaming state has the lowest internal winning probability of the re-gaming combination, and is the most disadvantageous state for the player. It is also the initial state in this embodiment.

The special role internal winning state (special role 1 internal winning state and special role 2 internal winning state) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role is set to ON. In this gaming state, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state), which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, as described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2), if an internal winning role is won for a role other than the special role 2, the symbols constituting the other roles are preferentially aligned. Since the reel stop control is executed, it is not possible to shift to the BB2 operating state.

The special gaming state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state) is an advantageous gaming state in which it is easier to win a small winning combination than in the normal gaming state and the special winning combination internal winning state, and it is easy to obtain a medal. However, as described above, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state, and only 2 medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state.

FIG. 7A shows the gaming states described above, and the reference numerals (A) to (F) attached to the arrows are the transition conditions between the gaming states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow. The transition from the normal gaming state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (A) to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) is performed by internally winning the special winning combination 1, and the normal gaming state indicated by the arrow (D). The transition from (RT0) to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) is performed by internally winning the special role 2. In the normal gaming state (RT0), the internal winning probability of the special role 2 is higher than the internal winning probability of the special role 1, and the internal winning probability of the special role 2 is a considerably high probability. Reference numeral 100 is a gaming table in which the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) is likely to be the longest. The transition from the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) to the BB1 operating state (RT3) indicated by the arrow (B) is performed by winning the special combination 1. As mentioned above, in order to win the special role 1, it is necessary to hang three cards. The transition from the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) to the BB2 operating state (RT4) indicated by the arrow (E) is performed by winning the special role 2. As mentioned above, in order to win the special role 2, it is necessary to win the special role 2 after playing two cards and internally winning the loss. The transition from the BB1 operating state (RT3) to the normal gaming state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (C) is performed by paying out 48 medals as a predetermined number. Further, the transition from the BB2 operating state (RT4) to the normal gaming state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (F) is performed by paying out two medals as a predetermined number of medals.

<Type of production state>
Next, the types of the effect state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the transition of the effect state will be described. As described above, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a game console in which the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state is likely to be the longest, and the transition of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state will be described. It should be noted that the transition of the production state in other gaming states is the same as the transition described here. FIG. 7B is a transition diagram of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 7B, as the effect state, the initial state, the point specialization A state, the normal state, the point specialization B state, the precursor state, the confrontation state, and the AT (assist). It is configured so that a total of eight production states, a time) state and a pseudo BB state, can be switched. In the present embodiment, the initial state shifts to the confrontation state via the normal state, and if the AT lottery is won in this confrontation state, the initial state is restored via the AT state, and if the AT lottery is not won, the confrontation state is reached. It adopts a configuration that repeats a series of loops of returning to the initial state from. In the following, the period from the initial state to the return to the initial state may be expressed as a lap. Further, in the present embodiment, items that facilitate the transition to the AT state (“1 defeated body” item and “defeat rate UP” item, which will be described later) are provided, and the accumulated points acquired in the game during the lap (hereinafter, accumulated points) are provided. ) Is adopted so that this item can be acquired. Information on these cumulative points and items is stored in RAM 308. Hereinafter, each effect state will be described based on the above explanation.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of the lap). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next lap). In this initial state, the confrontation mode (described later) and the number of games to shift to the precursor state are set (FIG. 14). That is, in this initial state, it can be said that scheduling for the precursor state and the confrontation state is executed at the start of the lap. Only one game is set in this initial state, and it immediately shifts to the point specialization A state.

The point specialization A state is a state in which points for acquiring an item are likely to increase more than in the normal state. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state.

The normal state is a directing state in which the person mainly stays during the lap. You may be able to earn points in this production state. In the normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in the present embodiment), a lottery of acquired items is executed in exchange for the predetermined number of accumulated points, and an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect). .. Further, in this normal state, the state shifts to the precursor state according to the schedule set in the initial state, but separately, the point specialization B state may be shifted by lottery.

The point specialization B state is a state in which points for acquiring an item are likely to increase more than in the normal state. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the normal state is entered.

There are two types of precursory states: true precursory states and false precursory states. The difference is that the true precursor state shifts to the confrontation state after the set number of games elapses, while the false precursor state returns to the normal state after the set number of games elapses. That is, it can be said that the false precursor state is a production state provided for increasing the expectation of shifting to the confrontation state. You may be able to earn points even in this precursory state.

In the confrontation state, an effect indicating that the confrontation state has been entered is executed in the first game, and a confrontation effect (up to 3 games) between the main character and the enemy character is further executed. Here, in the first game in the confrontation state, an item may be acquired in exchange for the remaining accumulated points, and an effect indicating this (item acquisition effect) may be executed. In addition, if the item has the "defeat rate UP" item, the effect of using the "defeat rate UP" item (item use effect) is executed in the second game. If there is no "defeat rate UP" item in the first game, the confrontation effect is started from the second game (the item use effect is not executed). If the result of the confrontation production is a total victory, it shifts to the AT state, and if the main character is defeated in the confrontation production, it shifts to the initial state. When shifting to the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is set.

In the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small winning combinations 6 to 8) are internally elected, the order of pushing the correct answer is notified. Therefore, the player can obtain more profits. This AT state shifts to the initial state when the set number of AT remaining games becomes 0, but this number of AT remaining games may be added. Further, in the AT state, a lottery that enables the transition to the pseudo BB state is executed, and when the lottery is won, an effect of urging the replaying combination 2 or the replaying combination 3 which is the pseudo BB symbol to be stopped is executed. Then, when the symbol of the re-game combination 2 or the re-game combination 3 is stopped, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state.

In the pseudo BB state, as in the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small winning combinations 6 to 8) are internally elected, the correct push order is notified, and the player can obtain more profits. Will be. There are two types of this pseudo BB state: a pseudo BB1 state shifted by the replay combination 2 and a pseudo BB2 state shifted by the replay combination 3. The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games.

FIG. 7B shows the effect states described above, and the reference numerals (a) to (l) attached to the arrows are the transition conditions between the effect states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the effect state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

<Outline of processing>
Hereinafter, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 8 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, the game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if a medal has been inserted, preparation for transmission of an insertion command indicating this is performed. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start the game.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winner lottery process and the like are executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer update process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set in the game interval timer. Further, at the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, preparations are made for transmitting a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 s in this embodiment) and suppresses gambling.

In step S111, the reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time the stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, the reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, the reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) to the first sub-control unit 400 for each stop operation, and each time the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, the winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the small winning combination 3 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if any winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the number of medals given is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, the state update process is executed. The details of this state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 9. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. The state of the optical sensor is confirmed by this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, the timer update process is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in each time unit, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211 the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main process of the main control unit 300, the timer interrupt process, and the like are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, a basic command, an input command, and a start lever). Acceptance command, internal winning command, effect command associated with effect lottery process, reel rotation start command associated with start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operations of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with 110 to 112 stops, winning commands, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with medal payout processing, status update commands, item addition commands, earned point commands, setting change commands, and power recovery commands. ), Command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S213, the external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is received (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is not received (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, the timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as a specific variable for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery and a stack pointer, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is included. The checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power supply flag indicating that the power failure processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the details of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 to be executed first, the initial setting at startup is performed. In this initial setting, processing such as setting the stack initial value (temporary setting) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308 is performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). If so, monitor whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff). To step S1005. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. Here, the setting key switch is a switch for setting the player's advantage (for example, 6 types of advantages from 1 to 6) in the slot machine 100, and can be operated by opening the front door 102. If this switch is on (the setting key is inserted in the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process proceeds to step S1013, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main control unit initialization process is terminated. In this initialization, for example, the item information and the value of the accumulated points are deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 due to the power of the slot machine 100 being turned off or a momentary interruption (a voltage drop temporarily lower than the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 9). That is, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is surely saved in the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both determinations are normal, the return data of the RAM 308 is displayed. It is determined that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the return data of the RAM 308, a process of returning the register state to the state immediately before the power failure process is executed is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack is stacked. Reset to the pointer (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the slot machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction issued immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing immediately before the power failure. Further, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off. This power recovery command includes information such as RT when the power is turned off, a game state, and an effect state, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt process (step S211 in FIG. 9).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the return data of RAM 308, it shifts to an infinite loop state after preparing to clear the storage area of all RAM 308 except the used stack area (RAM error processing). .. From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or the setting key switch turned on. That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308.

In step S1013, which proceeds when the setting key switch is turned on in step S1005, the setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key, and the main control unit initial setting process is terminated. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. The data cleared here includes item information and cumulative point values.

In step S1103, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (transmitted in step S211 in FIG. 9) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during the setting change, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. By the process here, the tentative set value is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Then, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111. If not, the process proceeds to step S1113. In this embodiment, the bet button is diverted as the setting switch, but the operation means related to the game may be diverted as in this configuration, or the setting switch may be provided separately.

In step S1111, the temporary setting value is updated. In the present embodiment, the temporary setting value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch is operated, and the temporary setting value is set to 1 when the setting switch is operated while the temporary setting value is 6. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of determining the temporarily set value as the set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is closed and the setting key switch is off (the setting key switch is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119, and if not, this step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (transmitted in step S211 in FIG. 9) is executed. Further, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before the change in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

The main control unit 300 of the game console in the present specification returns to the effect state at the time of power interruption when the power is restored. On the other hand, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, if the power is cut off in a certain effect state, it may appear that the sub-control unit 400, 500 has returned to an effect state different from the certain effect state when the power is restored. Unless otherwise specified, the sub-control units 400 and 500 are also in an effect state according to the effect state of the main control unit 300. That is, unless otherwise specified, when the power is restored, the production in the production state at the time of power interruption is performed. Further, the setting can be changed between the time when the power is turned on (after the power is restored) and the time when the first game is started. In the setting change process shown in FIG. 11, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared in step S1101 to initialize the data. Therefore, no matter what the effect state is when the power is cut off, the initial state is restored when the setting change process is performed. Further, even if a game operation such as a bet operation or an operation on the effect is performed at the time of power interruption, when the setting change process is performed, the game operation such as the bet operation or the operation on the effect is not performed. Furthermore, the benefits related to the production (for example, points and items on the production) that were acquired at the time of the power failure also return to the initial state (for example, return to 0 points and 0 items) when the setting change process is performed, and the benefits are related. The display also returns to the display showing the initial state. The above is the principle theory when there is no particular notice.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of various lottery processes (step S105) in the main process of the main control unit of FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 to be executed first, an internal winning combination lottery is executed. In this process, the lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state and RT, and the internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this and the random number value acquired from the random number generation circuit 316. To determine the internal winners. For example, in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state and the RT2 state, the lottery table for the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 6 is read out. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of that combination is turned on.

In step S1203, the item addition process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 (a).

In step S1205, the confrontation setting process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1207, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

In step S1209, AT-related processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1211, preparation for transmission of the internal winning command (transmission in step S211 of FIG. 9) is executed, and the various lottery processes are completed. The internal winning command includes the internal winning combination, the current production state (including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining games in the state and the number of remaining AT games when the period is finite), the confrontation result, and the confrontation result. Information that can identify the result of the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information regarding the number of remaining AT games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, but may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Further, in the AT state or the pseudo BB state, the internal winning command of the internal winning combination (condition devices 7 to 12 shown in FIG. 6) including the small winning combination 6 is a correct answer of the operation order (pushing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Operation instruction information indicating the operation order of is also included.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the details of the item addition process (step S1203) in the various lottery processes of FIG. 12 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the flow of the item addition process (step S1203) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the cumulative points are 1000 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1305, and if not, the item addition process ends.

In step S1305, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. In this embodiment, either a "defeat 1 body" item or a "defeat rate UP" item is selected. Here, the "defeat 1 body" item is an item that is confirmed to win 1 in the confrontation state, and the "defeat rate UP" item is an item that increases the probability of winning in the confrontation state. There are 5 types of "Destroy rate UP" items, "Destroy rate? UP", "Destroy rate small UP", "Destroy rate medium UP", "Destroy rate large UP", and "Destroy rate super UP" in order from the lowest defeat rate. Is provided.

13 (b) and 13 (c) are views showing a table used for the lottery in step S1305. First, the item lottery table A of FIG. 13B is used to select either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, there is a 25% chance that a "Destroy 1" item will be selected, and a 75% chance that a "Destroy Rate UP" item will be selected. If the "defeat rate UP" item is selected here, the type of the "defeat rate UP" item is further selected using the defeat rate UP lottery table A in FIG. 13 (c). If you do not have a "Destroy Rate UP" item in this table (the first "Destroy Rate UP" item you get here), there is a 75% chance that the "Destroy Rate UP" item will be selected and 24%. There is a 1% chance that the "Destroy Rate Great UP" item will be selected, and a 1% chance that the "Destroy Rate Super UP" item will be selected. On the other hand, if you have a "Destroy Rate UP" item (the second or later "Destroy Rate UP" item you get here), there is a 70% chance that the "Defeat Rate Small UP" item will be selected and 25%. There is a 1% chance that the "Destroy Rate Medium UP" item will be selected, a 4% chance that the "Destroy Rate Large UP" item will be selected, and a 1% chance that the "Destroy Rate Super UP" item will be selected.

In step S1307, 1000 is subtracted from the value of the accumulated points, and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1301 which is first executed and proceeds when the effect state is not the normal state, it is determined whether or not it is the first game of the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313, and if not, the item addition process ends.

In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the cumulative points are 1 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1315, and if not, the item addition process ends.

In step S1315, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. 13 (d) and 13 (e) are diagrams showing a table used for the lottery in step S1315. First, the item lottery table B of FIG. 13 (d) is used to select either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, there is a 10% chance that a "Destroy 1" item will be selected, and a 90% chance that a "Destroy Rate UP" item will be selected. If the "defeat rate UP" item is selected here, the type of the "defeat rate UP" item is further selected using the defeat rate UP lottery table B in FIG. 13 (e). In this table, there is a 90% chance that a "defeat rate? UP" item will be selected, and a 10% chance that a "small defeat rate UP" item will be selected. For the item lottery here, by using the same table as the table used in step S1305, the items acquired in the normal state and the items acquired in the confrontation state may be the same.

In step S1317, the value of the accumulated points is cleared (set to 0), and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1321, the process of acquiring the item selected in step S1305 or step S1315 is executed. In this process, the acquired item information is stored (added) in the RAM 308. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of "1 defeated" item possessed is set to 3, and the upper limit of the number of possessed "defeat rate UP" items is set to 8. If the number of selected items has reached the upper limit, no new items will be acquired.

In step S1323, preparation for transmission of the item addition command is executed (transmission in step S211 of FIG. 9), and this item addition process is terminated. This item addition command contains information on the number of items possessed, the order in which they were acquired, and the current cumulative points. In addition, this item addition command is sent even if a new item has not been acquired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the details of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in the various lottery processes of FIG. 12 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG.

First, in step S1401 executed first, it is determined whether or not the confrontation setting condition is satisfied. Here, the confrontation setting condition is satisfied in the initial state. More specifically, it corresponds to the first game after the setting change, the first game after clearing the RAM, the first game after being defeated in the confrontation state, and the first game after the AT state ends. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1403, and if not, the confrontation setting process ends.

In step S1403, the confrontation mode setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 15 (a). FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a table used for setting the confrontation mode. In this embodiment, there are two types of confrontation modes, a normal mode and a chance mode. In the chance mode, the number of games required for laps is less than in the normal mode (the initial state to the confrontation state is shorter), it is easier to shift to the point-specialized B state than in the normal mode, and the pseudo BB lottery is easier than in the normal mode. It is easier to win. In the table shown in FIG. 15A, the probability of setting the chance mode increases as the set value increases. For example, in setting 1 where the player's advantage is the lowest, the probability of setting the chance mode is 20% (the remaining 80% is the normal mode), but in setting 6 where the player's advantage is relatively highest, chance is The mode setting probability is as high as 50% (the remaining 50% is the normal mode).

In step S1405, the precursor start zone setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a table used for setting the precursor start zone. In the present embodiment, the number of games in the lap is defined as a zone divided by a certain range, and zones 1 to 12 are shown in FIG. 15 (b). In this step S1405, a zone for shifting to a precursor state (true precursor state and false precursor state) is set with a lottery probability according to the confrontation mode.

First, the setting of the true precursor state will be described. Only one of the multiple zones is set as the zone that shifts to the true precursor state. In the table of FIG. 15B, one of zones 6 to 12 (the number of games in the lap is 201 or more) is set when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, whereas the zone is set when the confrontation mode is the chance mode. Any of 2 to 4 (the number of games in the lap is 1 to 150) is set. For this reason, the chance mode requires less games to reach the confrontation state.

Next, the setting of the false precursor state will be described. Zones that shift to the false precursor state are set by lottery for each of a plurality of zones. In the table of FIG. 15B, when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, each of zones 3 to 11 (the number of games in the lap is 51 to 499) may be set as a false precursor start zone, and the chance mode In the case of, only zone 3 (the number of games in the lap is 51 to 100) may be set as the false precursor start zone. As a result of this lottery, there are cases where a plurality of zones that shift to the false precursor state are set, and cases where only one zone is set. In addition, when the state shifts to the true precursor state, it then shifts to the confrontation state and returns to the initial state, so that the true precursor state is the last precursor state among the precursor states that shift during the lap. Therefore, the zone after the zone that shifts to the true precursor state may be excluded from the target of the zone that shifts to the false precursor state.

In step S1407, a start game in a precursory state is set for each zone set in step S1405, and this confrontation setting process ends. In this process, for example, when the zone 6 is set as a zone for shifting to the false precursor state, the start game of the false precursor state is set from the range of 201 to 250. Further, when the zone 4 is set as a zone for shifting to the true precursor state, the start game in the true precursor state is set from the range of 101 to 150. The lottery probability of the start game for the zone is equal, but this probability may be biased.

The confrontation setting process shown in FIG. 14 has a configuration in which a zone is selected once and then a start game is selected from within that zone, but the configuration is not limited to the configuration using the zone, and the game shifts to a precursory state. Any configuration may be used to select the starting game.

Next, the details of the point-specialized B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in the various lottery processes of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a). FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 to be executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if not, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the specific combination has been internally elected. Here, the specific combination means the condition devices 2 to 5 (small combinations 1 to 4). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1505, and if not, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1505, the transition lottery process to the point specialization B state is executed using the table shown in FIG. 16B. FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery for transition to the point-specialized B state. For example, if the condition device 2 (small winning combination 1, watermelon) is internally won, if the confrontation mode is the normal mode, there is a 3/100 chance of winning (shifting to the point specialization B state), and the confrontation mode is a chance. If it is a mode, there is a 50/100 chance of winning (shifting to the point specialization B state). Then, if the player wins, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to on. After that, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is completed.

Next, the details of the AT-related process (step S1209) in the various lottery processes of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG.

First, in step S1601 to be executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the specific combination (conditional devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1605, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1605, the acquisition lottery process for the "defeated one" item is executed using the table shown in FIG. 18A. In this table, if you win the small role 1 (watermelon) internally, there is a 1% chance, and if you win the small role 2 (weak cherry) internally, there is a 1% chance that the small role 3 (strong cherry) If you win internally, there is a 100% chance that if you win a small role 4 (chance), there is a 13% chance that you will get a "defeat 1" item. If the number of "Destroy 1" items has already reached the upper limit, the "Destroy 1" item will not be acquired. Further, when the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character has started in the confrontation state, the confrontation result is determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615) executed prior to this, so that "one defeated body". Instead of the process of getting the item, this confrontation result is rewritten. Specifically, if one of the three games includes the defeat of the main character, this one is rewritten as the victory of the main character. As a result, when the main character wins in all three games, the AT state schedule flag is turned on and the number of remaining AT games is set by lottery. The lottery for the number of remaining AT games is the same as the lottery for the number of remaining AT games in the confrontation result lottery process described later.

In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 5. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1609, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the item "defeat rate UP" is possessed. If the item "Defeat rate UP" is not possessed, the process proceeds to step S1611, and if the item is possessed, the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1611, the value of the number of games remaining in the confrontation state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1613, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 4. This condition is a condition that is satisfied in the game immediately before the confrontation production by the main character and the enemy character (the number of remaining games in the confrontation state starts from 3) starts. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1615, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1615, the confrontation result lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the main character wins in each of the three games. The initial value of the victory probability (defeat rate) of this hero character is 50%, but 6% is added as a basic addition for each "defeat rate UP" item, and the table shown in FIG. 18 (b). The defeat rate is added using. For example, if there is a "defeat rate? UP" item, there is a 50/100 chance of 6% (basic addition 6% + table addition 0%), and a 50/100 chance of 11% (basic addition 6). % + 5% added by the table) will be added to the defeat rate. Based on this added defeat rate, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the main character wins in each of the three games. If the result of the previous game is a defeat, the lottery for the later game may not be performed.

Also, if there is one "Destroy 1" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed instead of drawing a lottery for one game. That is, when there are three "defeated one" items, it is confirmed that the main character wins without drawing lots in all three games, and the transition to the AT state is certain.

When the confrontation result in which the main character wins in all three games is obtained by the above processing, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON, and the number of AT remaining games is set using the table of FIG. 18 (c). Lottery and setting.

In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, this AT-related process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1619.

In step S1619, the AT direct hit lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 18D. Here, apart from the lottery process in step S1615, a lottery for whether or not to shift to the AT state is executed. In the table of FIG. 18D, for example, when the set value is 1, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/7500, and when the set value is 6, the probability is 1/1000. When the lottery here is won, if the confrontation result is determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615), this confrontation result is rewritten to all wins of the main character, and the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. At the same time, the lottery and setting of the number of remaining AT games is performed using the table of FIG. 18C (similar to the case where the AT state schedule flag is set to ON in step S1615). On the other hand, if the confrontation result has not been decided yet, the process is executed so that the main character wins all (for example, "1 defeat" item is added up to the maximum number).

In step S1621, which proceeds when the effect state is not the confrontation state in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1623, and if not, the AT-related processing is terminated.

In step S1623, the pseudo BB lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 18 (e). According to this table, if the confrontation mode is the normal mode, there is a 1/500 probability, and if the confrontation mode is the chance mode, there is a 1/100 probability that the lottery will be won. If the player wins, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to on, and it becomes possible to shift to the pseudo BB state in a later game.

In step S1625, it is determined whether or not the specific combination (conditional devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1627, and if not, the AT-related processing is terminated.

In step S1627, the lottery process for adding the number of remaining AT games is executed using the table shown in FIG. 18 (f). In this table, for example, if the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the addition is performed with a probability of 1/13. Further, as the number of additional games at that time, 20 is set with a probability of 9/100, 30 with a probability of 70/100, 50 with a probability of 20/100, and 100 with a probability of 1/100.

Next, the details of the state update process (step S117) in the main process of the main control unit of FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the state update process (step S117) in FIG.

First, in step S1A01, which is executed first, the point acquisition process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20 (a).

In step S1A03, RT is updated. As described above, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, since the RT and the game state have a one-to-one relationship, when the RT is updated, the game state is also updated.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the initial state, and if it is the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A07, and if it is not the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, the initial state processing is executed. Here, the effect state is set to the point specialization A state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state is set to 30. Then, the process proceeds to step S1A35.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization A state, and if it is the point specialization A state, the process proceeds to step S1A11, and if it is not the point specialization A state, the process proceeds to step S1A13.

In step S1A11, the point specialization A state process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the point-specific A state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (a).

In step S1A13, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if it is the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A15, and if it is not the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A17.

In step S1A15, the normal state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the normal state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (b).

In step S1A17, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization B state, and if it is the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A19, and if it is not the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A21.

In step S1A19, the point specialization B state process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the point-specific B state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (c).

In step S1A21, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the precursor state, and if it is the precursor state, the process proceeds to step S1A23, and if it is not the precursor state, the process proceeds to step S1A25.

In step S1A23, the precursor state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the precursor state processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A25, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state, and if it is the confrontation state, the process proceeds to step S1A27, and if it is not the confrontation state, the process proceeds to step S1A29.

In step S1A27, the confrontation state process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the confrontation state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S1A29, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state, and if it is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A31, and if it is not the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A33.

In step S1A31, AT state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of AT state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 (a).

In step S1A33, pseudo BB state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the pseudo BB state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 (b).

In step S1A35, preparation for transmission of a state update command including information on the game state, RT, and effect state (transmission in step S211 in FIG. 9) is executed, and this state update process is terminated.

Next, the details of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in the state update process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a). The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG.

First, in step S1B01, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point acquisition condition is satisfied. The point acquisition condition here is a condition that is satisfied in the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the precursor state. However, even in the normal state, the point acquisition condition is not satisfied even in the normal state for the game (the game in which the item acquisition effect is executed) started in the state where the accumulated points exceed 1000. If this point acquisition condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B03, and if not, the point acquisition process ends.

In step S1B03, the point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 20 (b). FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of earned points. For example, if you do not win any of the condition devices internally under normal conditions (in the case of loss), there is a 90% chance of getting 0 points, a 9% chance of getting 5 points, and a 1% chance. Earn 10 points with a probability. Then, the value of the acquired points is added to the accumulated points. In this description, the points earned in one game are referred to as earned points, and the cumulative total of earned points during the lap is referred to as cumulative points.

In step S1B05, preparation for transmitting the earned point command (transmission in step S211 in FIG. 9) is executed. This command includes information on the value of earned points and the production status. After that, this point acquisition process ends.

Next, the details of the point-specific A state process (step S1A11) in the state update process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the point-specific A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG.

First, in step S1C01 executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in the point-specialized A state is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05, and if not, the point specialization A state process is terminated.

In step S1C05, the effect state is set to the normal state, and the point specialization A state process is terminated.

Next, the details of the normal state process (step S1A15) in the state update process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG.

First, in step S1C11 executed first, it is determined whether or not the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C13, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C13, the point specialization B state setting process is executed. Here, the effect state is set to the point specialization B state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is set to 5. Then, the process proceeds to step S1C15.

In step S1C15, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C17, it is determined whether or not the condition for transition to the precursory state is satisfied. This transition condition is satisfied when the start game of the precursory state set in the confrontation setting process (FIG. 14) is reached. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C19, and if not, the normal state processing is terminated.

In step S1C19, the effect state is set to the precursor state, and any value from 1 to 32 is set as the value of the number of games remaining in the precursor state by lottery (the probability that each value is selected is equal). After that, this normal state processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the point-specific B state processing (step S1A19) in the state update processing of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (c). FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the point-specific B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG.

First, in step S1C21 to be executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in the point-specialized B state is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1C23.

In step S1C23, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C25, and if not, the point specialization B state processing is terminated.

In step S1C25, the effect state is set to the normal state, and the point specialization B state process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the details of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in the state update processing of FIG. 19 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG.

First, in step S1D01 executed first, the value of the number of games remaining in the precursor state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1D03.

In step S1D03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the precursor state is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D05, and if not, the precursor state processing is terminated.

In step S1D05, it is determined whether or not the precursor state is the true precursor state. If it is in the true precursor state, the process proceeds to step S1D07, and if it is not in the true precursor state (in the case of the false precursor state), the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D07, the effect state is set to the confrontation state, and 5 is set as the value of the number of games remaining in the confrontation state. After that, this precursor state processing is terminated.

In step S1D09, the effect state is set to the normal state, and the precursor state process is terminated.

Next, the details of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in the state update process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG.

First, in step S1E01 to be executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E03.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E05, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E13.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E11.

In step S1E07, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, the AT state schedule flag is set to off, and this confrontation state processing ends.

In step S1E11, the effect state is set to the initial state, and the confrontation state process is terminated.

In step S1E03, which proceeds when the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is not 0, whether or not the hero is defeated in the confrontation effect being executed is based on the confrontation result (set by the AT-related process in FIG. 17). It is judged. The value of the number of games remaining in the confrontation state corresponds to the three confrontation productions, and the first game corresponds to 3, the second game corresponds to 2, and the third game corresponds to 1. In addition, the confrontation result includes information on the outcome of the three confrontations. Therefore, it is determined from the value of the number of games remaining in the current confrontation state how many games are currently played, and the corresponding victory or defeat is derived from the confrontation result to determine whether or not the main character has been defeated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E11, and if not, the confrontation state process is terminated.

Next, the details of the AT state process (step S1A31) in the state update process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (a). FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG.

First, in step S1F01 executed first, the value of the number of remaining AT games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F03.

In step S1F03, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F05, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F05, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB symbol has stopped. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F07, the effect state is set to the pseudo BB state, and the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to off, and a predetermined value is set for the number of games remaining in the pseudo BB state (50 for pseudo BB1, 20 for pseudo BB2, see FIGS. 5 and 7 (b)). Is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F11, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining AT games is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F13, and if not, the AT state processing is terminated.

In step S1F13, the effect state is set to the initial state, and the AT state process is terminated.

Next, the details of the pseudo BB state process (step S1A33) in the state update process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (b). FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG.

First, in step S1F21 executed first, the value of the number of games remaining in the pseudo BB state is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F23.

In step S1F23, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games remaining in the pseudo BB state is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F25, and if not, the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

In step S1F25, the effect state is set to the AT state, and this pseudo BB state process is terminated.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. Note that FIG. 25A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 25B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 25C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. In this process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state. The effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. Here, the process of expanding the effect data and setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command. Based on the information contained in the command and the command, the effect data is set and the control process is executed. In addition, the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the effect content is changed based on the overwritten data. The details of this effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute the effect by sound.

In step S313, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the various lamps 420, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to execute the effect by the lamps.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 424 to execute the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed in which a control command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 25A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S333, device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, and the effect random number value is updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process (step S309) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3001 to be executed first, the information acquisition / update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3003. In the first sub control unit 400, various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 300, and in this information acquisition / update process, the information (RT, game state, effect state, cumulative points, earned points, items) included in the various commands is transmitted. The number of possessions and the order of acquisition, the number of remaining AT games, the number of additional AT games, etc.) are appropriately acquired and these information are stored (updated). The first sub-control unit 400 executes various effects based on this information. When a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the information about the game state and the effect state is updated based on the information included in the power recovery command, but the effect state is the point-specialized A state. Only when the information indicating that is received, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the normal state instead of the point specialization A state. Therefore, if a power failure / recovery occurs when the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are after the power is restored. The production state of is inconsistent. After that, until the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, the effect state in which the effect state does not match is maintained.

In step S3003, the display point management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3005. The details of this display point management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 (a).

In step S3005, the display item management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3007. The details of this display item management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

In step S3007, the navigation-related display process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3009. For example, when the effect state is the AT state, the number of AT remaining games and the number of AT additional games are displayed, and the number of medals acquired in that state is displayed. Further, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally elected, an effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer is set, and if the condition device 1 is internally elected with the pseudo BB state schedule flag turned on, this pseudo BB is set. An effect is set to urge the stop of the role corresponding to the state schedule flag. Furthermore, when the AT state is changed to the pseudo BB state, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally elected, an effect of notifying the correct operation order is set, and medals are continuously obtained from the AT state. The number is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of medals won is displayed through the AT state and the pseudo BB state. In the pseudo BB state, the value of the pseudo BB state remaining game number is displayed instead of the AT remaining game number, and the AT remaining game number is not subtracted.

In step S3009, other effect setting processing is executed, and this effect control process is terminated. Here, for example, a process of displaying a background or executing an effect as appropriate is executed according to the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400. In this process, if the display point reaches 1000 when all the reels are stopped, 1000 is subtracted from the display point, and a display indicating that the right to acquire the item in the next game is obtained (for example, is displayed. A process for executing "roulette x 1") is included. Further, in the confrontation state, a process of executing a confrontation effect based on the confrontation result is included. When displaying the background according to the effect state in this process, if the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is adjusted. The background is displayed.

Next, the details of the display point management process (step S3003) in the effect control process of FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG. 26.

First, in step S3101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the acquisition point command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are inconsistent (the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, and the first sub control unit 400 is in the normal state). Will be done. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3105, the point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of earned points. It should be noted that this table is the same as the part of the table shown in FIG. 20 (b) that is used when the effect state is the normal state. For example, if you have not won any of the condition devices internally (in the case of loss), there is a 90% chance of getting 0 points, a 9% chance of getting 5 points, and a 1% chance of getting 10 points. Earn points. The lottery process may be executed by the main control unit 300. For example, when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are in a disagreement, the acquisition points sent by the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 are derived separately from the normal acquisition points. However, this value may be used in the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S3107, the value of the acquired points is added to the display points, and the process proceeds to step S3121. As the acquired points to be added here, the value of the acquired points included in the acquired point command is used as it is, but when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match, it is selected in step S3105. The value given is used. Further, the display point is a point displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In step S3111, which proceeds when the information of the acquired points cannot be obtained in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3113, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3113, the value of the accumulated points included in the item addition command is set to the value of the display point, and the process proceeds to step S3121. If the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match, this process resolves the situation.

In step S3121, it is determined whether or not the condition for displaying the display point is satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is any one of an initial state, a point specialization A state, a normal state, a point specialization B state, a precursor state, and a confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3123, and if not, the display point management process is terminated.

In step S3123, a process for displaying the value of the display point is executed, and this display point management process is terminated.

Next, the details of the display item management process (step S3005) in the effect control process of FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the flow of the display item management process (step S3005) in FIG. 26.

First, in step S3201 executed first, it is determined whether or not the item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3203, the information of the currently possessed item is updated based on the information included in the item addition command, and the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, it is determined whether or not the value of the display point is larger than 0 or there is a display of "roulette x 1". If any of these conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3207, and if not, the display item management process ends.

In step S3207, the item acquisition effect setting process is executed, and this display item management process is terminated. The details of the item acquisition effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In step S3211, which proceeds when it is determined in step S3201 that the item addition information has not been obtained, it is determined whether or not the internal winning command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3213, and if not, the display item management process ends.

In step S3213, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 4. When the effect state in the main control unit 300 is the confrontation state, the internal winning command includes information on the value of the number of games remaining in the confrontation state, and the value of the number of games remaining in the confrontation state in the game immediately before the confrontation effect is included. It becomes 4. That is, the above determination is to determine whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the confrontation effect. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3215, and if not, the process proceeds. This display item management process ends.

In step S3215, an effect of using the "defeat rate UP" item among the displayed items is set. Specifically, an effect of erasing all the displayed "defeat rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (confrontation result determined in the AT-related process of FIG. 17) is executed. If the "Defeat rate UP" item is not displayed, the above effect is not set.

In step S3217, the item information (possessed item and display item) stored in the RAM 408 is cleared, and the display item management process is terminated.

Next, the details of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in the display item management process of FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in FIG. 28.

First, in step S3301 to be executed first, the information of the item currently displayed on the effect image display 157 and the information of the item currently possessed are compared, and the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, as a result of comparison in step S3301, it is determined whether or not there is a difference between the two items. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3305, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3305, an item acquisition effect as a result of not obtaining an additional item is set, and this item acquisition effect setting process ends.

In step S3311, as a result of comparison in step S3301, it is determined whether or not there is one difference between the items. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313, and if not (when there are a plurality of differences in items), the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3313, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been obtained is set, and the item acquisition effect setting process ends. When an item is acquired (acquired in step S1321 of FIG. 13A) in the normal game progress, the information of the acquired item is added to the information of the possessed item included in the item addition command. Since this information is not reflected in the displayed item, only the newly acquired one will be different when compared with the information of the item in possession. From the above, comparing the displayed item with the information of the item currently possessed, if only the newly acquired item is different, the newly acquired item in step S3313 is added. The effect (item acquisition effect) is set. If the number of items possessed has reached the upper limit, the item addition command will be sent, but since there are no newly acquired items, there will be no difference even if the above comparison is performed. In this case, an effect of the same mode as the item acquisition effect, in which the item is not finally added, is set (step S3305).

In step S3321, as a result of comparison in step S3301, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of different items. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3323.

In step S3323, it is determined whether or not the item "defeat rate UP" that is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 is possessed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3325, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3325, an item acquisition effect for adding the oldest item among the "defeat rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed among the possessed items is set, and this item acquisition effect setting process is terminated. When the power is cut off and restored due to the end of business hours or the like, the information of the items possessed by the main control unit 300 is restored (step S1011 in FIG. 10), but the first sub control unit 400 restores the power. Information about the displayed item is erased from RAM 408. When a new item is acquired in this state, the item displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the information of the possessed item included in the item addition command may differ for a plurality of items including the newly acquired item. There is sex. In this way, if the displayed item and the information of the possessed item are compared and the information other than the newly acquired one is different (determination of No in step S3311), the possessed item is included. Among the "defeat rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed in, set the item acquisition effect to add the oldest item (step S3325). If the item "defeat rate UP" is not possessed, an item acquisition effect for adding a newly acquired item is set (step S3313). However, when the production state is the confrontation state, the items to be acquired are different from the normal state (step S1305, step S1315 in FIG. 13), so that the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items is If the item acquisition effect is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the effect state is the confrontation state, the item acquisition effect for adding the newly acquired item is set (Yes in step S3321).

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. Note that FIG. 30A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 30B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 30C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 30D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 30A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of a storage area in RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30 (d). When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 30A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S419, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S425. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S431. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered.

In step S431, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

≪Operation explanation≫
Hereinafter, the features of the slot machine 100 described above will be described with reference to operation examples.

[Until the production state shifts from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state will be described. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state.

The initial state is set in the first game after the setting is changed or after the RAM is cleared (at the start of the lap, step S1009 in FIG. 10, step S1101 in FIG. 11). It is also set when the confrontation state or the AT state ends (at the start of the next lap, step S1E11 in FIG. 23, step S1F13 in FIG. 24A). FIG. 31A shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. In "0000/1000" at the lower left of this display, the upper part is the cumulative points on the display, and the lower part is the upper limit of the cumulative points on the display. That is, the display of "0000/1000" indicates that the cumulative points are 0 points. The display of this point is displayed until the confrontation result is displayed in the confrontation state, and is not displayed in the AT state or the pseudo BB state (steps S3121 and S3123 in FIG. 27A). In this embodiment, a value different from the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 may be displayed as the cumulative points on the display due to power interruption and power recovery.

When the game is started in this state and one game is completed (all reels are stopped), the display of the effect image display device 157 is in the state shown in FIG. 31 (b). During this one game, the confrontation mode and the number of games to shift to the precursor state are set (FIG. 14). In FIG. 31B, a message indicating that the setting of the confrontation mode is completed is displayed at the upper part of the screen. At the time of FIG. 31A, the confrontation mode has not been set yet, and a message indicating that the confrontation mode setting has not been completed is displayed at the upper part of the screen. It shifts to the precursor state according to the number of games set here.

Only one game is set in the initial state, and when the next game is started from the state of FIG. 31B, the state shifts to the point specialization A state (step S1A07 in FIG. 19). FIG. 31C shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the point specialization A state is set. This point specialization A state is a state in which points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 20 (b)), and in FIG. 31 (c), points are increased more than in the normal state. A message indicating that the condition is easy to operate is displayed at the upper part of the screen. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C05 in FIG. 21A). FIG. 31D shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set.

[Until the production state shifts from the normal state to the point-specialized B state or the false precursor state and returns to the normal state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow from the normal state to the point-specialized B state or the false precursor state and then to the normal state again will be described. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false precursor state and returns to the normal state.

The normal state is a directing state in which the person mainly stays during the lap. In this effect state, points may be obtained based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (see FIG. 20). FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. Note that FIG. 32 (a) is an example of a state in which the item is not displayed, and FIG. 32 (b) is an example of a state in which the item is displayed. From this normal state, it shifts to any of the point specialization B state, the false precursor state, and the true precursor state. Of these, the point-specialized B state and the false precursor state shift to the normal state again, whereas the true precursor state does not shift to the normal state. Here, the transition to the point-specialized B state and the false precursor state will be described.

In the normal state, a lottery for transitioning to the point-specialized B state is executed based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (FIG. 16), and if this is won, the transition to the point-specialized B state is executed (FIG. 21 (b). ) Step S1C13). FIGS. 32 (c) and 32 (d) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the point specialization B state is set. Note that FIG. 32 (c) is an example of a state in which the item is not displayed, and FIG. 32 (d) is an example of a state in which the item is displayed. This point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring an item are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 20 (b)), and in FIGS. 32 (c) and 32 (d), the points are in the normal state. A message indicating that the state is more likely to increase is displayed at the upper part of the screen. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C25 in FIG. 21 (c)).

Further, in the normal state, when the number of started games in the false precursor state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the false precursor state (number of remaining games in the precursor state) is set and the game shifts to the false precursor state (FIG. 21 (b). ) Step S1C19). FIGS. 32 (e) and 32 (f) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this false precursor state is set. Note that FIG. 32 (e) is an example of a state in which the item is not displayed, and FIG. 32 (f) is an example of a state in which the item is displayed. This false precursor state is a state in which the points for acquiring an item are likely to increase more than in the normal state (see FIG. 20 (b)). In FIGS. 32 (e) and 32 (f), a message indicating that the state is a precursor is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. It should be noted that this screen is the same as the screen of the true precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) by this screen alone. This false precursor state shifts to the normal state after the set number of games has elapsed (step S1D09 in FIG. 22).

[Acquisition of items when the production state is normal]
Hereinafter, the flow of item acquisition when the effect state is the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an effect of item acquisition when the effect state is a normal state.

In the normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in the present embodiment), a lottery of acquired items is executed in exchange for the predetermined number of accumulated points (Yes route in step S1303 in FIG. 13A). , An effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 28, FIG. 29). FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (f) show an example of the change due to the item acquisition effect.

First, FIG. 33A shows that the cumulative points on the display have reached 1000 in the normal state. When all the reels are stopped in this state, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points on the display as shown in FIG. 33 (b), and "roulette x 1" indicating that the right to acquire the item in the next game is obtained. Is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 for starting the game, the display of "roulette x 1" shown in FIG. 33 (b) is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), a roulette effect is executed in which one of the three "defeat 1 body", "defeat rate? UP", and "chance" is selected. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, the effect in which one of the options is decided is executed. FIG. 33 (e) shows an example of displaying that the item "Defeat rate small UP" has been acquired. Further, in FIG. 33 (f), it is shown that the display for the items acquired in the next game is added.

“1 defeated body” and “defeat rate? UP” in FIG. 33 (d) indicate the possibility of acquiring the item having the same name. In addition, the display of "chance" indicates the possibility of acquiring some item. If the number of items has reached the upper limit and cannot be acquired, the effect that the item could not be acquired is executed after this "chance" is selected. That is, what is displayed as an option in the item acquisition effect is not limited to the item showing the item with the same name, but suggests the presence or absence of acquisition such as "hit" or "missing", for example. May be good.

As explained above, the normal state may shift to the point-specialized B state or the precursor state, and more points may be acquired, but the item cannot be acquired in the point-specialized B state or the precursor state. It has become. For this reason, for example, a situation may occur in which the point-specialized B state (or precursor state) shifts to the normal state when the cumulative points are 2000 or more, but only one item can be acquired in one game. There is. For example, when the cumulative points are 2000 or more, the item acquisition process is executed for two games in a row.

[Until the production state shifts from the normal state to the true precursor state and then to the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow from the normal state to the true precursor state and the confrontation state will be described. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true precursor state and then to the confrontation state.

FIG. 34A shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. In the normal state, when the number of games that have already been set to start in the sign state is reached, the number of games in the sign state (number of games remaining in the sign state) is set and the game shifts to the sign state (FIG. 21 (b)). Step S1C19). FIG. 34B shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this true precursor state is set. This true precursor state is a state in which the points for acquiring an item are likely to increase more than in the normal state (see FIG. 20 (b)). In FIG. 34 (b), a message indicating the precursory state is displayed in the upper right of the screen. It should be noted that this screen is the same as the false precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) by this screen alone. This true precursor state shifts to the confrontation state after the set number of games has elapsed (step S1D07 in FIG. 22). FIG. 34 (c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this confrontation state is set.

[About the item acquisition effect during the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, the flow of item acquisition when the effect state is the confrontation state will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c). The figure is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is a confrontation state.

In the confrontation state, an effect indicating that the confrontation state has been reached is executed in the first game, but if there are accumulated points remaining in this game, an item is acquired in exchange for this (FIG. 13 (a)). Yes) in step S1313, and an effect indicating this (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 28, FIG. 29) is executed. Since there is no route to shift from the confrontation state to the normal state and item acquisition in the normal state is not performed in the lap, 130 points are wasted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an item can be acquired in exchange for the remaining points that do not reach 1000 points in the normal state.

First, FIG. 35A shows that there are 130 cumulative points on the display in the game (true precursor state) immediately before the transition to the confrontation state. Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 at the start of the game, the cumulative points on the display are set to 0 as shown in FIG. 35 (b), and "1 defeat", "defeat rate? UP", and "defeat rate small UP" are set. A roulette effect is performed in which one of the three items is selected. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, the effect in which one of the options is decided is executed. FIG. 35 (c) shows an example of displaying that the “defeat rate? UP” item has been acquired. The content of the item acquisition effect here may be the same as or different from the item acquisition effect in the normal state.

The above is the production executed in the first game in the confrontation state. In the second game, if the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, an effect using this item is executed (FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)). On the other hand, when the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed, the confrontation effect starts (FIG. 35 (g)).

[About the item usage effect during the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, the flow of item use when the effect state is the confrontation state will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (f). The figure is a diagram showing an example of an item use effect when the effect state is a confrontation state.

In the confrontation state, when the "defeat rate UP" item is possessed, the effect of using the "defeat rate UP" item (item use effect) is executed in the second game (Yes in step S3213 of FIG. 28). .. First, by operating the start lever 135 at the start of the second game in the confrontation state, the message "Defeat rate UP challenge" is displayed at the upper part of the screen as shown in FIG. 35 (d). Further, when all the reels are stopped, the message "Press the XX button!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (e), and by operating the corresponding button, the "press the XX button!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (f). The victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character by the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, and the "defeat rate UP" item is deleted. In FIG. 35 (f), it is shown that the victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character is 72% by the "defeat rate UP" item. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the example of displaying the defeat rate by the above-mentioned button operation, and may be configured to display the defeat rate without requiring such an operation. Further, the operation means used as the button operation may be one used for the progress of the game, or may use the operation means provided for the production regardless of the progress of the game.

The confrontation effect is started from the next game of the game in which the above item use effect is executed. If the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed at the end of the first game of the confrontation effect, the above item use effect is not executed and the confrontation effect is performed from the second game (FIG. 35 (g)). Is started.

[When you win all the confrontation production during the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, the case where the confrontation effect during the confrontation state is completely won will be described with reference to FIG. 36. The figure is a diagram showing an example in the case of winning all the confrontation productions.

In the confrontation state, a lottery for whether or not the main character wins the enemy character is executed (step S1615 in FIG. 17), and a confrontation effect based on the lottery result is executed (step S3009 in FIG. 26). The "defeat rate UP" item and the "defeat 1 body" item make it easier for the main character to win and shift to the AT state (see the process in step S1615 in FIG. 17).

FIG. 36 (a) shows an example at the start of the first battle of the confrontation production, and FIG. 36 (b) shows an example of winning the first battle of the confrontation production. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen of FIG. 36 (b), the characters "defeat the first body" indicating that the first battle was won are displayed. This character is displayed until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 36 (c) shows an example at the start of the second battle of the confrontation production, and FIG. 36 (d) shows an example of winning the second battle of the confrontation production. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen of FIG. 36 (d), the characters "defeat the second body" indicating that the second battle has been won are displayed. This character is displayed until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 36 (e) shows an example at the start of the third battle of the confrontation production, and FIG. 36 (f) shows an example of winning the third battle of the confrontation production. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen of FIG. 36 (f), the characters "defeat the third body" indicating that the third battle has been won are displayed. This character is displayed until the end of the confrontation effect.

When the confrontation production is a total victory, the AT state schedule flag is set to on at the time of the lottery of the confrontation result prior to this. As a result, the game shifts to the AT state from the next game in which all the wins are made in the confrontation production (Yes in step S1E05 in FIG. 23). FIG. 36 (g) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set.

[About the case of losing the confrontation production during the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, a case where the player loses the confrontation effect during the confrontation state will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The figure is a diagram showing an example of a case where the confrontation production is defeated.

In the confrontation state, a lottery for whether or not the main character wins the enemy character is executed (step S1615 in FIG. 17), and a confrontation effect based on the lottery result is executed (step S3009 in FIG. 26).

FIG. 37 (a) shows an example at the start of the first battle of the confrontation production, and FIG. 37 (b) shows an example of the case where the first battle of the confrontation production is defeated. As in the example of FIG. 36, if the confrontation effect is completely won, the AT state is entered, but if the main character is defeated in the confrontation effect, the game shifts to the initial state from the next game (step S1E11 in FIG. 23). FIG. 37C shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. After shifting to the initial state, various settings will be executed and the next lap will start.

[Transition from AT state to pseudo BB or initial state]
Hereinafter, the flow from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state.

In the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small winning combinations 6 to 8) are internally won, the player is notified of the correct push order (step S3007 in FIG. 26), so that the player can make more profits. It is in a state where it can be acquired. FIG. 38A shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this AT state is set. In the example of FIG. 38 (a), it is shown that the three numbers are used to notify the correct push order in the left and right. In addition, the number of remaining games in the AT state and the number of elapsed games in the AT state up to the present are displayed in the lower left of the screen, and the acquisition after shifting to the AT state in this lap is displayed in the lower right of the screen. The number of medals is displayed. The AT state shifts to the initial state when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 (step S1F13 in FIG. 24). FIG. 38 (c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. The number of remaining AT games may be added (step S1627 in FIG. 17).

Further, in the AT state, a lottery that enables the transition to the pseudo BB state is executed (step S1623 in FIG. 17). When this lottery is won, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and an effect of urging the pseudo BB symbol, the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 to be stopped is executed (step S3007 in FIG. 26). Then, when the symbol of the re-game combination 2 or the re-game combination 3 is stopped, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state (step S1F07 in FIG. 24A).

In the pseudo BB state, as in the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small winning combinations 6 to 8) are internally elected, the correct push order is notified, and the player can obtain more profits. (Step S3007 in FIG. 26). FIG. 38B shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this pseudo BB state is set. In the example of FIG. 38 (b), it is shown that the three numbers are used to notify the correct push order in the left and right. Further, in the lower left of the screen, the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state and the number of elapsed games in the pseudo BB state up to now are displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the screen, the number of medals won is continuously displayed from the AT state. There are two types of this pseudo BB state: a pseudo BB1 state shifted by the replay combination 2 and a pseudo BB2 state shifted by the replay combination 3. The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have elapsed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have elapsed (step S1F25 in FIG. 24B).

[About the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 in the first sub control unit 400]
Hereinafter, the operations of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

As described in the operation examples of FIGS. 31 to 38, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the points acquired when the effect state is the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the precursor state are used. The cumulative points increase, and the item is acquired in exchange for the cumulative points of a predetermined value (1000 in the embodiment). In the example of FIG. 39 (upper part of the figure), the production state changes from the initial state to the normal state through the point specialization A state, and the cumulative points (cumulative P in the figure) reach 1000 in the next game, which is 1000. It is shown that you have acquired the "Destroyed Medium UP" item in exchange for the accumulated points (Main control: Medium UP is added to the possessed item column). In addition, in the next game where the cumulative points reached 1010 after that (lower part of the figure), in exchange for 1000 cumulative points, a "small UP defeat rate" item (main control: a small UP was added to the possessed item column) was acquired. It is shown that. Here, only 10 cumulative points remain and will be used after the next game.

The above operations are executed by the main control unit 300, and these states are reflected by the first sub-control unit 400. First, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 reflects the effect state of the main control unit 300 (step S1A35 in FIG. 19 and step S3001 in FIG. 26), and the effect state as in the operation examples of FIGS. 31 to 38. It will be in the state according to.

Further, in the first sub-control unit 400, the points acquired for each game are added to the display points (step S3107 in FIG. 27A). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, the values are the same as the display points and the cumulative points of the main control unit 300. By displaying the value of this display point, the player can grasp the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 (step S3123 in FIG. 27A).

Further, in the first sub control unit 400, when the main control unit 300 acquires the item, the information of the possessed item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 13A), and the item acquisition effect and the display item are displayed based on this information. Is executed (step S3207 in FIG. 28, step S3313 in FIG. 29). FIG. 39 shows that the item acquisition effect is executed and the display item of the first sub control unit 400 is added in the game in which the possessed item is added in the main control unit 300.

[Handling of points in the event of power failure / recovery]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. 40 and 41 are diagrams showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 39, the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 by the first sub control unit 400 has been described. However, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400, so that the main control unit is used. The cumulative points and the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. FIG. 40A shows an example in which power interruption and power recovery occur when the value of the accumulated points is 500. In this case, it is shown that the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 do not change before and after the power failure / recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 become 0 after the power failure / recovery. In this case, since the display points increase from here, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 and the increase amount are the same, but the values do not match.

After that, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A), and the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed items are executed based on this information. (Step S3207 in FIG. 28, step S3313 in FIG. 29). FIG. 40A shows that in the game in which the possessed item is added in the main control unit 300, the item acquisition effect is executed and the display item of the first sub control unit 400 is added. There is. Further, at this time, the value of the accumulated points is reflected in the value of the display points (step S3113 in FIG. 27 (a)). Therefore, from this point on, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 and the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 match. In this case, the item acquisition effect is executed when the display point has not reached 1000.

Unlike the above example, when the power failure / recovery occurs when the effect state is the point specialization A state, not only the point but also the effect state is configured to be in a mismatched state (). Step S3001) in FIG. 26. FIG. 40B shows an example in which the effect state is the point specialization A state and the power failure / recovery occurs when the cumulative point value is 500. In this case, it is shown that the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 do not change before and after the power failure / recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 become 0 after the power failure / recovery. Further, it is shown that the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains in the point specialization A state before and after the power interruption and recovery, but the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is in the normal state. ing. In this case, the increase amount of the display points does not reflect the increase amount of the cumulative points of the main control unit 300, and the increase amount is separately drawn (step S3105 in FIG. 27A). FIG. 40 (b) shows that the amount of increase in accumulated points and the amount of increase in display points may not match. Specifically, after the power failure, the cumulative points increase from 500 to 20, 200, 0, 0 in that order, while the display points increase from 0 to 5, 20, 5, 0 in that order. ing. After that, when the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, the state matches the effect state of the first sub control unit 400, and from this point onward, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 are the same as in FIG. 40 (a). And the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are the same. Then, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A), and the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed items are executed based on this information (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). Step S3207 of FIG. 28, step S3313 of FIG. 29), the value of the cumulative points is reflected in the value of the display points (step S3113 of FIG. 27 (a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 and the display points of the first sub control unit 400 match.

FIG. 41 shows an example in which a power failure / recovery occurs immediately after the effect state shifts from the initial state to the point specialization A state. In this example, the cumulative points and display points immediately after the power is restored are both 0. Further, as in FIG. 40 (b), it is shown that the effect state of the main control unit 300 is still in the point specialization A state, but the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is in the normal state. ing. In this case, as in FIG. 40B, the increase amount of the display points does not reflect the increase amount of the cumulative points of the main control unit 300, and the increase amount is separately drawn (step S3105 in FIG. 27A). ). FIG. 41 shows that the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in display points may not match. After that, when the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, the state matches the effect state of the first sub control unit 400, and from this point onward, the main control unit 300 is the same as in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). The cumulative points of and the increase amount of the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are the same. Then, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A), and the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed items are executed based on this information (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). Step S3207 of FIG. 28, step S3313 of FIG. 29), the value of the cumulative points is reflected in the value of the display points (step S3113 of FIG. 27 (a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 and the display points of the first sub control unit 400 match.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (1)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation of the item has been described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 42, there is information on possession of the “Destroyed UP” item in the main control unit 300 as a result of the power failure and recovery occurring in the state of possessing the “Destroyed UP” item and the state in which this item is displayed. However, an example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 42, an example of acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item is shown, and in this case, the information possessing the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item is transmitted. .. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 42, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (FIG. 42). 29, step S3325). In the example of FIG. 42, among the "Destroy rate medium UP" item and the "Destroy rate small UP" item, the effect of acquiring the oldest item "Destroy rate medium UP" item that has not been displayed yet is executed. It will be. In the example of FIG. 42, it is shown that the "Destroy rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 42, it is shown that the effect state has subsequently changed to the confrontation state. In this example, when there is a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate small UP" item as possession items, and there is a "defeat rate medium UP" item as a display item, the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed. (The item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "Destroy rate UP" item is displayed, all the "Destroy rate UP" items are deleted, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 42). Since the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item, the defeat rate reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 17). Step S1615). FIG. 42 shows an example in which 6% is added to each of the “defeat rate UP” items to the initial value of 50% of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (2)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation of the item has been described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 43, there is information on possession of the "Destroyed UP" item in the main control unit 300 as a result of the power failure and recovery occurring in the state of possessing the "Destroyed UP" item and the state in which this item is displayed. However, an example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 43, an example of acquiring a "defeat 1 body" item is shown. In this case, information possessing a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat 1 body" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 43, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (FIG. 43). 29, step S3325). In the example of FIG. 43, the effect of acquiring the oldest item, "UP in defeat rate", which has not been displayed yet, is executed. In the example of FIG. 43, it is shown that the "Destroy rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 43, it is shown that the effect state has subsequently changed to the confrontation state. In this example, there is a "Destroyed UP" item and a "Destroy 1" item as possessed items, and there is a "Destroyed UP" item as a display item, and the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "Destroy rate UP" item is displayed, the effect of erasing all the "Destroy rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 43). The defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 17). FIG. 43 shows an example in which 6% is added to one “defeat rate UP” item to 50%, which is the initial value of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the item "Destroy 1 body" is possessed, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (3)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation is described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 44, the main control unit 300 possesses the "Destroyed UP" item as a result of the power failure and power recovery in the state of possessing two "Destroyed UP" items and the state in which these items are displayed. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item) even though there is information.

After that, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 44, an example of acquiring a "defeat rate small UP" item is shown. In this case, information possessing two "defeat rate medium UP" items and a "defeat rate small UP" item is transmitted. Will be done. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 44, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Fig. 44). 29, step S3325). In the example of FIG. 44, of the two "defeat rate medium UP" items and the "defeat rate small UP" item, the effect of acquiring the oldest item "defeat rate medium UP" that has not been displayed yet is executed. Will be done. In the example of FIG. 44, it is shown that the "Destroy rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 44, it is shown that the effect state has subsequently changed to the confrontation state. In this example, there are two "Destroy Rate Medium UP" items and "Destroy Rate Small UP" items as possession items, and an item use effect in the confrontation state is executed with the "Destroy Rate Medium UP" item as display items. (The item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for the sake of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "Destroy rate UP" item is displayed, all the "Destroy rate UP" items are deleted, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 44). Since the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. It becomes the defeat rate (step S1615 in FIG. 17). FIG. 44 shows an example in which 6% is added to each of the “defeat rate UP” items to the initial value of 50% of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (4)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation is described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 45, as a result of power failure and power recovery in the state of possessing the "Destroy 1 body" item and the "Destroy rate medium UP" item and in the state where these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 "Destroys 1 body". An example is shown in which there is information on possession of the item and the item "Up in defeat rate", but this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 45, an example of acquiring a "defeat rate small UP" item is shown. In this case, a "defeat 1 body" item, a "defeat rate medium UP" item, and a "defeat rate small UP" item are possessed. Information is sent. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 45, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (FIG. 45). 29, step S3325). In the example of FIG. 45, among the "Destroy rate medium UP" item and the "Destroy rate small UP" item, the effect of acquiring the oldest item "Destroy rate medium UP" item that has not been displayed yet is executed. It will be. In the example of FIG. 45, it is shown that the "Destroy rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 45, it is shown that the effect state has subsequently changed to the confrontation state. In this example, there are "Destroy 1 body" item, "Destroy rate medium UP" item, and "Destroy rate small UP" item as possession items, and "Destroy rate medium UP" item as display items, in the confrontation state. The case of executing the item use effect will be described (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "Destroy rate UP" item is displayed, all the "Destroy rate UP" items are deleted, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 45). Since the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item, the defeat rate reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 17). Step S1615). FIG. 45 shows an example in which 6% is added to each of the “defeat rate UP” items to the initial value of 50% of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%. In this example, since the item "Destroy 1 body" is possessed, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (5)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation of the item has been described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 46, as a result of power failure and power recovery in the state of possessing the "1 defeated" item and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has the possession information of the "1 defeated" item. An example is shown in which the item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the information on the possessed items is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 46, an example of acquiring a "defeat rate small UP" item is shown. In this case, information possessing a "defeat 1 body" item and a "defeat rate small UP" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 46, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Fig. 46). 29, step S3325). In the example of FIG. 46, the effect of acquiring the oldest item, "Defeat rate small UP" item, which has not been displayed yet, is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, it is shown that the "defeat rate small UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 46, it is shown that the effect state has subsequently changed to the confrontation state. In this example, there is a "1 defeat" item and a "small defeat rate UP" item as possession items, and there is a "small defeat rate UP" item as a display item, and the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "defeat rate small UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are deleted, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 46). The defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 17). FIG. 46 shows an example in which 6% is added to one “defeat rate UP” item to 50%, which is the initial value of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the item "Destroy 1 body" is possessed, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (6)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation of the item has been described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 47, there is information on possession of the "Destroyed UP" item in the main control unit 300 as a result of the power failure and power recovery in the state of possessing the "Destroyed UP" item and the state in which this item is displayed. However, an example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item). Further, it is shown that 130 is maintained as the cumulative point of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery, while the display point of the first sub control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power failure / recovery. ing.

In the example of FIG. 47, it is shown that the effect state subsequently shifts to the confrontation state via the sign state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus (135 in the example of FIG. 47), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 13A), and this acquisition is performed. Information on the possessed item including the information on the item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 47, an example of acquiring the "defeat rate? UP" item is shown. In this case, the information possessing the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate? UP" item is transmitted. .. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a disagreement state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 29). In the example of FIG. 47, the effect of acquiring the "defeat rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it is different from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 42) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 47, it is shown that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 47, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possession items, and an item use effect in a confrontation state with a "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. Will be executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed, the effect of erasing all the "defeat rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 47). Since the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item, the defeat rate reflects the "defeat rate medium UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 17). Step S1615). FIG. 47 shows an example in which 6% is added to each of the “defeat rate UP” items to the initial value of 50% of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (7)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation of the item has been described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 48, as a result of the power interruption and power recovery occurring in the state of possessing the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item and the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 "defeat rate in progress". An example is shown in which there is possession information of the "UP" item and the "small defeat rate UP" item, but these items are not displayed (there is no display item). Further, it is shown that 130 is maintained as the cumulative point of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery, while the display point of the first sub control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power failure / recovery. ing.

In the example of FIG. 48, it is shown that the effect state subsequently shifts to the confrontation state via the sign state. In the first game in this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus (135 in the example of FIG. 48), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 13A), and this acquisition is performed. Information on the possessed item including the information on the item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 48, an example of acquiring a "defeat rate? UP" item is shown. In this case, a "defeat rate medium UP" item, a "defeat rate small UP" item, and a "defeat rate? UP" item are possessed. The information you are doing is sent. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a disagreement state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 29). In the example of FIG. 48, the effect of acquiring the "defeat rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it is different from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 42) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 48, it is shown that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 48, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possession items, and an item use effect in a confrontation state with a "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. Will be executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed, the effect of erasing all the "defeat rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 48). Since the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. It becomes the defeat rate (step S1615 in FIG. 17). FIG. 48 shows an example in which 6% is added to each of the “defeat rate UP” items to the initial value of 50% of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (8)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. Although the operation of the item has been described, the same operation occurs for the information of the possessed item. Specifically, the information of the possessed items managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, but the information of the displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed items of the main control unit are cleared. And the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 49, as a result of power failure and power recovery in the state of possessing the "1 defeated" item and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has the possession information of the "1 defeated" item. An example is shown in which the item is not displayed (there is no display item). Further, it is shown that 130 is maintained as the cumulative point of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery, while the display point of the first sub control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power failure / recovery. ing.

In the example of FIG. 49, it is shown that the effect state subsequently shifts to the confrontation state via the sign state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus (135 in the example of FIG. 49), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 13A), and this acquisition is performed. Information on the possessed item including the information on the item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 49, an example of acquiring the "defeat rate? UP" item is shown. In this case, the information possessing the "defeat 1 body" item and the "defeat rate? UP" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a disagreement state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 29). In the example of FIG. 49, the effect of acquiring the "defeat rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it is different from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 42) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 49, it is shown that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 49, there are a "defeat 1 body" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possession items, and an item use effect in the confrontation state is executed with the "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. Will be done. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 28). Here, since the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed, the effect of erasing all the "defeat rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 35). (D)-(f), lower half of FIG. 49). The defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 17). FIG. 49 shows an example in which 6% is added to one “defeat rate UP” item to 50%, which is the initial value of the defeat rate, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the item "Destroy 1 body" is possessed, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production (Fig. 49, right side).

[Handling of additional items in the event of power failure / recovery (9)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an operation example when a power failure / recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 40 and 41, when the power is cut off and restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, while the display point is cleared in the first sub control unit 400. The operation was explained. Similarly, in the example of FIG. 50, 130 is maintained as the cumulative point of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery, while the display point of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power failure / recovery. It is shown to be. In this example, the item is not possessed at the time of power failure.

In the example of FIG. 50, it is shown that the effect state subsequently shifts to the confrontation state via the sign state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus (130 in the example of FIG. 50), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 13A), and this acquisition is performed. Information on the possessed item including the information on the item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 13A). In the example of FIG. 50, an example of acquiring the "1 defeated body" item is shown, and in this case, the information possessing the "1 defeated body" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the item acquisition effect and the update of the displayed item based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 28). However, the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state adopts a configuration that is not executed when the display point is 0 (No in step S3205 of FIG. 28). In the example of FIG. 50, it is shown that the "Destroy 1" item is acquired, but it is not displayed.

Further, in the example of FIG. 50, there is a "defeat 1 body" item as a possessed item, but since there is nothing in the display item, the item use effect in the confrontation state is not executed, and the confrontation effect is started. In the example of FIG. 50, it is shown that the first battle of the confrontation effect is executed in the second game of the confrontation state. In this example, since the item "Destroy 1 body" is possessed, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Characteristics of this embodiment and other possible configurations (1)]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, items are acquired according to the accumulated points, and an item acquisition effect is executed at that time. When an item is used, it becomes easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved depending on the degree of acquisition of accumulated points. In this embodiment, the cumulative points increase (count up) according to the progress of the game, but for example, the item is acquired by subtracting (counting down) from 1000 points to 0 points. The configuration may be possible, and the point update is not limited to the addition. In addition, the initial value and the target value can be set as appropriate. That is, the value of the provided counter may be updated in the direction approaching the target value.

Further, as for what is obtained when the points reach the target value, it may be something that brings an advantageous state to the player like the item of this embodiment, or information about the game table can be obtained. It may be present, and some kind of effect may be executed as in the item acquisition effect of the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400 so that the display point is updated to the same value as the cumulative point, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, we have adopted a configuration that indirectly displays the value of accumulated points. In this embodiment, the display points have the same initial value and update amount as the cumulative points, but the display points can be updated to the same values as the cumulative points. It may be configured. The display point is managed by the first sub-control unit 400, and is cleared to the initial value (0) when a power failure / recovery occurs. On the other hand, the cumulative points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if a power failure / recovery occurs (except when a reset process is involved). Due to this difference in operation, the cumulative points and the display points do not match when the power is cut off (the value of the cumulative points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since the acquisition of the item is based on the cumulative points, the item may be acquired even when the points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 are less than 1000. The displayed points (display points) are obtained by adopting a configuration in which the cumulative points and the display points do not match when some condition (power recovery in the present embodiment) is satisfied as in this configuration. Even when is less (or more) than the target value, it can be expected that an event such as item acquisition will occur.

In the above description, the case where the value of the accumulated points is maintained even if the power failure / recovery occurs is described, but when the power failure / recovery is accompanied by a reset process (RAM clear button in this embodiment). In this case, the value of the accumulated points is cleared to the initial value (0) after the power is cut off and the power is restored (step S1009 in FIG. 10 and step S1101 in FIG. 11). .. In this case, the cumulative points and the display points are in the same state even if the power is cut off and restored. That is, there are a state in which the cumulative points and the display points match (with a reset process) and a state in which the cumulative points and the display points do not match (with a reset process) as states after the power is cut off and restored. For this reason, for example, when the store is closed and the power is cut off and restored at all the game consoles in the store, the state of the game console can be changed, and the player can grasp the state of the game console. It can be difficult to do. It should be noted that, as a state after the power failure / recovery when the reset process is involved, the initial value of the display point is different from the initial value of the cumulative point (for example, the initial value of the display point is randomly determined. Alternatively, the initial value may be the value obtained by adding a predetermined value to the initial value of the accumulated points). In this case, since the cumulative points and the display points do not match in both the case where the reset process is performed and the case where the reset process is not performed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state of the game table.

In the present embodiment, the update amount of the accumulated points when the effect state is the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the precursor state is larger than the update amount of the accumulated points when the effect state is the normal state. (Fig. 20 (b)). It is not always necessary to adopt such a configuration in which the amount of accumulated points updated differs depending on the state, but by providing such a state, the game will be sharpened and the interest of the game will be improved, or the cumulative total will be increased. Even if the number of points is small, if the amount of renewal is large, the player may be expected to enthusiastically continue the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a power failure / recovery occurs when the effect state is the point specialization A state, the normal states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 become inconsistent, which causes a cumulative total. The update amount of the point and the display point are different (step S3105, FIG. 40, FIG. 41 in FIG. 27A). In this case, although it seems to be disadvantageous to the player due to the change in the update amount of the displayed points (display points), it is actually advantageous to the player. In this way, when a power failure recovery occurs in a state where it is advantageous for the player to update the cumulative points and display points, the update amount of the points (display points) displayed after the power recovery is set before the power failure. By making it different from, it is possible to hide the state that is actually advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to expect a player who knows this configuration to be in an actually advantageous state even if it is in a seemingly disadvantageous state. In this embodiment, the above operation occurs when the power is cut off and restored in the point specialization A state, but the accumulated point update amount is advantageous to the player (for example, the point special). The above operation may be made to occur when the power is cut off and the power is restored. Further, in the present embodiment, when a power failure / recovery occurs in the point specialization A state, the background of the normal state is displayed instead of the background of the point specialization A state, which is actually advantageous to the player. The effect of hiding the state of being hidden is further enhanced (step S3009 in FIG. 26).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, a configuration is adopted in which the point-specialized A state is changed from the initial state to the normal state. That is, after the setting is changed, the accumulated points are updated in an advantageous state before the player is in a disadvantageous state. In this case, if the setting is left as it is after the setting is changed, there is a possibility that the player who sees that the point specialization A state is set may know whether or not the setting has been changed. However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed by causing a power failure / recovery at the time of shifting to the point specialization A state.

[Characteristics of this embodiment and other possible configurations (2)]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, and when items are acquired according to the accumulated points, the item acquisition effect is executed and the items are displayed. In addition, when using the item, a configuration is adopted in which the item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to expect the acquisition of the item and improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, the configuration in which items are acquired according to the accumulated points is adopted, but for example, the lottery for acquiring items is performed in the game, or the item lottery is performed according to the internal winning combination. However, the conditions for acquiring the item are not limited. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player by using the item, but the effect of this item brings a state that is advantageous to the player. It may be present or it may be one that can obtain information about the game table.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information of the item displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the information of the possessed item managed in the main control unit 300. At the same time, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, the information of all possessed items is sent to make the displayed item information the same as the possessed item information, but the configuration is not limited to this and is displayed. It suffices if the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The information of the displayed item is cleared when the power is cut off, but the information of the possessed item is maintained even if the power is cut off (except when reset processing is involved). ). By this operation, the possessed item is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and the power is restored. In this case, even if there is information on the possessed item, if the item use effect is executed as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, by redisplaying an item that is no longer displayed at the timing when a new item is acquired in the normal state, it is possible to execute the item use effect without discomfort (FIGS. 42 to 45). The timing of redisplay is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, but if the timing of the item use effect is predetermined, it may be earlier than this. In any case, the item may be redisplayed before the power is cut off between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use effect is executed. If there are multiple items that are not displayed due to a power failure, by targeting a smaller number of items to be redisplayed once, many items will be redisplayed at once. It is possible to prevent the display from causing a sense of discomfort (FIG. 44). In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the advantage (defeat rate) to the player based on the possessed items, some of the possessed items are not displayed. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, the "defeat rate UP" item is targeted for redisplay, while the "defeat 1 body" item is not targeted for redisplay. In this way, items that are to be redisplayed and items that are not to be redisplayed may be provided, or a configuration may be adopted in which items are uniformly redisplayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the item to be redisplayed is the target of the item use effect, while the item not to be redisplayed is not the target of the item use effect. In this configuration, it may be possible to reduce the feeling of strangeness by redisplaying the item that is the target of the item use effect.

By redisplaying the items that are no longer displayed due to the power failure at the timing of the item acquisition effect as in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort at the time of redisplaying. In addition, by storing the information about the acquired item, it may be possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

In addition, even in the case of a configuration in which the possessed item of the main control unit 300 is changed to a more advantageous item based on the internally elected condition device, the configuration of redisplaying the item described above can be adopted. In this case, the redisplayed item may be more advantageous and the interest of the game may be improved. In this configuration, the items displayed before the power failure and the items displayed after the power failure are different on the display.

[Characteristics of this embodiment and other possible configurations (3)]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, and when items are acquired according to the accumulated points, the item acquisition effect is executed and the items are displayed. In addition, when using the item, a configuration is adopted in which the item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to expect the acquisition of the item and improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, the configuration in which items are acquired according to the accumulated points is adopted, but for example, the lottery for acquiring items is performed in the game, or the item lottery is performed according to the internal winning combination. However, the conditions for acquiring the item are not limited. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player by using the item, but the effect of this item brings a state that is advantageous to the player. It may be present or it may be one that can obtain information about the game table.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information of the item displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the information of the possessed item managed in the main control unit 300. At the same time, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, the information of all possessed items is sent to make the displayed item information the same as the possessed item information, but the configuration is not limited to this and is displayed. It suffices if the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The information of the displayed item is cleared when the power is cut off, but the information of the possessed item is maintained even if the power is cut off (except when reset processing is involved). ). By this operation, the possessed item is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and the power is restored. In this case, even if there is information on the possessed item, if the item use effect is executed as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, an opportunity to acquire a new item is provided in the first game in the confrontation state, and a configuration is adopted in which the item used for the item use effect can be displayed (step S1315 in FIG. 13A). With this configuration, it is possible to make a state in which a sense of incongruity does not occur even if the item use effect is subsequently executed (FIGS. 47 to 49).

In this embodiment, the types of items that can be acquired in the confrontation state and the types of items that can be acquired in the normal state are different, so there is a risk of discomfort when redisplaying items that are not displayed in the confrontation state. There is. For this reason, the items shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state are not the items that are no longer displayed due to the power failure / recovery, but the items acquired in the confrontation state. The timing of item acquisition and item acquisition effect is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but if the timing of item use effect is predetermined, it may be earlier than this. In any case, the item acquisition effect is executed for the newly acquired item between the time when the item that was displayed before the power cut disappears due to the power recovery and the item use effect is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as it is displayed. In this embodiment, regardless of the number of items that are not displayed due to the power failure, only one item can be acquired in the confrontation state and one item is displayed by this. In this configuration, if there are multiple items that are not displayed, a smaller number of items will be newly displayed. If items are acquired or displayed according to the number of items that are not displayed, the interests of the player may become unbalanced or a sense of discomfort may occur. For the purpose of performing the item use effect without discomfort, it is preferable that the number of newly displayed items is smaller than the number of items that are not displayed as in the present embodiment. In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the advantage (defeat rate) to the player based on the possessed items, some of the possessed items are not displayed. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, the "defeat rate UP" item is the target of the item use effect, while the "defeat 1 body" item is not the target of the item use effect. In this way, instead of a configuration in which all items are targeted for item usage effects, there may be provisions for items that are targeted for item usage effects and those that are not. In this embodiment, the "defeat rate UP" item, which is the target of the item use effect, may be displayed in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state (FIGS. 47 to 49). In this configuration, when there is an item that is not displayed, the item that is the target of the item use effect can be displayed, and the item use effect can be executed without discomfort. Further, in the present embodiment, the item that is the target of the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power interruption and recovery, but the item that is the target of the item use effect is the content of the item use effect regardless of whether or not it is displayed. It is reflected in (Fig. 47, Fig. 48). As in this configuration, even if the item to be the target of the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure / recovery, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the item acquisition effect is executed for the newly acquired item and the item is displayed between the time when the item that was displayed before the power failure is not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed. In this case, for example, an item of the same type as the item displayed before the power failure may be newly acquired. As a specific example, when the "defeat rate small UP" item is no longer displayed, a new "defeat rate medium UP" item may be acquired.

[Characteristics of this embodiment and other possible configurations (4)]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, and when items are acquired according to the accumulated points, the item acquisition effect is executed and the items are displayed. When an item is acquired, it becomes easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to expect the acquisition of the item and improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, the cumulative points increase (count up) according to the progress of the game, but for example, the item is acquired by subtracting (counting down) from 1000 points to 0 points. The configuration may be possible, and the point update is not limited to the addition. In addition, the initial value and the target value can be set as appropriate. That is, the value of the provided counter may be updated in the direction approaching the target value. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which items are acquired according to the accumulated points is adopted, but for example, the lottery for acquiring items is performed in the game, or the item lottery is performed according to the internal winning combination. However, the conditions for acquiring the item are not limited. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is easy to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player by using the item, but the effect of this item brings a state that is advantageous to the player. It may be present or it may be one that can obtain information about the game table.

Further, in the present embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400 so that the display point is updated to the same value as the cumulative point, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, we have adopted a configuration that indirectly displays the value of accumulated points. In this embodiment, the display points have the same initial value and update amount as the cumulative points, but the display points can be updated to the same values as the cumulative points. It may be configured. The display point is managed by the first sub-control unit 400, and is cleared to the initial value (0) when a power failure / recovery occurs. On the other hand, the cumulative points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if a power failure / recovery occurs (except when a reset process is involved). Due to this difference in operation, the cumulative points and the display points do not match when the power is cut off (the value of the cumulative points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since the acquisition of the item is based on the cumulative points, the item may be acquired even when the points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 are less than 1000. Here, when the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed when the item is acquired (FIG. 50). By providing a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where the item acquisition effect is not executed when the item is acquired as in this configuration, the item is acquired even when the item acquisition effect is not executed. You can expect it.

In this embodiment, on condition that the display point is 0, the item acquisition effect is not executed even when the item is acquired. Even if the display point is 0, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if the item acquisition effect is performed. However, by configuring the configuration to determine whether or not to execute the item acquisition effect according to some displayed value as in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort. Further, when the display point is 0, the value of the display point does not change after the power is cut off and the power is restored. In such a case, the item acquisition effect is not executed, so that a feeling of strangeness is less likely to occur. You may be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition to the true precursor state is set by the number of games, and the number of games for transitioning to the confrontation state from there is separately set. That is, it can be said that the timing of transition to the confrontation state is set based on the number of games. Also, in this confrontation state, a new item may be acquired in the first game. It can be said that these configurations may acquire items based on the number of elapsed games. By combining this configuration with a configuration that provides a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where the item acquisition effect is not executed when the item is acquired, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the number of games while expecting that the item has been acquired. ..

It should be noted that there may be a difference in the advantage of the item to be acquired depending on whether the item acquisition effect is executed or not when the item is acquired. For example, the acquired item may be configured to be more advantageous when the item acquisition effect is not executed than when the item acquisition effect is executed. In the case of this configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation even when the item acquisition effect is not executed.

In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the advantage (defeat rate) to the player based on the possessed items, some of the possessed items are not displayed. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, a slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used for playing a game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

The slot machine is a slot machine that operates on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to a medal, and the game medium is input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , Such modifications and alterations are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

<< Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the configurations of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first updating means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (for example, cumulative points) in a direction approaching a predetermined value (for example, 1000) according to the progress of the game.
A second updating means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (for example, a display point) according to the progress of the game, and
A display means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, an effect image display device 157) and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
It is possible to display a predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect in a normal state) based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value.
The second renewal means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, the value of the second counter is updated to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 39), and the value of the first counter is updated. There is a case where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIGS. 40 and 41).
A game table characterized by the above is described (see [Characteristics of the present embodiment and other possible configurations (1)]).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A state setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (for example, a normal state) and a second state different from the first state (for example, a point-specialized A state) is provided.
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter is more likely to be larger than that of the first state.
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When a power failure / recovery occurs in the second state, the update amount of the value of the first counter and the update amount of the value of the second counter are different (for example, in FIG. 27A). Step S3105, FIG. 40, FIG. 41),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means is
It is possible to display the first background (for example, the background in the normal state of FIG. 31 (d)) in the first state.
In the second state, it is possible to display the second background (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 31 (c)).
When a power failure / recovery occurs in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when a power failure / recovery occurs in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Step S3009) of FIG. 26 is a possible means of displaying the background in the normal state.
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
An advantage setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different advantages is provided.
The state setting means is
When the set value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the set value is changed, the point-specialized A state is changed from the initial state. It is a configuration that becomes a normal state from),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
A first updating means (eg, 1000) capable of updating the value of the first counter (eg, cumulative points) from an initial value (eg, 0) toward a predetermined value (eg, 1000) according to the progress of the game. , Main control unit 300),
A second updating means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (for example, a display point) according to the progress of the game, and
A display means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, an effect image display device 157) and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
It is possible to display a predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect in a normal state) based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value.
The second renewal means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, the value of the second counter is updated to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 39), and the value of the first counter is updated. There is a case where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIGS. 40 and 41).
The first renewal means is
It may or may not be accompanied by a reset process after the power is cut off (for example, a reset process is required when the RAM clear button is pressed or the setting is changed).
The value of the first counter is set to the initial value when the reset process is involved after the power is cut off, while the first counter before the power is cut off when the reset process is not performed after the power is cut off. (For example, when reset processing is involved, the cumulative points are set to 0 in step S1009 in FIG. 10 and step S1101 in FIG. 11).
The second renewal means is
After the power is cut off and restored, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value or an initial value different from the initial value (for example, in the first sub-control unit 400, the display point is 0 after the power is cut off and restored. The cumulative point and the display point match, or the initial value of the display point is different from the initial value of the cumulative point so that the cumulative point and the display point do not match).
A game table characterized by the above is described (see [Characteristics of the present embodiment and other possible configurations (1)]).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The second renewal means is
After the power is restored, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value (for example, in the first sub-control unit 400, the display point becomes 0 after the power is restored).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A state setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (for example, a normal state) and a second state different from the first state (for example, a point-specialized A state) is provided.
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter is more likely to be larger than that of the first state.
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When a power failure / recovery occurs in the second state, the update amount of the value of the first counter and the update amount of the value of the second counter are different (for example, in FIG. 27A). Step S3105, FIG. 40, FIG. 41),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means is
It is possible to display the first background (for example, the background in the normal state of FIG. 31 (d)) in the first state.
In the second state, it is possible to display the second background (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 31 (c)).
When a power failure / recovery occurs in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when a power failure / recovery occurs in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Step S3009) of FIG. 26 is a possible means of displaying the background in the normal state.
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
An advantage setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different advantages is provided.
The state setting means is
When the set value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the set value is changed, the point-specialized A state is changed from the initial state. It is a configuration that becomes a normal state from),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
Based on the information obtained from the item, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 33) indicating that the item has been acquired.
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 33 (e) is displayed in FIG. 33 (f)).
It is a means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)) using the displayed item.
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure / recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 42, possession of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery). No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure when the power is cut off (for example, in FIG. 42, "UP during the defeat rate" that was displayed before the power failure. "Items are not in the displayed item column after power failure and recovery),
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 42, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Destroyed UP" item that was displayed before the power failure has been added to the displayed item column again),
A game table, characterized in that, is described (see (2) about the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item includes an item that is the target of redisplay of the display means (for example, a "defeat rate UP" item) and an item that is not the target of redisplay of the display means (for example, a "defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
Items that are not subject to redisplay of the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1" item is not used in the item use effect).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
In the item acquisition effect executed between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use effect is executed, the display means indicates that the item displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then the item. Is a means that can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect causes the "UP in defeat rate" item that was displayed before the power failure to be displayed again).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information obtained by acquiring a new item between the time when the power is restored and the period when the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power failure. It is a means that can redisplay the item after showing that the item has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "Up in Defeat Rate" item that was displayed before the power failure is displayed again),
The storage means is a means that can store information on the new item (in FIG. 42, a "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
Based on the information obtained from the item, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 33) indicating that the item has been acquired.
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 33 (e) is displayed in FIG. 33 (f)).
It is a means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)) using the displayed item.
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure / recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 44, possession of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery). No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure when the power is restored (for example, in FIG. 44, the two "defeat rates" that were displayed before the power failure. "Medium UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure recovery),
The display means is
It is possible to redisplay the item that was displayed before the power failure between the time when the power was restored and the time when the item use effect was executed (for example, in FIG. 44, the item acquisition effect is performed before the item use effect. One of the two "Destroyed UP" items that were executed and displayed before the power failure has been added to the displayed item column again),
When there are a plurality of the items that are not displayed due to the power failure, it is a means for redisplaying a smaller number of the items than this number (for example, before the power failure in FIG. 44). One of the two "Destroy Rate Up" items displayed in is displayed again),
A game table characterized by the above is described (see (2) for the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item includes an item that is the target of redisplay of the display means (for example, a "defeat rate UP" item) and an item that is not the target of redisplay of the display means (for example, a "defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
Items that are not subject to redisplay of the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1" item is not used in the item use effect).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
In the item acquisition effect executed between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use effect is executed, the display means indicates that the item displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then the item. Is a means that can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. 44, the item acquisition effect causes the "UP in defeat rate" item that was displayed before the power failure to be displayed again).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information obtained by acquiring a new item between the time when the power is restored and the period when the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power failure. It is a means that can redisplay the item after showing that the item has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 44, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "Up in Defeat Rate" item that was displayed before the power failure is displayed again),
The storage means is a means that can store information on the new item (in FIG. 44, a "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
Based on the information obtained from the item, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 33) indicating that the item has been acquired.
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 33 (e) is displayed in FIG. 33 (f)).
A means by which the displayed item can be used to perform an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)) indicating an advantage over the privilege (for example, the ease of transition to the AT state). And
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure / recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 42, possession of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery). No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure when the power is cut off (for example, in FIG. 42, "UP during the defeat rate" that was displayed before the power failure. "Items are not in the displayed item column after power failure and recovery),
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 42, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Destroyed UP" item that was displayed before the power failure has been added to the displayed item column again),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item).
A game table, characterized in that, is described (see (2) about the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item includes an item that is the target of redisplay of the display means (for example, a "defeat rate UP" item) and an item that is not the target of redisplay of the display means (for example, a "defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
Items that are not subject to redisplay of the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1" item is not used in the item use effect).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
In the item acquisition effect executed between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use effect is executed, the display means indicates that the item displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then the item. Is a means that can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect causes the "UP in defeat rate" item that was displayed before the power failure to be displayed again).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information obtained by acquiring a new item between the time when the power is restored and the period when the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power failure. It is a means that can redisplay the item after showing that the item has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "Up in Defeat Rate" item that was displayed before the power failure is displayed again),
The storage means is a means that can store information on the new item (in FIG. 42, a "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
Based on the information obtained from the item, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired.
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 35 (c) is displayed in FIG. 35 (d)).
It is a means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)) using the displayed item.
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure / recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 47, possession of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery). No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure when the power is cut off (for example, in FIG. 47, "UP during the defeat rate" that was displayed before the power failure. "Items are not in the displayed item column after power failure and recovery),
The display means indicates that a new item different from the non-displayed item has been acquired between the time when the item is not displayed due to power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 47, the item acquisition effect indicating that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed before the item use effect, and the item is turned off. The "Destroy Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column instead of the previously displayed "Destroy Rate Medium UP" item),
A game table characterized by the above is described (see (3) about the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item includes an item that can be used in the item use effect (for example, a "defeat rate UP" item) and an item that cannot be used (for example, a "defeat 1 body" item).
The display means is a new item different from the non-displayed item between the time when the item is not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed, and the item is used. It is a means that can display the item by executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 47, the target item of the item use effect is before the item use effect. The item acquisition effect indicating that the "Destroy rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed, and the "Destroy rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "Destroy rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power failure. Has been added to),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item to be used in the item use effect may be in a state where it is not displayed due to the power failure / recovery (for example, in FIG. 47, the item use effect is the target of the item use effect "UP in defeat rate" in FIG. 47. The item is hidden),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure between the time when the item is not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed (for example). , In FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed before the item use effect, and the "Destroy rate medium UP" item displayed before the power failure is added to the display item column again),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
Based on the information obtained from the item, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired.
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 35 (c) is displayed in FIG. 35 (d)).
It is a means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)) using the displayed item.
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure / recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 48, possession of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery). No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure when the power is cut off (for example, in FIG. 48, "UP during the defeat rate" that was displayed before the power failure. ”Items and“ Small Defeat Rate UP ”items are not in the displayed item column after power recovery),
The display means is displayed as a new item different from the non-displayed item between the time when the plurality of the items are not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed. It is a means capable of executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired in a number smaller than the number of the items that have not been used and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 48, "defeat" before the item use effect. An item acquisition effect indicating that the "Rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed, and the "Destroy rate? UP" item is executed instead of the "Destroy rate medium UP" item or "Destroy rate small UP" item that was displayed before the power failure. Has been added to the display item column),
A game table, characterized in that, is described (see (3) about the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item includes an item that can be used in the item use effect (for example, a "defeat rate UP" item) and an item that cannot be used (for example, a "defeat 1 body" item).
The display means is a new item different from the non-displayed item between the time when the plurality of the items are not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can display the item by executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used has been acquired in the item use effect (for example, in FIG. 48, the item use effect is performed before the item use effect. An item acquisition effect indicating that the target item "Destroy rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed, and instead of the "Destroy rate medium UP" item or "Destroy rate small UP" item displayed before the power failure, "Destroy rate small UP" item is executed. Defeat rate? UP "item has been added to the display item column),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item to be used in the item use effect may be in a state where it is not displayed due to the power failure / recovery (for example, in FIG. 48, the item use effect is the target of the item use effect "UP in defeat rate" in FIG. 48. Items and "Small Defeat Rate UP" items are not displayed),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure between the time when the plurality of the items are not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed. (For example, in FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed before the item use effect, and the "Destroy rate in progress" item displayed before the power failure is added to the display item column again).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is
Based on the information obtained from the item, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired.
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 35 (c) is displayed in FIG. 35 (d)).
A means by which the displayed item can be used to perform an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 35 (d) to (f)) indicating an advantage over the privilege (for example, the ease of transition to the AT state). And
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure / recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 47, possession of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure / recovery). No change in item information),
The display means is a means for not displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure when the power is cut off (for example, in FIG. 47, "UP during the defeat rate" that was displayed before the power failure. "Items are not in the displayed item column after power failure and recovery),
The display means indicates that a new item different from the non-displayed item has been acquired between the time when the item is not displayed due to power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 47, the item acquisition effect indicating that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed before the item use effect, and the item is cut off. The "Destroy Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column instead of the previously displayed "Destroy Rate Medium UP" item),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item).
A game table, characterized in that, is described (see (3) about the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item includes an item that can be used in the item use effect (for example, a "defeat rate UP" item) and an item that cannot be used (for example, a "defeat 1 body" item).
The display means is a new item different from the non-displayed item between the time when the item is not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed, and the item is used. It is a means that can display the item by executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 47, the target item of the item use effect is before the item use effect. The item acquisition effect indicating that the "Destroy rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed, and the "Destroy rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "Destroy rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power failure. Has been added to),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item to be used in the item use effect may be in a state where it is not displayed due to the power failure / recovery (for example, in FIG. 47, the item use effect is the target of the item use effect "UP in defeat rate" in FIG. 47. The item is hidden),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure between the time when the item is not displayed due to the power recovery and the time when the item use effect is executed (for example). , In FIG. 42, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed before the item use effect, and the "Destroy rate medium UP" item displayed before the power failure is added to the display item column again),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) and
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) that can store information of acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item), and
It is a game table equipped with
When the storage means stores the acquired information of the item, the display means may execute an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired, or may not execute the item acquisition effect. Yes (for example, in FIG. 39 and the like, the item acquisition effect is executed when the possessed item is added, but in FIG. 50, the item acquisition effect is not executed even if the "defeat 1" item is acquired).
The display means is a means capable of displaying the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 33 (e) is shown in FIG. 33 (f). The "defeat rate? UP" item displayed in FIG. 35 (c) and acquired in FIG. 35 (c) is displayed in FIG. 35 (d)),
A game table, characterized in that, is described (see (4) about the features of the present embodiment and other possible configurations).

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A first updating means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (for example, cumulative points) in a direction approaching a predetermined value (for example, 1000) according to the progress of the game.
A second updating means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (for example, a display point) according to the progress of the game, and
Equipped with
The storage means is a means for storing information on the item based on the value of the first counter (for example, when the cumulative points reach 1000 or when the cumulative points are not 0 in the confrontation state, the item. Can be obtained),
The value of the second counter may be the same as the value of the first counter (eg, FIG. 39).
The value of the second counter may be different from the value of the first counter after the power is cut off (for example, FIG. 40).
The display means is a means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, in FIG. 31 and the like, a display point is shown at the lower left of the effect image display device 157).
The display means is a means that may not execute the item acquisition effect according to the value of the second counter when the storage means stores the acquired information on the item (for example, FIG. 50). Then, when the display point is 0, the item acquisition effect is not executed. In step S3205 of FIG. 28, No is determined and step S3207 is not executed).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The display means is a means that does not perform the item acquisition effect unless the value of the second counter has changed after the power is restored (for example, in FIG. 50, the display point is 0 after the power is restored. Until then, the item acquisition effect is not executed),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The storage means may store the information of the item acquired based on the number of elapsed games (for example, the item may be acquired in the first game of the confrontation state transitioned by the number of elapsed games). ),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is not executed may be more advantageous to the player than the item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is executed (for example, item acquisition). A configuration in which the advantage of the item to be acquired is different between the case where the effect is executed and the case where the effect is not executed),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A privilege lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to a privilege based on the item stored in the storage means (for example, the main control unit 300 performs a transition lottery to an AT state using possessed items).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

Next, the game console on which the interlocking effect is executed will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow of a modification of the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 26. Hereinafter, the differences from the effect control process described with reference to FIG. 26 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process, the information acquisition / update process (step S3001) is executed as described with reference to FIG. 26, and the information included in the various commands (RT (game state)). ), Production status, cumulative points, points earned, number of items possessed and acquisition order, type of items possessed, number of remaining AT games, number of AT additional games, information based on each operation, etc.) are appropriately acquired and these are acquired. Information is stored (updated). When a power recovery command including information indicating that the effect state is the point special A state is received, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the normal state instead of the point special A state. The points to be performed are the same as the effect control process described with reference to FIG. 26.

Subsequently, after the display point management process (step S3003) shown in FIG. 27 (a) in detail is executed, the display item management process (step S3005) shown in FIG. 28 in detail is executed, and further. The navigation-related display process (step S3007) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. Since these steps S3003, step S3005, and step S3007 are the same as those described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S3008, the interlocking effect setting process is executed, and then the other effect setting process (step S3009) is executed, and this effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the flow of the interlocking effect setting process (step S3008) shown in FIG. 51.

In this interlocking effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the demonstration effect (demo effect) is satisfied (step S3008a). The execution condition of the demo effect is satisfied when the power is restored (power is turned on) in a state where the bet operation is not performed at the time of power interruption, or when a predetermined time elapses after the game ends. If the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3008c. On the other hand, if the condition is satisfied, the setting for executing the demo effect is made (step S3008b), and then the process proceeds to step S3008c. Here, since it is initialized if the setting is changed between the time when the power is restored (power is turned on) and the time when the first game is started, the process proceeds to step S3008b even if the bet operation is performed at the time of power failure. , Demonstration production is executed. Further, when the power is restored (power is turned on) in a state where the bet operation is not performed at the time of power interruption, the process proceeds to step S3008b regardless of whether or not the setting is changed, and the demonstration effect is executed. Further, even if no operation is performed after the third stop operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S3008b, and the demonstration effect is executed. On the other hand, if the bet operation is performed at the time of power failure and the setting is not changed between the time when the power is restored (power is turned on) and the first game is started (in the case of setting deferment), the condition is satisfied. If it fails, the process proceeds to step S3008c, and the demonstration effect is not executed.

In step S3008c, it is determined whether or not it is the operation of the third stop. That is, if it is the timing when the third pressing command is received from the main control unit 300, it is determined that it is the operation of the third stop, and the process proceeds to step S3008d.

In step S3008d, it is determined whether or not the setting for executing the interlocking effect 6 is made, and if the setting is not made, the process proceeds to step S3008f, and if it is done, the interlocking effect is made in step S3008e. After instructing the start of execution of step 6, the process proceeds to step S3008f. By doing so, the interlocking effect 6 is started in response to the third stop.

In step S3008f, the interlocking effect setting process is executed. In this interlocking effect setting process, the pattern of the interlocking effect is determined by lottery only in any of the initial state, the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the precursor state. Therefore, in the confrontation state, the pseudo BB state, and the AT state, the interlocking effect is not executed. In addition, although the initial state is included here, the game store may digest one game before the store opens so that the initial state is not shown to the player, so the initial state is not included and it is linked in the initial state. The production may not be executed. There are two types of interlocking effect patterns (interlocking pattern 1 and interlocking pattern 2). The interlocking pattern 1 is a pattern in which the interlocking effect is started before the operation of the start lever 135, and the interlocking pattern 2 is a pattern in which the interlocking effect is started after the operation of the start lever 135. In the lottery in this example, the winning probability of the interlocking pattern 1 is 70%, and the winning probability of the interlocking pattern 2 is 30%, but it is sufficient that the interlocking pattern 1 has a higher winning probability than the interlocking pattern 2. Alternatively, conversely, the interlocking pattern 1 may have a lower winning probability than the interlocking pattern 2, or other interlocking patterns may be prepared.

In step S3008g following from step S3008f, it is determined whether or not the interlocking pattern 1 has been won, and if the interlocking pattern 1 has been won, the setting for executing the interlocking effect 1 is made, and the RAM 408 is further prepared. The set lever front flag is set to on, and this interlocking effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when the interlocking pattern 2 is won, the setting for displaying the normal background on the effect image display device 157 is made (step S3008i), and the interlocking effect setting process is terminated.

If the determination in step S3008c is that it is not the operation of the third stop, this time, it is determined whether or not the bet buttons 130 to 132 are being operated (step S3008j). That is, if it is the timing when the input command is received from the main control unit 300, it is determined that the bet buttons 130 to 132 are being operated, and the process proceeds to step S3008k. Further, even when the bet operation is performed at the time of power failure and the setting is deferred, the process proceeds to step S3008k.

In step S3008k, it is determined whether or not the lever front flag is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, that is, in the case of the interlocking pattern 1, the setting for executing the interlocking effect 2 is performed. (Step S30008l), this interlocking effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the lever front flag remains off, the setting for displaying the normal background on the effect image display device 157 is made (step S3008m), and the interlocking effect setting process is terminated. As a case of proceeding to step S3008m, there is a case where the interlocking pattern 2 is won in the interlocking effect setting process of step S3008f. In addition, the flag in front of the lever is turned off by the power failure. Therefore, if the bet operation is performed at the time of power failure and the setting is deferred, the process always proceeds to step S3008m.

If the bet operation is performed at the time of power failure and the setting is changed, the process proceeds to step S3008b as described above, and the demo effect is executed. However, in the first place, the start lever-135 is performed with the bet operation performed. It is generally unlikely that the store will be closed without operating, and it is almost impossible for the bet operation to be performed and the setting to be changed at the time of power failure. If there is a game console that has closed without operating the start lever-135 while betting is being performed, the settings will be changed at that game console, but the settings will be the same as before. The setting may be reset so that the setting has been changed but the setting has not been changed.

If the determination in step S3008j is that the bet buttons 130 to 132 are not being operated, it is further determined whether or not the start lever 135 is being operated (step S3008n). That is, at the timing when the start lever reception command is received from the main control unit 300, it is determined that the start lever 135 is being operated, and the process proceeds to step S3008o.

In step S3008o, as in step S3008k, it is determined whether or not the lever front flag is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, that is, in the case of interlocking pattern 1, interlocking effect 3 or later is executed. (Step S3008p), and the interlocking effect setting process is terminated. In step S3008p, which will be described in detail later, settings for executing the interlocking effect 3, the interlocking effect 4, the interlocking effect 5, and the interlocking effect 6 are made. On the other hand, if the lever front flag remains off, that is, in the case of the interlocking pattern 2, the setting for executing the effect of the interlocking pattern 2 is made (step S30008q), and the interlocking effect setting process is terminated. In step S3008q, which will be described in detail later, settings are made to execute the interlocking effect 1, the interlocking effect 3, the interlocking effect 4, the interlocking effect 5, and the interlocking effect 6. That is, the setting for executing the interlocking effect excluding only the interlocking effect 2 from the interlocking effects constituting the interlocking pattern 1 is performed.

If the determination in step S300n indicates that the start lever 135 is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S30008r. When the setting for executing the demo effect is made in step S3008b, or when the operation of the first stop or the operation of the second stop is performed, the process proceeds to this step S30008r. In step S3008r, when the setting for executing the demo effect is made, the execution start of the demo effect is instructed. At the time of the operation of the first stop, the first pressing command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, and at the timing when the first pressing command is received, the execution start of the interlocking effect 4 is instructed in step S30008r. Further, at the time of the operation of the second stop, the second pressing command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, and at the timing when the second pressing command is received, the execution start of the interlocking effect 5 is instructed in step S30008r. Further, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is not started unless the game interval timer becomes 0, and when the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started, the reel rotation is started from the main control unit 300. A command is sent. Even when the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started in the state where the lever front flag is off, that is, in the case of the interlocking pattern 2, the process proceeds to step S3008r, and in step S3008r, the execution start of the interlocking effect 3 is instructed. When the execution of step S3008r is completed, the interlocking effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 53A is a diagram showing a demo display displayed on the effect image display device 157 by the demo effect set in step S3008b of FIG. 52. This demo display is an animation display (video demo display) including the title of the game console, but may be a still image demo display.

FIG. 53B is a diagram showing a normal background displayed on the effect image display device 157 by the display setting of the normal background in step S3008i and step S3008m of FIG. 52. This normal background is an animation display (video background display) in which the main character's lord and grandfather are in the hall, but it may also be a still image background display. In the normal background shown in FIG. 53 (b), the point-related display including the value of the accumulated points such as "the value of the accumulated points on the display / the upper limit of the accumulated points on the display" is not displayed.

FIG. 53 (b') is a diagram showing a modified example of the normal background shown in FIG. 53 (b). In the normal background shown in FIG. 53 (b'), "??? / Upper limit of accumulated points on the display" is displayed in the lower left corner, and the value of the accumulated points on the display is displayed at the position where it is displayed. "???" is displayed, but the cumulative point value is not displayed.

FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 1 in the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 2 in the effect image display device 157. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 3 in the effect image display device 157. In these figures, only an example of the display effect in the effect image display device 157 is shown, but in each interlocking effect, in addition to the display effect, one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, and the movable body motion effect are shown. May be combined.

When the interlocking effect 1 set in step S3008h or step S3008q of FIG. 52 is started, as shown on the left side of FIG. 54 (a), the effect image display device 157 has a normal background shown in FIG. 53 (b). The same display as the display of is displayed. Further, in the interlocking effect 1, a display of "0000/1000", which is a point-related display including the value of the accumulated points, is also displayed in the lower left corner. Next, as shown in the center of FIG. 54 (a), in the effect image display device 157, a wipe display of the sliding door is added, an image of the sliding door appears from each of the left end and the right end, and an animation of closing the sliding door is displayed. .. In the effect image display device 157 shown at the right end of FIG. 54 (a), the white blank sliding doors are completely closed, and the background display and the point-related display cannot be seen. In addition, instead of the wipe display of the sliding door, a movable body of the sliding door may be used.

The interlocking effect 2 set in step S3008l of FIG. 52 is continuously executed from the interlocking effect 1 in the effect of the interlocking pattern 1, and the effect image display device 157 at the time when the interlocking effect 2 is started has a white blank sliding door. Is completely closed. It should be noted that the interlocking effect 2 is not executed in the effect of the interlocking pattern 2. When the interlocking effect 2 is started, a notice display of the character is displayed on the white blank sliding door, and the character of the villain is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 54 (b). The character foretold here will be an enemy character that will appear in the subsequent continuous production 3.

In the effect image display device 157 at the time when the interlocking effect 3 set in step S3008p and step S3008q of FIG. 52 is started, the notice display of the character is displayed on the completely closed sliding door. When the interlocking effect 3 is started, the completely closed sliding doors begin to open, and as shown in the center of FIG. 54 (c), the effect image display device 157 has the interlocking effect 2 behind the sliding doors that have begun to open. The same villain character as the enemy character displayed in the notice display of is displayed. The display of the enemy character is displayed overlapping with the background display, and the background display is more difficult to see than before the overlap. In the effect image display device 157 shown at the right end of FIG. 54 (c), the sliding doors are completely opened and the wipe display of the sliding doors disappears. It is displayed in. In addition, the character of the evil lieutenant is continuously displayed.

FIG. 55 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 4 in the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 55 (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 5 in the effect image display device 157. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a display example of the interlocking effect 6 in the effect image display device 157. These figures also show only an example of the display effect in the effect image display device 157, but in each interlocking effect, in addition to the display effect, one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, and the movable body motion effect. May be combined.

The interlocking effect 4 in which the execution start is instructed at the time of the first stop operation is an effect that continues from the interlocking effect 3, and the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. An attack effect is performed on the character of the deputy officer, which is displayed as "HIT" in accordance with the first stop operation. The point-related display continues to be displayed as "0000/1000".

The interlocking effect 5 in which the execution start is instructed at the time of the operation of the second stop is an effect that continues from the interlocking effect 4, and the effect image display device 157 also shown in FIG. An attack effect is performed on the character of the deputy officer, which is displayed as "HIT" in accordance with the second stop operation. In addition, the point-related display continues to be displayed as "0000/1000" here as well.

The interlocking effect 6 in which the execution start is instructed at the time of the operation of the third stop is an effect that continues from the interlocking effect 5, and the effect image display device 157 also shown in FIG. 55 (c) also displays the character of the villain and the third. Point acquisition production is performed according to the stop operation. In the point acquisition effect here, "+5 acquisition" indicating that 5 points have been acquired is displayed. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 55 (c), the point-related display, which was previously "0000/1000", is changed to "0005/1000", and the amount of 5 points acquired is reflected.

FIG. 55 (d) is a diagram showing a state of interlocking effect before the stop operation in the interlocking pattern 2 is performed. Although this figure also shows only an example of the display effect in the effect image display device 157, one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, and the movable body motion effect may be combined.

In the effect of the interlocking pattern 2 set in step S3008q of FIG. 52, the interlocking effect is started after the operation of the start lever 135. That is, when the start lever 135 is operated, the interlocking effect 1 shown in FIG. 54 (a) is executed, and following the interlocking effect 1, the interlocking effect 3 shown in FIG. 54 (c) is executed. In the effect of the interlocking pattern 2, the interlocking effect 2 shown in FIG. 54 (b) is not executed, and therefore the notice display of the character is not displayed. The effect of the interlocking pattern 2 is the same as the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 after the stop operation, the interlocking effect 4 shown in FIG. 55 (a) is executed by the first stop operation, and the same figure (b) is performed by the second stop operation. ) Is executed, and the interlocking effect 6 shown in FIG. 3C is executed by the third stop operation.

FIG. 56A is a diagram showing the flow of the interlocking pattern 1, and FIG. 56B is a diagram showing the flow of the interlocking pattern 2. In any of the figures from FIGS. 56 to 59, time elapses from left to right.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the interlocking pattern 1, when the third stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 1 shown in FIG. 54 (a) is performed, and the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated (bet operation). Then, the interlocking effect 2 shown in FIG. 54 (b) is performed, and when the start lever 135 is operated (lever operation), the interlocking effect 3 shown in FIG. 54 (c) is performed. The interlocking effect 3 here continues until the first stop operation is performed. Then, when the first stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 4 shown in FIG. 55 (a) is performed, and when the second stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 5 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is performed. When the third stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 6 shown in FIG. 55 (c) is performed, and when the interlocking effect setting process of step S3008f shown in FIG. 52 again wins the interlocking pattern 1, the interlocking effect 6 is performed. When the interlocking effect 1 is completed, the interlocking effect 1 is started, and when the interlocking effect 6 is completed, the effect image display device 157 displays the normal background shown in FIG. 53 (b). If the betting operation is performed before the interlocking effect 6 ends, the interlocking effect 1 is not started and the normal background is not displayed. The interlocking effect 6 has priority over the interlocking effect 1 and the display of the normal background.

Subsequently, the interlocking pattern 2 shown in FIG. 56B will be described focusing on the differences from the interlocking pattern 1. In the interlocking pattern 2, the interlocking effect is started from the lever operation. Before the lever operation, the effect image display device 157 displays the normal background shown in FIG. 53 (b). That is, the normal background is displayed when the third stop operation is performed, and the normal background is continuously displayed even when the bet operation is performed. Then, when the lever operation is performed, the interlocking effect 1 is performed, and this interlocking effect 1 is continued until the game interval timer becomes 0. That is, until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the previous lever operation, the interlocking effect 1 is continued even if the lever operation is performed, and the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is not started. Become. Then, when the game interval timer becomes 0, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started (rotational rotation), and the interlocking effect 1 is switched to the interlocking effect 3. If the game interval timer is 0 when the lever is operated, the interlocking effect 1 is not performed and the interlocking effect 3 is started, but the interlocking effect 1 is started and the interlocking effect 3 is not performed. It is also good. In any case, the interlocking effect 2 is not executed, and the interlocking pattern 1 is the same after the first stop operation. That is, when the first stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 4 is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 5 is performed, and when the third stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 6 is performed. When the interlocking effect 2 is won again in the interlocking effect setting process of step S3008f shown in FIG. 52, the normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the interlocking effect 6 is completed, and the interlocking pattern 1 is won. In this case, when the interlocking effect 6 ends, the interlocking effect 1 starts. Also here, if the betting operation is performed before the end of the interlocking effect 6, the normal background is not displayed even if it should be displayed, but the normal background is displayed by the betting operation. Further, even if the interlocking effect 1 is supposed to be started, it is not started, and the interlocking effect 1 is cut.

FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a flow when an electric power is cut off before the bet operation and the electric power is immediately restored in a state where the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started.

When the third stop operation is performed, the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started, and the interlocking effect 1 is performed first. A power failure occurs during the execution of this interlocking effect 1, and the power is immediately restored. After the power is restored, the demo execution condition in step S3008a of FIG. 52 is satisfied, and the demo display shown in FIG. 53 (a) is displayed on the effect image display device 157. When the bet operation is performed while the demo display is displayed, the normal background shown in FIG. 53B is displayed on the effect image display device 157. At the time of power failure, the lever front flag prepared in RAM 408 was set to on, but the lever front flag is turned off by power failure. Therefore, after the power is restored, the normal background is set by step S3008m shown in FIG. 52, and the normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157. That is, after the power is cut off and restored before the bet operation, the normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Then, if the lever operation is performed before a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the previous lever operation (before the game interval timer becomes 0), the wait state is set, but the lever front flag is turned off. Therefore, the effect of the interlocking pattern 2 is set by step S3008q shown in FIG. 52, and the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the normal background to the interlocking effect 1. Eventually, when the game interval timer becomes 0, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started (rotational rotation), and the interlocking effect 1 is switched to the interlocking effect 3. After that, when the first stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 4 is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 5 is performed, and when the third stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 6 is performed. In the conventional game console, if a bet operation is performed while the power is cut off and the demo display is displayed during the continuous production, the setting is changed depending on whether or not the continuous production occurs. However, in this example, since the background is normally displayed when the bet operation is performed, the player does not determine whether or not the setting has been changed. In this example, the continuous production is started when the start lever 135 is operated instead of the bet operation, and it seems that the continuous production is started as a result of the internal lottery performed by the operation of the start lever 135. It looks like a player.

FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing a flow when a power failure / recovery occurs again after the power failure / recovery in the figure (a) occurs.

During the execution of the interlocking effect 1 of the interlocking pattern 1 started by performing the third stop operation, the first power failure / recovery occurs, and the demo display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. A second power interruption and power recovery occurs during the display of this demo display, but even after the second power recovery, the demo execution condition in step S3008a of FIG. 52 is satisfied, and the demo display is displayed again. The demo display is an animation display (video demo display) as described with reference to FIG. 53 (a), and after the second power restoration, it is displayed from the continuation of the animation at the time of the second power cut (displayed from the middle). ), Or it may be displayed from the beginning of the animation. At a game store, there are cases where the game consoles (slot machines) are individually disconnected and restored, and there are cases where the game islands where multiple game consoles are installed are collectively disconnected and restored, depending on the operation of the game store. Even if the power failure / recovery operation is performed, the effect after the second power failure / recovery can be matched with the production after the first power failure / recovery, depending on the operation of the amusement shop. In addition to being able to execute the effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the setting change or the setting deferment. For example, if you turn on the power of all the game consoles on the entire game island at once, and after a while, change the settings of only one of them, turn off the power of only one of them, restore the power, and then change the settings. Will be done. In this case, the game console whose settings have been changed has had two power-on (recovery), but the effect after the second power-on (demo display) is the effect after the first power-on. Since it can be adjusted to (demo display), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the setting change or the setting deferment.

In addition, as another example, if a specific game table on the game island is significantly dirty with food or drink after the game store is closed, the power is supplied when the cleaning work is performed separately from the normal wiping. Since cleaning work is dangerous, turn off the power of a specific game console individually, perform cleaning work, turn on the power after cleaning work, and check if there is a problem with the display device, light emitting part, and speaker production. Even if the game consoles of the entire game island are turned off at once and the game consoles of the entire game island are restored at once before the next day's business, the production after the second power-on (demo display) Can be adjusted to the effect (demo display) after the first power-on, so that it is difficult for the player to determine the setting change or the setting deferment.

After the bet operation is performed, it is the same as the case shown in FIG. 57 (a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58A is a diagram showing a flow in the case where the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started, the power is cut off after the bet operation, and the power is immediately restored.

Also in FIG. 58 (a), the third stop operation is performed to start the effect of the interlocking pattern 1, and the interlocking effect 1 is performed first. A bet operation is performed during the execution of the interlocking effect 1, and the interlocking effect 1 is switched to the interlocking effect 2. In this example, a power failure occurs during the execution of the interlocking effect 2, and the power is immediately restored. At the time of power failure, the lever front flag prepared in RAM 408 was set to on, but the lever front flag is turned off by power failure. Therefore, after the power is restored, the normal background is set by step S3008m shown in FIG. That is, after the power is cut off and restored after the bet operation is performed, the normal background shown in FIG. 53B is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Then, if the lever operation is performed before a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the previous lever operation (before the game interval timer becomes 0), the wait state is set, but the lever front flag is turned off. Therefore, the effect of the interlocking pattern 2 is set by step S3008q shown in FIG. 52, and the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the normal background to the interlocking effect 1. Eventually, when the game interval timer becomes 0, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started (rotational rotation), and the interlocking effect 1 is switched to the interlocking effect 3. After that, when the first stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 4 is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 5 is performed, and when the third stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 6 is performed. In the conventional game console, if the continuous effect is being executed and the power is cut off and restored after the bet, it may be determined whether or not the setting is changed depending on whether or not the continuous effect occurs. However, in this example, since the continuous effect does not occur after the power is cut off and restored, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing a flow in the case where the power failure / recovery occurs again after the power failure / recovery in the figure (a) occurs.

In the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 started by performing the third stop operation, the interlocking effect 2 is started when the bet operation is performed. During the execution of the interlocking effect 2, the first power failure / recovery occurs, and the normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157. A second power interruption and power recovery occurs during the display of this normal background, but since the lever front flag is off even after the second power recovery, after the power recovery, the normal background is measured by step S3008m shown in FIG. Is set and the normal background is displayed again. The normal background is an animation display (video background display) as described with reference to FIG. 53 (b), and after the second power restoration, it is displayed from the continuation of the animation at the time of the second power cut (displayed from the middle). ), Or it may be displayed from the beginning of the animation. For example, when the setting of only one game console is changed while the power of the game consoles of the entire game island is turned off, only one of the game consoles is turned on and the setting is changed. After that, in order to turn on the power of the game consoles of the entire game island at once, the power of the game consoles whose settings have been changed may be turned off once. Then, when the power of the game consoles of the entire game island is turned on at once, the game table whose settings have been changed has been turned on twice (recovery), but the effect after the second power turn-on (returning power). Since the normal background display) can be matched with the effect after the first power-on (normal background display), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the setting change or the setting deferment.

In addition, as another example, if a specific game table on the game island is significantly dirty with food or drink after the game store is closed, the power is supplied when the cleaning work is performed separately from the normal wiping. Since cleaning work is dangerous, turn off the power of a specific game console individually, perform cleaning work, turn on the power after cleaning work, and check if there is a problem with the display device, light emitting part, and speaker production. Even if the game consoles of the entire game island are turned off at once and the game consoles of the entire game island are restored at once before the next day's business, the effect after the second power-on (normal background display) ) Can be matched to the effect (normal background display) after the first power-on, so that it is difficult for the player to determine the setting change or the setting deferment.

After the lever operation is performed, it is the same as the case shown in FIG. 58 (a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flow when the first power failure / recovery occurs before the bet operation and the second power failure / recovery occurs after the bet operation in the state where the effect of the interlocking pattern 1 is started. Is.

The demo display is displayed when the first power failure / recovery occurs during the execution of the interlocking effect 1 of the interlocking pattern 1 started by performing the third stop operation, and the demo execution condition in step S3008a of FIG. 52 is satisfied. It is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Since there is a bet operation during the display of this demo display and the lever front flag is turned off due to the power failure, the normal background is set by step S3008m shown in FIG. 52, and the normal background is set on the effect image display device 157. Is displayed. A second power interruption and power recovery occurs during the display of this normal background, but since the lever front flag is off even after the second power recovery, after the power recovery, the normal background is measured by step S3008m shown in FIG. Is set and the normal background is displayed again. Then, if the lever operation is performed before a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the previous lever operation (before the game interval timer becomes 0), the wait state is set, but the lever front flag is turned off. Therefore, the effect of the interlocking pattern 2 is set by step S3008q shown in FIG. 52, and the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the normal background to the interlocking effect 1. Eventually, when the game interval timer becomes 0, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started (rotational rotation), and the interlocking effect 1 is switched to the interlocking effect 3. After that, when the first stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 4 is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 5 is performed, and when the third stop operation is performed, the interlocking effect 6 is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 59, the effect after the second power-on (normal effect) cannot be matched with the effect after the first power-on (demo effect), but the player's operation (bet operation) is in between. ) Is included, so it is unlikely that the settings will be changed or the settings will be deferred during this period, and no inconvenience will occur. In addition, if the demo display is displayed even though the power is cut off and restored after the bet operation is performed, it seems that the inserted medals have become invalid, which gives the player anxiety. However, by displaying the same normal background as the background display of the start display of the interlocking effect 1, it may appear that the game is in progress, and the player may be relieved.

In addition, FIG. 57, FIG. 58, and FIG. 59 show an example in which the interlocking pattern 2 is executed after the lever is operated. Other effects may be performed without performing pattern 2.

Although the slot machine has been described as an example above, the interlocking effect can be executed even with a pachinko machine whose settings can be changed when the power is turned on, as with the slot machine.

For example, some pachinko machines are equipped with a chance button that is operated during production. Further, in a pachinko machine, in an effect display device controlled by the sub-control unit side, a hold may be displayed as an icon (hereinafter referred to as a hold icon), and an effect of notifying the number of holds depending on the number of display of the hold icon may be executed. .. Further, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed by changing the display mode of the hold icon. The interlocking effect 1 is a hold icon effect that displays the hold icon in the default display mode, and the interlocking effect 2 following the interlocking effect 1 is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. It is a look-ahead notice effect that changes according to the operation of and displays the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode. When the variation of the special figure controlled by the main control unit side is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device controlled by the sub control unit side. Further, the hold icon effect of the interlocking effect 1 is started according to the start of the change of the special figure, the look-ahead notice effect of the interlocking effect 2 is started according to the chance button operation, and the display mode of the hold icon is the look-ahead notice. It changes to the display mode. Eventually, when the fluctuation of the special figure stops, the decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed. Even if the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, the look-ahead notice effect of the interlocking effect 2 is continued (the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice), and the effect display device responds to the stop of the change of the special figure and the decorative pattern. Stop display and interlocking effect 2 are executed.

When the fluctuation of the special figure is started and the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the interlocking effect 1, the effect display device after the power restoration is returning instead of the interlocking effect 1 (corresponding to the first effect). A return display (corresponding to the second effect) is displayed to indicate that there is something by using a character or decoratively. Eventually, when the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, the effect display device executes the stop display of the decorative symbol and the interlocking effect 1.

Furthermore, if a second power failure / recovery occurs while the recovery display is displayed, the recovery display (corresponding to the second effect) is displayed again on the effect display device after the second power recovery. Will be done. Even when the power is cut off and restored twice, when the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, the effect display device executes the stop display of the decorative symbol and the interlocking effect 1.

Further, when the variation of the special figure is started and the chance button is operated during the execution of the interlocking effect 1, the look-ahead notice effect of the interlocking effect 2 is started. Even if a power failure / recovery occurs during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, the effect display device after the power recovery displays a return display instead of the interlocking effect 2. If the second power interruption and power recovery occurs while the recovery display is displayed, the recovery display is displayed again on the effect display device after the second power recovery, and then the special figure changes. When stopped, the effect display device executes the stop display of the decorative symbol and the interlocking effect 1.

As described above, even in a pachinko machine in which an interlocking effect is executed, the effect after the second power-on (return display) can be matched with the effect after the first power-on (return display), and the player can use it. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between setting changes and setting deferment.

In the above description,
"Start lever [for example, start lever 135] and
Production means [for example, production image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
The effect means is a means capable of executing the effect of the interlocking pattern [for example, the effect of the interlocking pattern 1].
The effect means is a means capable of executing the effect of the demo display [for example, the effect of the demo display shown in FIG. 53 (a)].
The interlocking pattern effect is an effect in which the first effect [for example, interlocking effect 1] is started, and then the second effect [for example, interlocking effect 3] is started.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the effect of the demo display is executed [for example, FIG. 57 (a)].
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the effect of the demo display after the first case, the effect of the demo display is executed [for example, FIG. 57 (b)].
An effect that is executed when the start lever is operated without going through the power cutoff / recovery after the start of the first effect, and an effect that is performed after the power failure / recovery is performed after the start of the first effect. Unlike the effect that is performed when the start lever is operated,
The effect executed when the start lever is operated without going through the power interruption and recovery after the start of the first effect is the second effect [for example, FIG. 56 (a)].
The effect executed when the start lever is operated after the power is cut off and restored after the start of the first effect is the first effect [for example, FIG. 57 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.
In addition, in the above description,
"The first operating means [for example, the start lever 135 or the bet buttons 130 to 132] and
Production means [for example, production image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 1 shown in FIG. 54 (a) or the interlocking effect 2 shown in FIG. 54 (b)].
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect [for example, the effect of the demo display shown in FIG. 53 (a) or the effect of displaying the normal background shown in the figure (b) and the figure (b')]. can be,
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the second effect [for example, when the power is cut off and restored as shown in FIG. 57A). Demonstration display effect, normal background display effect when power is cut off and restored as shown in FIG. 58 (a)] is executed.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the second effect after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the second effect [for example, FIG. 57 (b)). Demonstration display effect is executed when the power is restored for the second time shown in FIG. 58, and normal background display effect is executed when the power is restored for the second time shown in FIG. 58 (b).
An effect executed when the first operating means is operated without going through a power interruption / recovery after the start of the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 3 shown after the lever operation in FIG. 56 (a). The interlocking effect 2] shown after the bet operation in FIG. 56 (a) and the effect executed when the first operating means is operated after the power is cut off and restored after the start of the first effect [ For example, it is different from the interlocking effect 1 shown after the lever operation in FIG. 57 (a) and the normal background shown after the bet operation in FIG. 57 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.
again,
"The effect executed when the first operating means is operated without going through the power failure / recovery after the start of the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 1 shown in FIG. 56A] is It is an effect connected from the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 3 shown after the lever operation in FIG. 56 (a)].
The effect executed when the first operation means is operated after the power is cut off and the power is restored after the start of the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 1 shown at the left end of FIG. 57 (a)] is The first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 1 shown after the lever operation in FIG. 57 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.
again,
"The first operating means is an operating means that accepts an operation for starting a game.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.
again,
"A second operating means [for example, bet buttons 130 to 132] is provided.
The effect means is a means capable of executing the fourth effect.
After the start of the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a)], the power is cut off and restored after passing through the operation of the second operating means (hereinafter, "the third case"). The fourth effect [for example, the display effect of the normal background shown in FIG. 58 (a)] is executed.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the fourth effect after the third case, the fourth effect [for example, the normal after the second power cut and power recovery shown in FIG. 58 (b)). Background display effect] is executed,
The fourth effect [for example, a normal background display effect] is different from the second effect [for example, a demo effect].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.
again,
"The first case is the case where the power is cut off and restored without any operation after the start of the first effect [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 57 (a)].
The second case is also the case where the power is cut off and restored without any operation after the start of the second effect [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 57 (b)].
The second production is a demonstration production.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.
again,
"From a plurality of states [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 6] including a first state [for example, setting 1 shown in FIG. 6] and a second state [for example, setting 6 shown in FIG. 6]. A state setting means for setting a certain state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] is provided.
The state setting means changes the state from the previously set state to another state between the time when the power is restored and the time when the first game is started [for example, the setting shown in FIG. 11]. It is a means that can execute [change processing].
The setting change process is a process including a RAM clear process [for example, step S1101 shown in FIG. 11].
Even if the setting change process is performed in the first case [for example, when the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the interlocking effect 1], the second effect [for example, the effect of the demo display] is executed [for example. , Step S3008b shown in FIG. 52],
In the second case [for example, when the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the demo display effect], the second effect [for example, the demo display effect] is executed even if the setting change process is performed. [For example, step S3008b shown in FIG. 52],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, an effect image display device 157].
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect [for example, the interlocking effect 1 shown in FIG. 54 (a) or the interlocking effect 2 shown in FIG. 54 (b)].
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect [for example, the effect of the demo display shown in FIG. 53 (a) or the effect of displaying the normal background shown in the figure (b) and the figure (b')]. can be,
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the second effect [for example, when the power is cut off and restored as shown in FIG. 57A). Demonstration display effect, normal background display effect when power is cut off and restored as shown in FIG. 58 (a)] is executed.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the second effect after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the second effect [for example, FIG. 57 (b)). The demonstration display effect is executed when the power is restored for the second time shown in FIG. 58, and the normal background display effect is executed when the power is restored for the second time shown in FIG. 58 (b).
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

The setting is changed by the setting operation immediately after the power is turned on. At the game store, turn on the power of the game consoles of the entire game island at once, and after a while, if you want to change the settings of only one of them, turn off the power of only one of them and then restore the power. The settings will be changed. Further, when the setting of only one game console is changed while the power of the game consoles of the entire game island is turned off, the power of only one of the game consoles is turned on and the setting is changed. After that, in order to turn on the power of all the game consoles of the entire game island, the power of the game consoles whose settings have been changed is turned off, and then the power of all the game consoles of the entire game island is turned on. In this way, the game console may be repeatedly disconnected and restored.

According to the above-mentioned game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by an effect performed after the power is restored when the power is cut off and restored repeatedly. That is, according to the above-mentioned game consoles, both the case where the game consoles are individually power-cut and restored by the operation of the game store, and the case where the game islands where a plurality of game machines are installed are collectively power-cut and restored. Even if the power failure / recovery operation is performed, the effect after the second power failure / recovery can be matched with the production after the first power failure / recovery, depending on the operation of the amusement store. In addition to being able to execute the effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the setting change or the setting deferment.

again,
The first effect [for example, interlocking effect 1] may be executed before the player's operation [for example, the bet operation shown in FIG. 57 (a) and FIG. 57 (b)] is executed. be,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the operation means may be provided, and the first effect may be executed before the player operates the operation means. According to this game table, it is possible to match the effect performed before the operation after the power is cut off and restored.

again,
The first effect [for example, interlocking effect 2] may be executed after the player's operation [for example, the bet operation shown in FIG. 58 (a) and FIG. 58 (b)] is executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first effect may be executed after the operating means is provided and the player operates the operating means. According to this game table, even an effect performed after the operation can be adjusted after the power is cut off and restored.

The operation may be an operation for inserting a game medium [for example, a bet operation] or an operation for starting a game. Alternatively, the operation may be an operation that is promoted to be performed in the production. For example, it may be an operation of an effect button (chance button).

again,
"In a certain game, the first effect may be executed during a period after the second effect is executed [for example, after the lever is operated shown in FIG. 57 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first production is executed again at the same timing.

again,
"The effect means may be a third effect [for example, the interlocking effect 3 shown in FIG. 54 (c), the interlocking effect 4 shown in FIG. 55 (a), or the interlocking effect 4 shown in FIG. 55 (a). It may be the interlocking effect 5 shown in b) or the interlocking effect 6 shown in FIG. 55 (c)].
In a certain game, a series of effects in which the third effect is executed in a period after the first effect is executed [for example, a period from the operation of the start lever 135 to the stop of all reels]. [For example, interlocking pattern 2] may be executed.
In a certain game, the first effect is performed during the period after the second effect [for example, the effect of the demo display] is executed [for example, the period from the operation of the start lever 135 to the stop of all reels]. The effect and the third effect may be performed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 57],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"From a plurality of states [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 6] including a first state [for example, setting 1 shown in FIG. 6] and a second state [for example, setting 6 shown in FIG. 6]. A state setting means for setting a certain state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] is provided.
The state setting means changes the state from the previously set state to another state between the time when the power is restored and the time when the first game is started [for example, the setting shown in FIG. 11]. It is a means that can execute [change processing].
Even if the setting change process is performed in the first case [for example, when the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the interlocking effect 1], the second effect [for example, the effect of the demo display] is executed [for example. , Step S3008b shown in FIG. 52],
In the second case [for example, when the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the demo display effect], the second effect [for example, the demo display effect] is executed even if the setting change process is performed. [For example, step S3008b shown in FIG. 52],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the entire specification, the term "power recovery" simply means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.

Further, at the time of power interruption here, a certain operation [for example, an operation of inserting a game medium (bet operation)] by the player may or may not be performed.

again,
"In the first case, the second effect is executed even if the setting change process is not performed [for example, step S3008b shown in FIG. 52].
In the second case, the second effect is executed even if the setting change process is not performed [for example, step S3008b shown in FIG. 52].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

At the time of power interruption here, a certain operation [for example, an operation of inserting a game medium (bet operation)] by the player is not performed.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Setting change means to perform setting change processing and
Counting means to count the production and
It is a game table equipped with
The count value in the counting means includes that the result of the game becomes a certain result [for example, replay] in the first game [for example, the game in the initial state] after the setting change process is performed. It is a value that does not change before and after the condition [for example, the state of the previous game is the normal state] is satisfied [for example, the acquisition condition is not satisfied in the first place (step S1B01 shown in FIG. 20)].
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power is cut off and restored [for example, (for example, the acquisition point lottery in step S1B03 shown in FIG. 20). Win 5 points or more in processing],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
A display means capable of displaying "a certain display related to the above-mentioned effect [for example, display of the number of points such as XX / 1000] is provided.
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the setting change process is performed [for example, it remains 0/1000].
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example, there is no change because it is hidden in the first place (FIG. 53). Demo display in which the point number display shown in (a) is hidden, or normal background in which the point number display is hidden as shown in FIG. 52 (b) or FIG. 52 (b'))],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The certain display remains hidden before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery. In the normal background, the display in which the cumulative number of points such as "???/1000" is hidden may be continuously displayed. Even in this case, "the display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example," ??? ". The display of "/ 1000" remains. "

again,
"Electricity recovery means that the power was restored without performing the above setting change process after the power was cut off.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the game console described with reference to FIGS. 50 and above, when a power failure occurs in the normal state and the power is restored, the first sub-control unit 400 also updates the effect state to the normal state, while in the point specialization A state. When the power was restored due to a power failure, the first sub-control unit 400 updated the effect state to the normal state instead of the point-specialized A state. In addition, the normal state is a state in which the player is in the default state and the stay period is the longest, and the point specialization A state is a state in which points are more easily accumulated than in the normal state, which is relatively for the player. It is in an advantageous state (the same applies to the following explanation). In the game console described below, the opposite is true, and when a power failure occurs in the point-specialized A state and the power is restored, the first sub-control unit 400 also updates the effect state to the point-specialized A state. When the power is restored due to a power failure in the normal state, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the effect state to the point specialization A state instead of the normal state. In the normal state, a point-related display such as "cumulative points on the display / maximum number of cumulative points on the display" is displayed, but in the game console described below, in the point specialization A state, the display is displayed. Cumulative points are not displayed. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing a flow of a modification of the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 26. Hereinafter, the differences from the effect control process described with reference to FIG. 26 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process, the information acquisition / update process (step S3001) is executed as described with reference to FIG. 26, and the information included in the various commands (RT (game state)). ), Production status, cumulative points, points earned, number of items possessed and acquisition order, type of items possessed, number of remaining AT games, number of AT additional games, information based on each operation, etc.) are appropriately acquired and these are acquired. Information is stored (updated). Further, when the power recovery command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the information about the game state and the effect state is updated based on the information included in the power recovery command, but it indicates that the effect state is the normal state. Only when the information is received, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the point specialization A state instead of the normal state. That is, the setting of the current effect state in the RAM 408 is updated to the point specialization A state. For this reason, if a power failure recovery occurs during the normal state of staying mainly during the lap, the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 become inconsistent after the power recovery. In the following description, the effect state of the main control unit 300 means the effect state managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Further, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 refers to the effect state managed by the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400, or the effect state displayed on the effect image display device 157. There is. The setting of the current effect state in the RAM 408 is updated in step S3001 based on the information included in the various commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. However, when the point-specialized A state is set, the first sub-control unit 400 manages the transition of the point-specialized A state separately from the main control unit 300 in the point-specialized A state processing described later. Execute. Further, when the setting of the current effect state is updated to the point specialization A state, a value of 30 is set in the point specialization A state remaining game number counter prepared in the RAM 408.

Following step S3001, the display point management process (step S3013) described in detail later is executed, then the display item management process (step S3005) described in detail later is executed, and further, the navigation-related display process of FIG. 26 is executed. The same navigation-related display process (step S3007) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3018.

In step S3018, the point specialization A state process is executed, then the other effect setting process (step S3009) is executed, and this effect control process is terminated. In the other effect setting process of step S3009, a setting for displaying a dedicated background prepared for each effect state on the effect image display device 157 according to the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is made, or a confrontation is made. Settings and the like for displaying the display of the effect on the effect image display device 157 are set.

FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the flow of the point-specific A state processing (step S3018) shown in FIG. 60A.

First, in step S3018a to be executed first, it is determined whether or not the point specialization A state update condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3018b. If not, this point specialization A state is not satisfied. End the process. The point specialization A state update condition is satisfied if the value of the point specialization A state remaining game number counter prepared in the RAM 408 is 1 or more.

In step S3018b, the value of the point specialization A state remaining game number counter is subtracted by 1, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the point specialization A state remaining game number counter after the subtraction becomes 0 (step). S3018c). If it is not 0 in this determination, the point specialization A state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is 0, the current effect state in the RAM 408 is set to the normal state (step S3018d), and the point specialization A state process is terminated.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3013) shown in FIG. 60 (a).

First, in step S1B05 of FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the acquisition point command prepared by the main control unit 300 has been received (step S3013a). After passing through step S3013b, the process proceeds to step S3013c.

The first sub-control unit 400 has a cumulative point counter that counts cumulative points in the RAM 408. The value of the cumulative points included in the power recovery command is set in this cumulative point counter at the time of power recovery. Further, in step S3013b, the value of the acquired points included in the acquired point command is added to the cumulative point counter. Therefore, even if the first sub control unit 400 is in the point specialization A state, if the main control unit 300 is in the normal state, the value of the acquired points based on the normal state is added to the cumulative point counter. That is, the value of the earned points obtained by the earned point lottery using the portion of the table shown in FIG. 20B that is used when the effect state is the normal state is added to the cumulative point counter.

In step S3013c, it is determined whether or not the condition for displaying the display point on the effect image display device 157 is satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is any one of an initial state, a normal state, a point specialization B state, a precursor state, and a confrontation state. Even in the confrontation state, the display points are displayed only during the confrontation preparation. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3013d, and if not, the display point management process is terminated. In step S3013d, a setting is made to display the value of the cumulative point counter of the RAM 408 on the effect image display device 157. Therefore, when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, the value of the accumulated points is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. The same applies even if the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the point specialization A state. Further, when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the normal state in step S3018d of FIG. 60 (b) and the point specialization A state is changed to the normal state, the value of the accumulated points is the effect image. It is displayed on the display device 157.

When the setting in step S3013d is completed, the display point management process ends.

FIG. 62 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the display item management process (step S3015) shown in FIG. 60 (a).

In step S3015a, it is determined whether or not the item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3015b, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3015f. The item addition command prepared in step S1323 of FIG. 13A includes information on the number of items possessed and the acquisition order, the type of items possessed, and the current cumulative points. This item addition command is also sent when a new item has not been acquired.

In step S3015b, the possessed item information update process is executed, the information of the currently possessed item is updated based on the information included in the item addition command, and the process proceeds to step S3015c.

FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the flow of the possessed item information update process in step S3015b.

In step S3015b1, it is determined whether or not the condition for displaying the display item on the effect image display device 157 is satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is any one of a normal state, a point specialization B state, a precursor state, and a confrontation state. As with the display points, even in the confrontation state, the displayed items are displayed only during the confrontation preparation. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3015b2, and if not, the possessed item information update process is terminated. In step S3015b2, all the currently possessed items are displayed on the effect image display device 157 based on the possessed number and acquisition order of the items and the type of possessed items included in the item addition command. Make the settings for. Therefore, when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, even if there is an item possessed, it is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. The same applies even if the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the point specialization A state. Further, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the normal state in step S3018d of FIG. 60B, and the display of the effect image display device 157 changes from the display of the point specialization A state to the display of the normal state. In that case, all the items possessed at that stage are displayed on the effect image display device 157.

When the setting in step S3015b2d is completed, the display point management process ends.

In step S3015c shown in FIG. 62 (a), it is determined whether or not the current effect state setting in the RAM 408 is a normal state or a confrontation state. The item acquisition effect described later is an effect executed only in the normal state or the confrontation state. If it is neither in the normal state nor in the confrontation state, the display item management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the normal state or the confrontation state, the process proceeds to step S3015d.

In step S3015d, it is determined whether the effect image display device 157 is displaying a cumulative point larger than 0 or displaying "roulette x 1". If any of these conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3015e, and if not, the display item management process ends.

In step S3015e, the same process as the item acquisition effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 29 is executed, and this display item management process is terminated. From the flow so far, the fact that the item acquisition effect setting process is executed means that the effect state is the normal state or the confrontation state (step S3015c), and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is from the point specialization A state. When the normal state is reached, all the items possessed at that stage are displayed on the effect image display device 157. Therefore, in the determination of step S3303 shown in FIG. 29, there is no difference in items, and step S3305 is always executed.

Steps S3015f to S3015i, which are executed when the item addition command is not received, are the same as steps S3211 to S3217 in FIG. 28, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example in which the setting is changed, the initial state is changed to the point specialization A state, and then the normal state is changed. In any of the figures from FIG. 63 (a) to FIG. 67 (b), time elapses from left to right. Further, in each of the figures from FIGS. 63 (a) to 67 (b), the effect state managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the effect managed by the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 are shown. The state is shown. In addition, the internal winning combination is shown below those production states. Further, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is shown, and the “sub-control unit: display P” below it is the value of the cumulative point on the display in the effect image display device 157, that is, The value of the cumulative point displayed on the effect image display device 157 is shown. For example, when the "sub-control unit: display P" is "0500", a point-related display such as "0500/1000" is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect image display device 157, and it is blank. Is not displaying the entire point-related display in the lower left corner of the effect image display device 157. If it is blank, the point-related display itself may be displayed in a mode such as "???/1000". However, in this aspect, what is the value part of the cumulative point on the display? ?? ?? ?? It means that the cumulative point value on the display is not displayed. The second line from the bottom shows the possessed items stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the "secondary control unit: display item" in the bottom line is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Indicates the displayed item. For example, when the "sub-control unit: display item" is "medium UP", the "defeat rate medium UP" item is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when it is blank, the effect image is displayed. No item is displayed on the display device 157.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the normal state, and the effect image display device 157 is dedicated to the normal state in which the hall and the grandfather are present, as shown in FIG. 31 (d). The background display is displayed. In FIG. 31 (d), the point-related display is "0000/1000", but in the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), it is "0500/1000". Further, in FIG. 31 (d), no item is displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), one "defeat rate medium UP" item is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In this state, the setting is changed. That is, the setting is changed after the power is turned off (power cutoff) and the power is turned on (power recovery). When the setting is changed, the effect state of the main control unit 300 becomes the initial state, and in the effect image display device 157, the initial state in which the lord holding the microphone stands in front of the sliding door as shown in FIG. 31 (a). Switch to the dedicated background display. Further, when the setting is changed, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 becomes "0000", and the possessed items stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 disappear. In the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the value of the cumulative point on the display is "0000", and the display of the item disappears.

Eventually, the start lever 135 is operated. The timing of the first operation of the start lever 135 after the setting change is set to t1 in the following description. In the initial state, only one game lasts, and in this one game, an internal win is made for "missing". When the first game in the initial state ends (all reels are stopped), the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the point specialization A state, and in the effect image display device 157, the princess on the sandy beach shown in FIG. 31 (c). Switch to the background display dedicated to the point-specialized A state with Princess Chibi. The same applies to the switching of other effect states. In both the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, the effect state is switched when the game ends (all reels are stopped), but the third stop is performed. The switching may be performed at the time of operation, the switching may be performed at the time of betting operation for the next game, or the switching may be performed at the start of the next game (when the start lever 135 is operated). , The switching may be performed at the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, or the switching may be performed when a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the previous lever operation (the entire specification). Same as above). Further, in this next game, the player internally wins the "replay" and earns 20 points in the earned point lottery process in step S1B03 of FIG. 20 (a). The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 becomes "0020", but the value of the cumulative point is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 due to the transition to the point specialization A state.

While the effect state of the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 reaches "1000". In FIG. 13 (a), the item lottery (step S1305) using the lottery table A shown in the figure (b) and the figure (c) is limited to the case where the effect state of the main control unit 300 is in the normal state. However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 67 (b), it can be performed in either the point specialization A state or the point specialization B state. It should be noted that it may be possible to perform even in a precursory state. However, the item acquisition effect in the effect image display device 157 is limited to the case where the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the normal state and the confrontation state (see steps S3015c and step S3015e in FIG. 62 (a)). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), the “Destroy rate medium UP” item is won, and the “Destroy rate medium UP” item is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 as a possessed item. However, the effect image display device 157 still hides the item as well as the cumulative point value.

The point specialization A state continues for 30 games, and in the 28th game, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 reaches "1000" again. In the second item lottery, the "small defeat rate UP" item is won, and the "small defeat rate UP" item is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 as the second possessed item.

Eventually, the game of the 30th game is started in the point specialization A state. The timing at which the game of the 30th game is started will be referred to as t3 in the following description. Then, when the 30 games are exhausted, that is, when the rotation of the third reel is stopped, the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state and is managed by the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400. The current production state also shifts to the normal state. The effect image display device 157 switches to the background display dedicated to the normal state as shown in FIG. 31 (d) in accordance with the stop of the third reel. Further, as the effect state managed by the RAM 408 shifts to the normal state, the effect image display device 157 displays the value of the cumulative point. That is, the point-related display of "0030/1000" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in accordance with the stop of the third reel. As the cumulative point displayed on the effect image display device 157, the value of the cumulative point counter provided in the RAM 408 is displayed. Further, as the effect state managed by the RAM 408 shifts to the normal state, all the items possessed at that time are displayed on the effect image display device 157 (step shown in FIG. 62B). S3015b2). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), the “defeat rate medium UP” item and the “defeat rate small UP” item are displayed on the effect image display device 157 in accordance with the stop of all reels. In this way, points and items are displayed when the last game in the point specialization A state ends and the normal state is reached.

If the game store digests one game before the store opens so that the initial state is not shown to the player, the effect image display device 157 displays a background display dedicated to the point-specialized A state at the time of opening. ..

FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example in which a power failure / recovery occurs in a normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 (b), as in the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the normal state, and the effect image display device 157 displays a background display dedicated to the normal state. The point-related display is "0500/1000", and one "Destroy rate medium UP" item is displayed.

In this state, a power failure occurs and the power is restored. In some cases, the power is cut off at night when the game store is closed, and the power is restored in the morning when the game store is opened. In other cases, the power is restored immediately after the power failure occurs. It should be noted that the setting was not changed at the time of this power restoration, and if the setting was not changed even though the setting could be changed before the store opened, the setting is deferred. When the power is restored, the effect state managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 returns to the effect state at the time of the power failure (here, the normal state), and the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 is also the value at the time of the power failure (the value at the time of the power failure). Here, it returns to "0500"), and the possessed item stored in the RAM 308 also returns to the possessed item at the time of power failure (here, the "defeat rate medium UP" item). On the other hand, the effect state managed by the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes the point specialization A state. Therefore, the effect image display device 157 after the power is restored displays the background display in the point specialization A state. Further, the value of the accumulated points is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the power is restored, and the item is not displayed.

Eventually, the start lever 135 is operated. The operation timing of the first start lever 135 after the power is cut off and restored is t2 in the following description. In the first game after the power is restored, the player internally wins the "replay" and obtains 5 points in the point lottery process in step S1B03 of FIG. 20 (a). The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is "0505", but the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 shifts to the point specialization A state, so that the effect image display device 157 is displayed. Does not display the cumulative point value.

The effect state of the main control unit 300 is the normal state, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, and the effect state is managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 while the effect states do not match. The cumulative point value reaches "1000". In the item lottery using the lottery table A shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 13 (c), the "small defeat rate UP" item is won, and the "small defeat rate UP" item is the main item to be possessed as the second item. It is stored in the RAM 308 of the control unit 300. However, the effect image display device 157 still hides the item as well as the cumulative point value.

In the point specialization A state processing shown in FIG. 60B, the first sub control unit 400 executes the transition management of the point specialization A state separately from the main control unit 300. Eventually, the game of the 30th game is started after the power is restored. That is, the game of the 30th game is started after the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the point specialization A state. The timing at which the game of the 30th game is started will be referred to as t4 in the following description. Then, when the 30 games are exhausted, that is, when the rotation of the third reel is stopped, the effect state managed by the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the normal state, and the effect image display device At 157, the background display is switched to the normal state. Further, the value of the cumulative point is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the point-related display is "0020/1000". Further, the effect image display device 157 displays all the items possessed at the time of transition to the normal state (step S3015b2 shown in FIG. 62 (b)), and even in the example shown in FIG. 63 (b), the effect is produced. The image display device 157 displays the "Destroy rate medium UP" item and the "Destroy rate small UP" item. In this way, points and items are displayed when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes from the point specialization A state to the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 described above, all the items possessed when the point specialization A state is changed to the normal state are displayed. For this reason, multiple items may be displayed at the same timing, and when multiple items are displayed, it may seem that the assumption that the setting is deferred is valid. However, the point specialization A state is a production state in which points are easier to accumulate and items are easier to acquire than in the normal state. Rather, displaying multiple items matches the point specialization A state, and there are a plurality of points. Since the item is displayed, it is not possible to speculate that the setting is deferred.

In addition, it is often the case that the game store side digests one game before the store opens so that the initial state is not shown to the player. Therefore, according to the game console in which the example shown in FIG. 63 is executed, in the state where the game store has just opened, the effect image is displayed regardless of whether the setting is changed or the setting is deferred. The background display of the point specialization A state is displayed on the device 157, and it is not possible to determine whether the setting is changed or the setting is deferred only by looking at the background display. Moreover, since neither the value of the cumulative point nor the item is displayed, it is not possible to determine the setting change or the setting deferment by relying on these displays. The number of staying games in the initial state is set to 1 game here, but it is not limited to 1 game, and the number of games may not be complicated for the game store to digest before opening (for example, 2 games or 3 games). Just do it. Alternatively, the initial state may be eliminated, and after the setting is changed, the point-specialized A state may be suddenly changed. Further, in the point specialization A state, the cumulative point value is not always displayed, but it may be temporarily displayed. For example, the display may be performed only in the 10th game and the 20th game, or may be displayed only when a certain point (for example, 100 points) or more is acquired.

FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which a power failure / recovery occurs when the point-specialized A state is reached after t1 in the example of FIG. 63 (a). Hereinafter, the differences from the example of FIG. 63 (a) will be mainly described.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 64 (a), after the setting is changed, the point-specialized A state is entered after the initial state. At the stage of shifting to the point specialization A state, the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 are the same.

While the effect state of the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 reaches "1000", and the item possessed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The item "Up in defeat rate" is stored as. Then, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 once becomes "0000", then points are repeatedly acquired, and the value increases to "0980". At this stage, a power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately. The setting was not changed at the time of this power restoration. When the power is restored, the effect state managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 returns to the effect state at the time of power failure (here, the point specialization A state), and the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 is also at the time of power failure. (Here, "0980"), and the possessed item stored in the RAM 308 also returns to the possessed item at the time of power failure (here, "Destroy rate medium UP" item). Further, the effect state managed by the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 also returns to the point specialization A state, but the first sub control unit 400 is in the point specialization A state process shown in FIG. 60 (b). , The transition management of the point specialization A state is started separately from the main control unit 300.

The start lever 135 is operated, and in the first game after the power is restored, the player internally wins the "replay" and obtains 20 points in the point lottery process in step S1B03 of FIG. 20 (a). The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is just "1000", and in the second item lottery, the "small defeat rate UP" item is won and the "small defeat rate UP" item is 2. It is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 as the second possessed item.

Eventually, 30 games are digested after shifting from the initial state to the point-specialized A state, and the effect state managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shifts from the point-specialized A state to the normal state. On the other hand, since the first sub-control unit 400 manages the number of remaining games in the point-specialized A state after the power is restored, the number of remaining games has not yet reached 0 at this point, and the point-specialized A continues. The state is maintained, and the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 do not match. The background display of the point specialization A state is still displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the cumulative point value and the item are still hidden.

In the first game after the effect state managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, the player internally wins the "replay" and obtains 20 points. The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 exceeds 1000 and becomes "1010". In the third item lottery, the "1 defeated" item is won and the "1 defeated" item is selected. It is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 as the third possessed item.

Then, when the number of remaining games in the point-specialized A state after power recovery managed by the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 0, the production state of the first sub-control unit 400 also shifts to the point-specialized A state. , The effect state of the first sub control unit 400 matches the effect state of the main control unit 300. In the effect image display device 157, the background display is switched from the one dedicated to the point-specialized A state to the one dedicated to the normal state. Further, the value of the cumulative point is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the point-related display becomes "0110/1000". Further, the effect image display device 157 has all three items (“Destroy rate medium UP” item, “Destroy rate small UP”” possessed when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the normal state. The item, "Destroy 1" item) is displayed.

Comparing the example shown in FIG. 64 (a) described above with the example shown in FIG. 63 (b) described above, the power was restored in the point-specialized A state even when the power was restored in the normal state. Even in this case, 30 games are uniformly guaranteed for the point-specialized A state after the power is restored, and the setting is changed or the setting is deferred depending on the maintenance period (number of games) of the point-specialized A state after the power is restored. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not.

In FIG. 64 (b), after t2 in the example of FIG. 63 (b), the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts while the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 do not match. It is a figure which shows the example which becomes. Hereinafter, the differences from the example of FIG. 63 (b) will be mainly described.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), after the power is cut off and restored, the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the normal state, whereas the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the point specialization A state. Yes, the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 do not match.

Eventually, the player wins the point-specialized B state transition lottery in step S1505 shown in FIG. 16, and the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts from the normal state to the point-specialized B state. On the other hand, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is still the point specialization A state, and the background display of the point specialization A state is still displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the value of the accumulated points is also. Items also remain hidden. When 5 games have been exhausted after shifting to the point-specialized B state, the normal state is reached. In these 5 games, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 exceeds 1000 and becomes "1015", and in the item lottery, the item "Defeat rate small UP" is won and "Defeated". The low rate UP "item is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 as the second possessed item.

Five games are digested after shifting to the point specialization B state, and the production state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, but the point specialization after the power recovery managed by the first sub control unit 400 The number of remaining games in the A state is still not 0, and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 remains the point-specialized A state.

After that, the number of remaining games in the point-specialized A state after the power recovery managed by the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 0, and the production state of the first sub-control unit 400 also shifts to the normal state, and the main control is performed. The effect state of the unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 match. Further, the effect image display device 157 switches to the background display in the normal state, the cumulative point value is displayed, and the point-related display becomes "0160/1000". Further, the effect image display device 157 displays all two items (“Destroy rate medium UP” item and “Destroy rate small UP” item) possessed at the time of transition to the normal state.

In this way, even if the production state of the main control unit 300 shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state, the point specialization A state in which the number of staying games is larger than the point specialization B state is stopped halfway. By not switching the background display of the effect image display device 157 to the background display dedicated to the point-specialized B state where the princess is in the castle town, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the unnaturalness can be eliminated intentionally. The player is not suspected that the point-specialized A state is set, that is, the main control unit 300 is in the normal state, but the first sub-control unit 400 is in the point-specialized A state, and is set as a result. It becomes difficult to determine the deferment.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b) described above, after the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts from the point specialization B state to the normal state, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 also shifts to the normal state. In the period when the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the point specialization B state (for example, at the timing of t5 shown in FIG. 64 (b)), the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 may shift to the normal state. possible. Even in this case, the background display in the normal state is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 still do not match. However, since the point specialization B state is maintained for only 5 games, the effect state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 will be matched within a relatively short time thereafter.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts from the normal state to the point-specialized B state, but in the normal state, it may shift to the precursor state. However, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 67, the game number range shown in FIG. 15B is the game number range after the power is restored. That is, the number of games is reset every time the power is turned off, and the number of games starts from 0 when the power is restored. Then, the zone 1 shown in FIG. 15B is in the game number range of 0 to 32, and the zone 2 is in the game number range of 33 to 50. By doing this, if the settings are changed after the power is turned on, 1 game is consumed in the initial state, 30 games are consumed in the point specialization A state, and the main control is performed until the first game that shifts to the normal state. The effect state of the unit 300 does not shift to the precursor state, and the effect state of the main control unit 300 may shift to the precursor state only after the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 returns to the normal state. You will not be able to.

According to the example described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, in the point specialization A state, the value or item of the cumulative point is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 As the effect state shifts from the point-specialized A state to the normal state, the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the cumulative point value and the item, but FIG. 65 shows the cumulative point value and the item. It is a figure which shows the example which the timing which the display starts is different. The example shown in FIG. 65 (a) is an example after t3 in the example of FIG. 63 (a), and the example shown in FIG. 65 (b) is an example after t4 in the example of FIG. 63 (b).

In the example shown in FIG. 65, the condition for starting the display of the cumulative point value and the item on the effect image display device 157 is that the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 has changed from the point specialization A state to the normal state. Other conditions are added. The value of the cumulative point is the effect image display device 157 because the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 changes after the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 shifts to the normal state. Begins to appear in. According to the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has increased from "0030" to "0035", so that the effect image display device 157 has "0035 /". The point-related display of "1000" is displayed. According to the example shown in FIG. 65 (b), the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has increased from "0020" to "0025", so that the effect image display device 157 has "0025 /". The point-related display of "1000" is displayed.

Further, the item is displayed on the effect image display device 157 because the possessed item stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has changed after the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 has changed to the normal state. It starts to be displayed. According to the example shown in FIG. 65, as in the game table described with reference to FIGS. 50, the item display is started by the item acquisition effect described with reference to FIG. 33 in which the possessed items increase. However, in the game console described using up to FIG. 50, only the oldest item among all the items possessed at that time was displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 65, all the items are displayed. To. In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the item acquisition effect for acquiring the "defeat 1 body" item is completed, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item possessed at that time are completed. Is also displayed. Even in the example shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the item acquisition effect for acquiring the "defeat 1 body" item is completed, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item possessed at that time are completed. Is also displayed.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the cumulative point is changed after the normal state is reached, the cumulative point is displayed and the possessed item is changed. In the example shown in the figure (b), the cumulative point is displayed when the cumulative point changes after the normal state is reached, and the item changes to the possessed item. This is an example of displaying possessed items when there is. Here, only an example of increasing as a fluctuation is shown, but it may be displayed when the accumulated points decrease due to the use of points, or it may be displayed when the number of items decreases due to the use of items. May be good.

In the example shown in FIG. 65, the change in the cumulative point and the change in the number of items are separately displayed, but when either the cumulative point or the number of items changes, both of them are displayed. The display may be started.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example in which the cumulative point value and the timing at which the display of the item is started are different. The example shown in FIG. 66 (a) is an example after t3 in the example of FIG. 63 (a), and the example shown in FIG. 66 (b) is an example after t4 in the example of FIG. 63 (b).

In the example shown in FIG. 66, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 shifts from the point specialization A state to the normal state at the timing when the display of the cumulative point value and the item is started on the effect image display device 157. At a later timing, the production state will be a further transition from the normal state. According to the example shown in FIG. 66 (a), the value of the cumulative point is displayed before the cumulative point is used. In the case of shifting from the normal state to the true sign effect, if the confrontation state is shifted, the remaining accumulated points that do not reach 1000 points will be wasted. Item lottery (step S1315) using the lottery table B shown in FIG. (E) is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 66A, the value of the cumulative point is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state one game before the first game in the confrontation state. In this example, since the precursor state (true precursor effect) is one game, the state one game before the first game in the confrontation state is the precursor state. That is, when the final game in the normal state ends (all reels are stopped), the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the precursor state, and the effect image display device 157 switches to the background display dedicated to the precursor state. At this timing, the point-related display of "0035/1000" including the value of the cumulative point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. On the other hand, according to the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), the value of the cumulative point is displayed when the cumulative point is used. The time when the cumulative point is used is just before the display of "roulette x 1" is started, but even in the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the surplus cumulative points that do not reach 1000 points are used. Since it is displayed, the display of "roulette x 1" is not displayed, and it is immediately before the screen shown in FIG. 35 (b). That is, when the last game in the precursory state ends (all reels are stopped), the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the confrontation state, and the effect image display device 157 switches to the background display dedicated to the confrontation state. At this timing, the point-related display of "0025 / 1000" including the value of the cumulative point is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when the start lever 135 is operated, the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The cumulative points become 0000, and a roulette effect is executed in which one item is selected from the three items.

According to the example shown in FIG. 66 (a), the item is displayed before the item is used. Specifically, the value of the cumulative point is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a state one game before the game in which the item use effect shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (f) is started. .. That is, when the last game in the precursory state ends (all reels are stopped), the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the confrontation state, and the effect image display device 157 switches to the background display dedicated to the confrontation state. The effect image display device 157 displays the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item possessed at this timing. After that, the item acquisition effect is performed to add the display of the "defeat rate? UP" item. On the other hand, according to the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), the item is displayed when the item is used. The time when the item is used is the time when the item use effect shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (f) is started, and the confrontation state is entered and the item acquisition effect is executed1. It is the timing when the game ends (all reels stop). The effect image display device 157 displays the "defeat rate medium UP" item, the "defeat rate small UP" item, and the "defeat rate? UP" item possessed at this timing.

In the example shown in FIG. 66, the use of the cumulative point and the use of the item are separately started to be displayed, but the display of both the cumulative point and the number of items is started before using either one. Or you may want to start displaying both when using either one.

According to the example described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 when the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the point specialization A state. When the number reaches 1000, the cumulative point is consumed, and the possessed item is added to the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The example shown in FIG. 67 is an example in which the cumulative point is not consumed when the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, but is consumed after shifting to the normal state.

The example shown in FIG. 67A is an example in which the setting is changed, the initial state is changed to the point specialization A state, and then the normal state is changed. The first half is an example shown in FIG. 63A. Is the same as. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the point specialization A state, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is not consumed but is accumulated. That is, it exceeds 1000 points, and in the final game (30th game) in the point-specialized A state, it exceeds 2000 points. On the other hand, there are no possessed items stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 after the setting is changed. When 30 games are exhausted after the point specialization A state is started, the normal state is entered. In the example shown in FIG. 67A, it is possible to perform the item acquisition effect once per game after shifting to the normal state. When the final game in the point specialization A state ends, the background display of the effect image display device 157 is switched to the one dedicated to the normal state before the bet operation. The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 at the time when the background display of the effect image display device 157 is switched to the one dedicated to the normal state is 2040. When the start lever 135 is operated and the first game in the normal state is started, the first item acquisition effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the display of "roulette x 1" is displayed as an effect image. It will be in the state displayed on the device 157. The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reduced to 1040. Further, the roulette effect in which one item is selected from the three items shown in FIG. 33 (d) is executed. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect of notifying that one item has been decided is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the first item acquisition effect, the “defeat rate medium UP” item is acquired, and the effect image display device 157 displays the “defeat rate medium UP” item. When the second game in the normal state is started, the second item acquisition effect is started, the display of "roulette x 1" is displayed again on the effect image display device 157, and is managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The value of the cumulative point is reduced to 0040. Furthermore, the roulette effect of item selection is also executed again. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the second item acquisition effect, the “defeat rate small UP” item is acquired, and the effect image display device 157 displays the “defeat rate small UP” item.

In the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), power interruption and power recovery occur in the normal state, the setting is not changed at the time of power recovery, and the effect state of the main control unit 300 is the effect state at the time of power failure (here, the normal state). Return, the value of the cumulative point managed by RAM 308 also returns to the value at the time of power failure (here, "0500"), and the possessed items stored in RAM 308 are also the possessed items at the time of power failure (here, "defeat rate in progress"). Return to UP "item). On the other hand, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the point specialization A state. Therefore, the effect image display device 157 after the power is restored displays the background display in the point specialization A state. Further, the value of the accumulated points is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the power is restored, and the item is not displayed.

While the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is not consumed and is being accumulated. That is, the cumulative points on the RAM 308 exceed 1000 points, and up to 1020 points are accumulated in the final game (30th game) in the point specialization A state. On the other hand, the possessed item stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is only one of the "defeat rate medium UP" items, as in the case of power recovery. When 30 games are exhausted after the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes the point specialization A state, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the normal state. Even in the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), it is possible to perform the item acquisition effect once per game after the transition to the normal state. When the final game in the point specialization A state ends, the background display of the effect image display device 157 is switched to the one dedicated to the normal state before the bet operation. The effect image display device 157 in which the background display is switched to the one dedicated to the normal state displays the point-related display including the value of the accumulated points. The value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is 1020, but in this point-related display, it corresponds to the acquisition points of the possessed items (“Destroy rate medium UP” items) stored in the RAM 308. 2020 points, which is obtained by adding 1000 points to the 1020 points, is displayed as the cumulative point value. That is, a point-related display such as "2020/1000" is displayed. When the start lever 135 is operated and the first game in the normal state is started, the first item acquisition effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the display of "roulette x 1" is displayed as an effect image. It will be in the state displayed on the device 157. The point-related display that was "2020/1000" changes to "1020/1000". On the other hand, the value of the cumulative point managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 remains at 1020. Further, the roulette effect in which one item is selected from the three items shown in FIG. 33 (d) is executed. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect of notifying that one item has been decided is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the first item acquisition effect, the effect in which the "defeat rate medium UP" item is acquired is executed, and the effect image display device 157 contains the "defeat rate medium UP" item. Although it is displayed, in reality, this "up in defeat rate" item corresponds to the "up in defeat rate" item stored in the RAM 308 from the time of power restoration. Therefore, the "up in defeat rate" item here is not a newly acquired item, but an item that was originally possessed. In the effect described above, the display points are pseudo-displayed by +1000 in order to make it appear as if the "up in defeat rate" item originally possessed has been acquired after shifting to the normal state. By doing so, the point-related display (for example, the display of "2040/1000") when the normal state is changed after the setting change shown in FIG. 67 (a) is displayed, and the normal state is changed after the power is cut off and restored. The appearance of the point-related display can be matched.

When the second game in the normal state is started, the second item acquisition effect is started, the display of "roulette x 1" is displayed again on the effect image display device 157, and is managed by the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The value of the cumulative point is reduced to 0020. Furthermore, the roulette effect of item selection is also executed again. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the second item acquisition effect, the “defeat rate small UP” item is acquired, and the effect image display device 157 displays the “defeat rate small UP” item. The "small defeat rate UP" item here is a newly acquired item.

In both the example shown in FIG. 67A and the example shown in FIG. 67B, it is possible to perform the item acquisition effect once per game after the transition to the normal state, but the normal state is reached. After the transition, the item acquisition effect may be performed multiple times in one game. For example, a plurality of item acquisition effects may be executed at the same time. Alternatively, a plurality of items may be acquired by one item acquisition effect. For example, in the item acquisition effect of the first game in the normal state, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (a), 2000 points out of 2040 points are consumed, and the "defeat rate small UP" item and the "defeat rate medium" item are consumed. Both "UP" items may be acquired at the same timing, or in the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), 2000 points out of 2020 points are consumed to acquire the "defeat rate small UP" item. You may also display the "Destroy rate medium UP" item. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), the acquisition and the display start of the "defeat rate small UP" item may be separated, or the item may be acquired in the first game and displayed in the second game. ..

Although the slot machine has been described above as an example, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 60 to 67 can be applied to a pachinko machine whose setting can be changed when the power is turned on, as in the slot machine. For example, in a pachinko machine in which a point acquisition lottery is performed on the sub-control unit side for each symbol change of a special figure, the initial state, the default normal state, the point specialization A state and the point specialization B state where points can be easily obtained, and the precursor state. As long as a confrontation state is provided, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 60 to 67 can be applied. That is, when the power is cut off and restored in the normal state, the state shifts to the point specialization A state and the effect of the point specialization A state is executed. After that, when the symbol of the special figure is changed a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to the normal state. In the point specialization A state, the point display and the acquired item are not displayed, or are performed less frequently than in the normal state. Further, even when points are accumulated and items are acquired in the point specialization A state, the item acquisition effect and the acquired items are not displayed, but are performed after shifting to the normal state. As a point peculiar to pachinko machines, for example, when there is a big hit in the hold look-ahead result, the item is before the start of the symbol change of the special figure that hits the jackpot, or before the stop of the symbol change of the special figure that hits the big hit. Perform acquisition production and point acquisition production. In this case, even in the point specialization A state, if the point display and the display of the acquired item are less frequent than in the normal state, the item is displayed by the item acquisition effect and the accumulated points are displayed by the point acquisition effect. May be done temporarily.

In the above description,
"A storage means [for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] that can store information about a privilege [for example, a display item or a display point] given to a player, and
A display means [for example, an effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a display related to the privilege (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, a point-related display (○○○○ / 1000)] and
A state setting means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] for setting a certain state from a plurality of states including the first state and the second state.
It is a game table equipped with
The second state [for example, the point specialization A state] is a state in which the privilege is more likely to be given than the first state [for example, the normal state] [for example, the earned points shown in FIG. 20 (b). Lottery table],
The display means displays the first state [for example, the background display dedicated to the hall with the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 31 (d)] when the state setting means sets the first state. It is a displayable means [for example, the state before the setting change shown in FIG. 63 (a)].
The display means displays the second state when the state setting means sets the second state [for example, a dedicated background display in which a princess and a princess are on the sandy beach shown in FIG. 31 (c)]. Is a means capable of displaying [for example, the state shifted from the initial state shown in FIG. 63 (a)].
The state in which the second status display is displayed has a lower display frequency of the first display than the state in which the first status display is displayed [for example, it is not displayed at all or has the same period length. The number of impressions is small]
The display means is a means for displaying the second state display in a game after the setting change process [for example, the setting change process shown in FIG. 11] is performed [for example, FIG. 63 (a)].
The display means displays the second state even when the state setting means sets the first state in the game after the power is cut off and the power is restored in the first state. [For example, FIG. 63 (b)], which is a means for displaying
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the setting has been changed.

here,
"Display means and
A game console equipped with a state setting means for setting a certain state from a plurality of states including the first state and the second state.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first state display when the state setting means sets the first state.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second state display when the state setting means sets the second state.
The display means is a means for displaying the second state display in the game after the setting change process is performed.
The display means displays the second state even when the state setting means sets the first state in the game after the power is cut off and the power is restored in the first state. Is a means of displaying
A game table featuring that. "
It may be, and further, "It is the above-mentioned game table,
A storage means that can store information about the benefits given to the player,
A display means capable of displaying a display related to the privilege (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), and
Equipped with
The second state is a state in which the privilege is more likely to be granted than the first state.
The state in which the second state display is displayed is a state in which the display frequency of the first display is lower than the state in which the first state display is displayed.
A game table featuring that. "
However, even with these game consoles, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the setting has been changed.

In addition, the said privilege may be the grant of a game medium, or may be a privilege different from the grant of a game medium (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Further, the state in which the second state display is displayed is a state in which the first display is not displayed or the first display is less likely to be displayed than the state in which the first state display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the display means may display the second state display in the first or second game after the setting change processing is performed, or after the setting change processing is performed. The second status display is displayed in any of the games from the beginning to the nth time (n is the number of times that the clerk of the game store does not think it is complicated even if the game is digested (for example, n = 3)). It may be one (the same applies to the following).

Further, the display means may display the second state display in the first game when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the first state (the same applies to the following). ..

In addition, in the above description,
"A storage means [for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] that can store information about a privilege [for example, a display item or a display point] given to a player, and
A display means [for example, an effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a display related to the privilege (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, a point-related display (○○○○ / 1000)] and
A state setting means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] for setting a certain state from a plurality of states including the first state and the second state.
It is a game table equipped with
The second state is a state in which the privilege is more likely to be granted than the first state [for example, a normal state].
The second state is a state in which the display frequency of the first display is lower than that of the first state [for example, the point specialization A state].
The display means can display a first state display [for example, a dedicated background display with a lord and an old man in the hall shown in FIG. 31 (d)] suggesting that the current state is the first state. Means
The display means displays a second state display [for example, a dedicated background display in which a princess and a princess are on a sandy beach shown in FIG. 31 (c)], which suggests that the current state is the second state. It ’s a possible means,
The display means is a means for displaying the second state display in the game after the setting change process is performed [for example, the setting change shown in the effect state of the sub-control unit in FIG. 63 (a). Is performed and the point specialization A state after the initial state of 1 game],
The display means is a means for displaying the second state display in the game after the power is cut off and the power is restored in the first state [for example, the effect of the sub-control unit in FIG. 63 (b). Point specialization A state after power recovery caused by power failure in the normal state shown in the state],
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

This game console also makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not the setting has been changed.

The second state may be a state in which the first display is not displayed or the first display is less likely to be displayed than the first state.

Further, the state in which the second state display is displayed is a state in which the first display is not displayed or the first display is less likely to be displayed than the state in which the first state display is displayed. There may be.

again,
"The state setting means is a means for setting a certain state from a plurality of states including the initial state in addition to the first state and the second state.
The initial state is a state in the first game after the setting change process is performed [for example, the initial state shown in FIG. 31 (a)].
The state setting means is a means for setting the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery [for example, power recovery occurs in the normal state shown in the effect state of the main control unit in FIG. 63 (b). After normal state],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means has a transition condition [for example, point specialization in the determination in step S3008c shown in FIG. 60 (b)" in a state where the second state display is displayed in the game after the setting change process is performed. When the A state remaining game number becomes 0] is established, the first state display is displayed instead of the second state display [for example, the setting of step S3008d shown in FIG. 60 (b). Is a means [for example, the normal state after t3 shown in the effect state of the sub-control unit in FIG. 63 (a)].
The display means is the second when the transition condition is satisfied while the second state display is displayed in the game after the power is cut off and the power is restored in the first state. It is a means for displaying the first state display instead of the state display [for example, the normal state after t4 shown in the effect state of the sub-control unit in FIG. 63 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the setting has been changed even after shifting to the first state.

The state setting means may be a means for setting the first state when the transition condition is satisfied in the second state.

In addition, the display means displays the second state display in the game after the power is cut off and the power is restored in the second state, and the state setting means displays the first state. Even if it is set, it may be a means for continuously displaying the second status display. That is, the transition condition is not a condition that is satisfied by the state setting means setting the first state, but a condition that is satisfied regardless of the setting in the state setting means. For example, the transition condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the number of games (number of games) played while the display means is displaying the second state display reaches a certain number of times.

again,
"The above benefits are items [for example," one defeat "item and" defeat rate UP "item].
The first display is the display of the item [for example, the display of the "defeat 1 body" item, the display of the "defeat rate medium UP" item, and the display of the "defeat rate small UP" item shown in FIG. 32 (b). ] Is a display that includes
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The item referred to here may be an item used in the production.

again,
"The privilege is points [for example, display points (cumulative points)].
The first display is a display including the display of the point [for example, the display of “0130” shown in FIG. 34 (a)] [for example, the display of “0130/1000” shown in FIG. 34 (a)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The point referred to here may be a point used in the production.

again,
"The state setting means is a means capable of executing the setting change process [for example, the setting change process shown in FIG. 11] between the time when the power is restored and the time when the first game is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The state setting means may be a means capable of executing the setting change process after the power is restored, or may be a means capable of executing the setting change process in the restored state.

It should be noted that the power recovery means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.

Further, the setting change process refers to a process of changing the state from the previously set state to another state between the time when the power is restored and the time when the first game is started.

again,
"The first display is a display that is reset [for example, initialized and returned to the initial display] when the setting change process is performed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the second display content [for example, 0200/1000] in a state where the privilege is acquired, and the display means is the setting change process. Is performed, the first display is displayed with the first display content [for example, 0000/1000], and the first display content is different from the second display content. You may. Further, the first display is a display showing the acquisition status of the privilege, and the first display content may be a display content displayed in a state where none of the benefits have been acquired.

again,
"The state setting means has a third state [for example, a point-specialized B state, a precursor state, or a confrontation-preparing state among the confrontation states] in addition to the first state and the second state. It is a means to set a certain state from multiple states including
The display means is the first game after a power failure occurs and a power is restored in the third state displaying the first display [for example, 0500/1000 point-related display] [for example, the same. In the game in the third state], it is a means for displaying the first display with the same display content [for example, 0500/1000] as the display content displayed before the power failure occurs.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the first game after the power is restored due to the power failure in the first state displaying the first display, the display frequency of the first display is before the power failure occurs. Lower than.

again,
"The display means displays the second state [for example, FIG. 31 (c)" in the first game after the power is cut off and the power is restored in the second state [for example, the point specialization A state]. It is a means to display a special background display with a princess and a princess Chibi on the sandy beach shown in.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned" game after a power failure occurs and a power recovery occurs "means a game after a predetermined number of games [for example, 0] have been played after a power failure occurs and a power recovery occurs. Is,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The predetermined number may be 0, and in this case, the first game after the power failure occurs and the power is restored corresponds to. Alternatively, the predetermined number may be 1, or may be a certain number of 2 or more.

again,
"The above-mentioned" game after the setting change process "is a game after a predetermined number [for example, 1] of games have been performed after the setting change process has been performed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The predetermined number may be 0, and in this case, the first game after the power failure occurs and the power is restored corresponds to. Alternatively, the predetermined number may be 1, or may be a certain number of 2 or more.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A storage means that can memorize the game value that affects the advantage of the game,
A display means capable of displaying a display related to the game value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), and
A state changing means capable of changing a state from one state to another among a plurality of states including the first state and the second state.
It is a game table equipped with
The second state is a state in which the display frequency of the first display is lower than that of the first state.
It is configured so that it can move to the second state after the setting change process is performed.
It is configured so that the storage means can shift to the second state after the power is cut off and restored while the storage means stores the game value.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the setting has been changed when the game store is opened.

again,
"The second state shifted after the setting change process is performed is higher than the second state shifted after the power is cut off and restored while the storage means stores the game value. , The storage means easily memorizes the game value,
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to bring the acquisition status of the game value after the setting change closer to the setting and deferment to equalize the advantage of the player at the time of opening the game store.

again,
"When the transition condition is satisfied in the second state that has been migrated after the setting change process has been performed, the transition to the first state is performed.
When the transition condition is satisfied in the second state, which is the transition after the power interruption and recovery in the state where the storage means stores the game value, the transition to the first state is performed.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the setting has been changed even after shifting to the first state.

again,
"The first display is a display including an item display,
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The first display is a display including a point display,
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine,
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Setting change means to perform setting change processing and
Counting means to count the production and
It is a game table equipped with
The count value in the counting means includes that the result of the game becomes a certain result [for example, replay] in the first game [for example, the game in the initial state] after the setting change process is performed. It is a value that does not change before and after the condition [for example, the state of the previous game is the normal state] is satisfied [for example, the acquisition condition is not satisfied in the first place (step S1B01 shown in FIG. 20)].
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power is cut off and restored [for example, 5 points or more are won in the earned point lottery process (for example, 5 points or more are won in the earned point lottery process). Main control after power failure / recovery shown in FIG. 63 (b): Cumulative P is 0500 → 0505)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
A display means capable of displaying "a certain display related to the above-mentioned effect [for example, display of the number of points such as XX / 1000] is provided.
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the setting change process is performed [for example, remains at 0000/1000].
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example, there is no change because it is hidden in the first place (FIG. 63). Main control after power failure / recovery shown in (b): Cumulative P is hidden → hidden)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The certain display remains hidden before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery. In contrast to the display such as "○○○○ / 1000", for example, the display such as "???/1000" does not display the cumulative number of points, and in the point specialization A state, "???/?/" The cumulative number of points such as "1000" may be the case where the hidden display is continuously displayed. Even in this case, "the display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example," ??? ". The display of "/ 1000" remains. "

again,
"It ’s the above game table,
The power recovery means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"It ’s the above game table,
The power recovery means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"It ’s the above game table,
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"It ’s the above game table,
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 106, other game consoles that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. .. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 68 to 106 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 68 to 106, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 68 to 68 to 106 are used. In the description using FIG. 106, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 68 to 106 are given priority.

In the slot machine that can be applied to the present invention described below, a predetermined number of game media are loaded, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. By starting the rotation and determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won or not based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the rotation is stopped individually and the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped meet the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that ends without paying out the game medium if it is not done.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and has a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

An appropriate number of each symbol is printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. More specifically with reference to FIG. 69, the symbol displayed on the upper stage (position 1 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110 is displayed on the upper stage design of the left reel and the middle stage (position 2 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure). The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the symbol on the upper part of the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle part of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the right reel. The symbols displayed in the middle symbol and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) are called the lower symbols of the right reel, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is connected to each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three in each vertical direction, a total of nine are displayed. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, three reels are provided inside the center of the game table, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of the optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIG. 71 is displayed. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, the left reel middle symbol and middle symbol are displayed. Only one line of the middle-stage winning line L1 composed of the reel middle-stage symbol and the right reel middle-stage symbol is provided. FIG. 69 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 requires 2 to 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid, and when 2 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet. When it is done, the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that rise to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

For example, the notification lamp 123 has been internally elected to a specific winning combination (specifically, special role 1 and special role 2) in the internal lottery described later, or the special role internal winning state or special game described later. It is a lamp that informs the player that it is in a state. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. When the re-game lamp 122 wins a re-game combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, the re-game is replayable (no medal is required). It is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, one is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the following, it may be expressed that it is given to the player in the same meaning as being paid out to the player. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player. The stop buttons 137 to 139 correspond to an example of the stop operation receiving means.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 70) provided below the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 70) provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 is output to the outside on the upper part of the effect device 160. A sound hole 143 for the purpose is provided. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ) Has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 70. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. Therefore, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 And the data capacity of RAM 308 is limited. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a lottery means, a stop control means, a game state setting means, a mode setting means, and a privilege giving means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel design. A ROM 306 that stores an array, stop position, etc., a RAM 308 that temporarily stores data, an I / O 310 that controls input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 that measures time, number of times, etc. And, WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). Start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 The state of the optical sensor, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the loading operation when loading. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and are provided on the reel frame to block light. Every time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotated from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. It is provided with a drive circuit 328 for driving a device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. The RAM 408, the I / O 410 for controlling the input / output of various devices, and the counter timer 412 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (Reel backlight, etc.) is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

Each reel 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of frames (in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (10 types in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68) shown on the right side of the figure. Only the frame) is arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, the frame number 1 on the left reel 110 is a "watermelon symbol", the frame number 9 on the middle reel 111 is a "bell symbol", and the frame number 5 on the right reel 112 is. "Seven 1 symbol" is arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range (less than 5 frames in this example) from the stop-operated position in order to improve the interest of the game. Has been done.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). The figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles 1 and 2, replaying roles 1 to 3, and small roles 1 to 6. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations, the special winning combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a BB1 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. However, in the BB1 operating state, only 48 medals are awarded. This special role 1 is a role to be won only when three medals are inserted in the normal game state described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 72 (a)).

The special role 2 is also a role (operating role) for shifting to a special gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a BB2 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning a prize. However, in the BB2 operating state, only two medals are awarded. This special role 2 is a winning combination only when two medals are inserted in the normal gaming state (see the remarks column in FIG. 72 (a)).

In addition, the replaying roles 1 to 3 are roles that enable replaying without inserting a new medal. These special roles 1 and 2 and replay games 1 to 3 may be referred to as "actuating roles". In addition, the "winning" includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination that does not involve the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, special roles 1 and 2, replay. Winning of roles 1 to 3 is included. In addition, special roles 1 and 2 are special roles that are carried over to the next game if they are not determined to be a prize, and other roles are not carried over to the next game if they are not determined to be a prize. It is a role.

For special roles 1 and 2, medals will not be paid out due to winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BAR1-BAR1-bell" for the special role 1 and "BAR1-BAR2-bell" for the special role 2. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1", the special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and the special role 1 and the special role 2 may be collectively referred to as "special role" or "BB". be.

When the special winning combination 1 or 2 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each of the special winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special role 1 is set to on, the main control unit 300 shifts the state of the game to the special role 1 internal winning state. When the flag corresponding to the special role 2 is set to on, the main control unit 300 shifts the state of the game to the internal winning state of the special role 2. These flags are kept on until the corresponding operating combination is won, and it becomes easy to win these operating combinations in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if you do not win those roles in the games that have been internally won in the special roles 1 and 2, the state will be the same as in the state in which you have been internally won in the special roles 1 and 2 in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations will be obtained. It will be easy to win a prize.

The internal winning state of special role 1 and the internal winning state of special role 2 will be described in detail later, but if the internal winning state of special role 2 is internally won by a role other than special role 2, other roles The reel stop control is executed so that the symbols constituting the above are preferentially aligned.

The replaying roles 1 to 3 are winning roles (actuating roles) that allow the game to be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning, and the medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be executed again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted cards. In the corresponding symbol combination, the re-game combination 1 is "replay 1 or 2-replay 1 or 2-replay 1 or 2", the re-game combination 2 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", and the re-game The role 3 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2". Among the above-mentioned replaying roles, the replaying combination 1 may be referred to as a "normal replay", the replaying combination 2 may be referred to as a "seven 1 matching replay", and the replaying combination 3 may be referred to as a "seven 2 matching replay". Further, when the player wins the re-game combination 2, the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus 1 state described later, and when the player wins the re-game combination 3, the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus 2 state described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 72 (a)). The symbol combination of the replaying combination 2 is a pseudo BB1 transition symbol, and the symbol combination of the replaying combination 3 is a pseudo BB2 transition symbol. The pseudo-bonus 1 state lasts 20 games, while the pseudo-bonus 2 state lasts only 15 games.

The re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 may be any role as long as the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the replay, the medal insertion may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number storage area prepared in the RAM 308), or the replay may be performed. The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small roles 1 to 6 are prize-winning roles in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. In the corresponding symbol combination, the small role 1 is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", the small role 2 is "BAR2-cherry-replay 1 or 2", and the small role 3 is "cherry-ANY-ANY". , Small role 4 is "BAR1-Replay 1 or 2-Replay 1 or 2", Small role 5 is "Bell-Bell-Bell", and Small role 6 is "Bell-Bell-Replay 1 or 2". be. In addition, "ANY" indicates that any symbol may be used. For example, in the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol of the left reel 110 may be "cherry", and the middle reel 111 and the right reel The symbol of 112 may be any symbol. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. 72.

Of the above small roles, small role 1 is "watermelon", small role 2 is "weak cherry", small role 3 is "strong cherry", small role 4 is "chance eye", and small role 5 is "push order bell". , Small role 6 may be referred to as "one bell". Strong cherries are easier to get benefits than weak cherries, and chances are easier to get benefits. Further, when the push order bell is internally won, the winning combination is not won unless the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, and the winning combination is always won regardless of the operation timing if the operation order is correct. The one bell is a winning combination when the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is wrong.

<Types of internal winners>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). The figure shows the type of the internal winning combination and the lottery table of the internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state.

FIG. 72 (b) shows 11 types of conditional devices (condition device numbers 1 to 11) in which the combinations described in FIG. 72 (a) are combined. The winning combination in the game is one of the winning combination corresponding to this conditional device. These condition devices are determined by a lottery at the start operation of the game. At this time, the combination corresponding to the conditional device is referred to as an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination is determined by the lottery at the start operation of the game. In the following description of this operation, it may be referred to as an internal winning combination.

As will be described later, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 is a gaming table in which the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) tends to be the longest. FIG. 72 (b) shows a lottery table for each internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2).

Conditional device number 1 is a conditional device configured by a replay combination. As described above, there are re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 3, and if the pseudo BB1 schedule flag described later is set to ON, the symbol combination of re-game combination 2 can be stopped, which will be described later. If the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 can be stopped. If neither of these pseudo BB schedule flags is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 can be stopped.

Conditional device numbers 2 to 11 are internal winning combinations composed of small combinations. Of these, the condition device numbers 6 to 11 are internally won for the small winning combination 5 and the small winning combination 6, and six types A to F are prepared. The small winning combination 5 is a push order bell, and the combination of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is "left, right, middle", "left, middle, right", "right, left, middle". , "Right, middle, left", "middle, left, right", "middle, right, left". The six types A to F correspond to these six patterns, and the correct answers in the pushing order are different from each other in the conditional devices of the conditional device numbers 6 to 11. If the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 5 is stopped. On the other hand, if the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is wrong, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 is stopped.

In any of the condition devices Nos. 6 to 11, if the operation order of the first stop and the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not mistaken, the pressing order specified by the condition device is accurate. Eleven medals will be paid out (see the remarks column in FIG. 72 (b)). On the other hand, if the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 was not mistaken but the second stop was mistaken, the answer would be incorrect, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 would stop, and only one medal would be paid out. Not done (see remarks column in FIG. 72 (b)). If a mistake is made from the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, it is determined whether one medal is paid out or no medal is paid out depending on the symbol stopped and displayed at the third stop. That is, if a mistake is made from the first stop and the "bell-bell-replay 1 or 2" of one bell (small role 6) is pulled in, the replay 1 or 2 is performed at the third stop. If the stop button is pressed at the retractable position, one bell (small role 6) will be won and one medal will be paid out, but if the stop button is pressed at the position where replay 1 or 2 cannot be retracted, it will be lost. It is a combination of symbols, and no medal is paid out.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, set values having different degrees of advantage for the player are set. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player tends to be.

In the lottery table of the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 72 (b), the value obtained by dividing the displayed numerical value by 65536 is the internal winning probability. This internal winning probability is determined for each set value, but in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT2), there is no big difference between the set values, and only the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 3 of the condition device 4 in the setting 6 is set. Is higher by 1. In other gaming states (for example, a normal state, a special gaming state, etc.), the higher the set value of the internal winning probability, the higher the advantage of the player.

Further, although the internal winning probabilities of the conditional devices of the conditional device numbers 6 to 11 are equal, the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If the combination of each condition device is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the player did not win the role of any of the conditional devices may be expressed as "winning the loss".

As described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state, when an internal winning other role other than the special role 2 is internally won, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting the other winning combinations are preferentially aligned. Is executed. Therefore, in order to shift from the internal winning state of the special role 2 to the BB2 operating state which is the special gaming state, it is necessary to insert two medals, win the internal winning of the loss, and then win the special role 2.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 and the transition of the gaming state will be described. FIG. 73A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, as shown in FIG. 73A, the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a special winning combination 1 internal winning gaming state, a special winning combination 2 internal winning gaming state, and a BB1 operating gaming state. , And five gaming states with different advantages of the player, such as the gaming state during BB2 operation, can be switched, and the advantage is changed by the transition of these states to improve the interest of the game. In this specification, the gaming state during the special role 1 internal winning is simply referred to as the special role 1 internal winning state, and the gaming state during the special role 2 internal winning is simply referred to as the special role 2 internal winning state, and BB1 is in operation. The gaming state is simply referred to as the BB1 operating state, and the BB2 operating gaming state is simply referred to as the BB2 operating state. Further, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming states, five states of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as states in which the types and probabilities of the replaying combinations to be internally won are different. However, there is a one-to-one relationship between the gaming state and RT. That is, it is RT0 in the normal gaming state, RT1 in the special winning combination 1 internal winning state, RT2 in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state, RT3 in the BB1 operating state, and RT4 in the BB2 operating state. The gaming state is controlled by the main control unit 300. It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are easier to win the re-game role internally than RT0. In addition, RT1 is easier to win the re-game role internally than RT3, and RT2 is easier to win the re-game role internally than RT4. Further, the internal winning probabilities of the re-games of RT1 and RT2 may be the same or different, and the internal winning probabilities of the re-games of RT3 and RT4 may be the same or different. May be.

The normal gaming state has the lowest internal winning probability of the re-gaming combination, is the most disadvantageous state for the player, and is also the initial state.

The special winning internal winning state is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special winning is set to on. In this gaming state, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, as described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2), if an internal winning role is won for a role other than the special role 2, the symbols constituting the other roles are preferentially aligned. , Since the reel stop control is executed, it is not possible to shift to the special gaming state.

The special gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which it is easier to win a small winning combination and to easily obtain a medal than in the normal gaming state and the special winning combination internal winning state. However, as described above, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state, and only 2 medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state.

FIG. 73A shows the gaming states described above, and the reference numerals (A) to (F) attached to the arrows are the transition conditions between the gaming states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow. The transition from the normal gaming state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (A) to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) is performed by internally winning the special winning combination 1, and the normal gaming state indicated by the arrow (D). The transition from (RT0) to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) is performed by internally winning the special role 2. In the normal gaming state (RT0), the internal winning probability of the special role 2 is higher than the internal winning probability of the special role 1, and the internal winning probability of the special role 2 is a considerably high probability. Reference numeral 100 is a gaming table in which the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) is likely to be the longest. The transition from the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) to the BB1 operating state (RT3) indicated by the arrow (B) is performed by winning the special combination 1. As mentioned above, in order to win the special role 1, it is necessary to hang three cards. The transition from the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) to the BB2 operating state (RT4) indicated by the arrow (E) is performed by winning the special role 2. As mentioned above, in order to win the special role 2, it is necessary to win the special role 2 after playing two cards and internally winning the loss. The transition from the BB1 operating state (RT3) to the normal gaming state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (C) is performed by paying out 48 medals as a predetermined number. Further, the transition from the BB2 operating state (RT4) to the normal gaming state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (F) is performed by paying out two medals as a predetermined number of medals.

<Type of production state>
Next, the types of the effect state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 and the transition of the effect state will be described. As described above, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 is a game console in which the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state is likely to be the longest, and the transition of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state will be described. It should be noted that the transition of the production state in other gaming states is the same as the transition described here. FIG. 73B is a transition diagram of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the effect states are a non-AT state, a confrontation precursor state, a confrontation state, a pseudo BB state, an AT (assist time) state, and a CZ (chance zone). ) It is configured so that a total of 6 production states can be switched. FIG. 73 (b) shows these effect states, and the reference numerals (a) to (i) attached to the arrows are the transition conditions between the effect states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the effect state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display screen displayed on the effect image display device 157 in each effect state.

The non-AT state is a normal effect state and is also an initial state in the effect state. On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (a), an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle is displayed, corresponding to the non-AT state. Further, a character display area 1571 is provided on the left side of the display screen, and an effect information display area 1572 is also provided below the character display area 1571. In FIG. 74 (a), one face image tp of the character of the lord is displayed in the character display area 1571. The character of the lord is the default character that is always displayed while the character display area 1571 is displayed. Further, in the effect information display area 1572, the point number display PN and the lap count display LN are displayed. In FIG. 74A, the point number display PN is the initial value of 000 points, and the lap count display LN is also the initial value of the 0th lap. The point number display PN representing the initial value may be "----" instead of "000", or may be hidden. Further, the lap count display LN representing the initial value may be "-" instead of "0", or may be hidden. The display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (a) is the display screen before the point increase, and is also the display screen after the setting change, which will be described in detail later, and also the display screen after the power is cut off and restored. There is also a display screen after the end of the CZ state when the state does not shift to the pseudo BB state or the AT state. The point number display PN representing the initial value is the display screen after the setting change, the display screen after the power interruption and recovery, and the display screen after the end of the CZ state when the pseudo BB state or the AT state is not changed. It may be the same for each, or it may be different. For example, the display screen after the setting change and the display screen after the power failure / recovery are "----", and the pseudo BB state or AT state is not changed. The display screen after the end of the CZ state in the case may be set to "000".

The display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (a') also displays an animation corresponding to the non-AT state, the point number display PN is 001 points, and the lap count display LN is also the first lap. be. The display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (a') becomes the display screen after the points are increased.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a first P counter that counts the effects. The "directing" here may be a privilege, and more specifically, a directing point. The count value of the first P counter is displayed on the point number display PN. However, a value different from the count value of the first P counter may be displayed on the point number display PN. The point number display PN is a numerical display, but it is a bar display in which the bar expands and contracts, a display in which the color changes, and a display in which the number of displays such as symbols changes according to the count value of the first P counter. You may. Alternatively, the point number display PN may be a display showing the count value by the size, a display showing the count value by the shape, or a display showing the count value by shading. In addition to the point number display PN, a display showing the quantity of the point number display PN may be displayed, or an icon such as a character may be displayed to move according to the increase in points, which is a specific target. An icon such as a character may be displayed at a point so that an event or effect may occur when the icon such as a character moves and reaches as the number of points increases, and a character corresponding to a specific point to be a plurality of targets may be generated. Etc. may be displayed.

The transition from the non-AT state to the confrontation precursor state indicated by the arrow (a) is performed when the count value of the first P counter reaches the number of true confrontation points, and as a predetermined number of games (ceiling games). It may be done by digesting 499 games, or it may be done by winning an AT lottery according to the role. The number of true confrontation points is a value set by lottery together with the number of false confrontation points described later, and if the number of true confrontation points is smaller than the number of false confrontation points, the count value of the first P counter is a false confrontation. You will reach the number of true confrontation points before you reach the number of points. When the number of true confrontation points is reached, it is not known whether the state can be changed to the pseudo BB state or the AT state, but if the AT lottery is won, the state will be changed to the AT state in the end. In addition, when the number of ceiling games is exhausted, the state will always shift to the pseudo BB1 state.

On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (b), an animation in which the lord holds a sword corresponding to the confrontation precursor state is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen, a character display of "confrontation precursor effect" indicating that the effect is in the confrontation precursor state is made. In the confrontation precursor state, both the character display area 1571 and the effect information display area 1572 below it are hidden. Therefore, the face image of the character of the lord, which is the default character, the point number display PN, and the lap count display LN are all hidden.

The transition from the confrontation precursor state to the confrontation state indicated by the arrow (b) is performed by digesting a predetermined number of games by lottery between 2 games and 32 games.

Further, the transition from the non-AT state to the confrontation state indicated by the arrow (f) is performed when the count value of the first P counter reaches the number of false confrontation points. If the number of false confrontation points is smaller than the number of true confrontation points described above, the number of false confrontation points will be reached before the count value of the first P counter reaches the number of true confrontation points.

On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (c'), the confrontation scene of the confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman of the villain face each other corresponding to the confrontation state is displayed. There is. Further, in the upper right of the display screen, the characters of "confrontation effect" indicating that the effect is in the confrontation state are displayed. In the confrontation state, the count value of the 1st P counter reaches the number of true confrontation points, the true confrontation state started via the confrontation precursor state, and the count value of the 1st P counter reaches the number of false confrontation points. There is a false confrontation state that is started without going through the confrontation precursor state. FIG. 74 (c) is a start screen of the effect (true confrontation effect) in the true confrontation state, and on this start screen, the character display area 1571 and the character display area 1571 are the same as the display screen of the confrontation precursor effect shown in FIG. 74 (b). Both of the effect information display areas 1572 below it are hidden. On the other hand, FIG. 74 (c') is a start screen of the effect (false confrontation effect) in the false confrontation state. In this start screen, the character display area 1571 is not displayed, but the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. Here, it is displayed that the point number display PN is 056 points and the lap count display LN is the first lap. The player can distinguish whether it is a true confrontation effect or a false confrontation effect depending on whether or not the confrontation precursor effect is displayed, but if he overlooks whether or not the confrontation precursor effect is displayed, the confrontation It is not possible to distinguish between a true confrontation production and a false confrontation production only by the animation in the production. However, the two can be distinguished by the presence or absence of the display of the effect information display area 1572. Further, on the start screen in the true confrontation effect, the effect information display area 1572 is hidden, so that the confrontation scene of the confrontation animation attracts attention and the confrontation scene becomes easy to see. The character display area 1571 may also be displayed on the start screen of the false confrontation effect. Further, if it is only to distinguish between the true confrontation effect and the false confrontation effect, the type of animation may be different between the true confrontation effect and the false confrontation effect, and the character display area 1571 and the effect information display area 1572 may be different. The presence or absence of display may be unified.

In addition, in the confrontation precursor state or confrontation state, the number of ceiling games may be reached, the number of true confrontation points may be reached, or the number of false confrontation points may be reached. When is defeated, the confrontation starts again.

The transition from the confrontation state to the pseudo BB state indicated by the arrow (c) is after the number of games predetermined by lottery has been exhausted between the two games and the four games, and then the replay combination shown in FIG. 72 (a). This is performed by stopping and displaying the symbol combination of 2 or the symbol combination of the replaying combination 3.

Further, the transition from the confrontation state to the AT state indicated by the arrow (d) is predetermined by a lottery between 2 games and 4 games when the AT direct hit lottery is won or the AT lottery has already been won. It is performed when the number of games played is exhausted. The state in which the AT lottery has already been won means the state in which the AT lottery according to the winning combination, which triggered the transition from the non-AT state to the confrontation precursor state, has been won. In the AT state, the operation condition notification effect suggesting the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is executed so as to bring about an advantageous result for the player according to the winning combination. Specifically, when the AT combination (conditional device numbers 6 to 11 in FIG. 72 (b)) is internally won, the operation order of each correct answer is notified. Further, when the AT state is set, the number of games (the number of AT games (the number of navigations)) in which the operation condition notification effect is performed may be added by lottery.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (d) and the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (d') are also effect image display devices 157 in the confrontation state, and are the effect image display devices shown in FIG. 74 (d). On the display screen of 157, the scene in which the lord wins is displayed as the winning / losing scene following the confrontation scene. The scene in which this lord wins may be displayed as the ending of the true confrontation production (the ending scene of the confrontation animation). Further, even when the AT direct hit lottery is won during the fake confrontation production, the scene in which the lord wins may be displayed as the winning / losing scene following the confrontation scene shown in FIG. 74 (c'). In the scene where the lord wins, the character display area 1571 is hidden, but the effect information display area 1572 is displayed, and the point number display PN is 056 points and the lap count display LN is the first lap. Is displayed. When shifting from the confrontation state to the pseudo BB state or AT state, the scene in which the lord won is displayed in the effect information display area 1572, and the pseudo BB effect or AT effect starts before the next game starts. Will be done.

On the other hand, on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (d'), a scene in which the lord is defeated is displayed as a winning / losing scene following the confrontation scene. The scene in which this lord is defeated may also be displayed as the ending of the true confrontation production, or may be displayed as the ending of the false confrontation production. In the scene where the lord is defeated, neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed.

The transition from the confrontation state to the non-AT state indicated by the arrow (e) is performed after the scene in which the lord is defeated is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. That is, when the number of true confrontation points is reached and the state shifts from the non-AT state to the true confrontation state via the confrontation precursor state, the pseudo BB lottery described later is lost, and the lottery is set in advance between 2 games and 4 games. If the AT direct hit lottery is not won while the number of games played is exhausted, the scene in which the lord is defeated is displayed and the game shifts to the non-AT state.

Further, the transition from the non-AT state to the AT state indicated by the other arrow (d) is performed when the AT direct hit lottery is won.

On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (e), an animation in which the lord is raised is displayed corresponding to the pseudo BB state. Further, in the lower right of the display screen, the number of medals acquired in the pseudo BB state is displayed. However, in the pseudo BB state, neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. Even in the pseudo BB state, the operation condition notification effect is executed as in the AT state. However, unlike the AT state, the number of AT games (number of navigations) is not added. The operation order of "2 3 1" is notified on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (e), the first stop is performed by the right stop button 139, and the second stop is performed by the left stop button 137. The correct operation order is to perform the third stop with the middle stop button 138.

On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (f), an animation corresponding to the AT state is displayed in which the lord is watching cherry blossoms with the castle in the background. In addition, the cumulative number of medals earned since the start of the AT state is displayed in the lower right of the display screen, and the total number of AT games digested (total 5G (game)) and the remaining AT games are displayed in the lower left. The number (remaining 5G) is displayed. However, even in the AT state, neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. Further, on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (f), the operation condition notification effect is executed, the operation order of "1 3 2" is displayed, and the first stop is performed by pressing the left stop button 137. The correct operation order is to perform the second stop with the right stop button 139 and the third stop with the middle stop button 138.

The transition from the pseudo BB state to the CZ state indicated by the arrow (g) is performed by digesting 20 games in the pseudo bonus 1 state and by digesting 15 games in the pseudo bonus 2 state. That is, the pseudo-bonus 1 state is limited to 20 games, and the pseudo-bonus 2 state is limited to 15 games. The pseudo-bonus 1 state is more advantageous for the player than the pseudo-bonus 2 state because the number of games is larger. Further, the transition from the AT state to the CZ state indicated by the arrow (h) is performed by digesting all the assigned AT game numbers (navigation times). As mentioned above, when the AT state is set, the number of AT games (number of navigations) may be added, and it may be longer than 20 games in the pseudo bonus 1 state, so the AT state is pseudo. It may be said that the state is more advantageous to the player than the bonus 1 state.

Although the example in which the number of digested games is a condition for the transition from the pseudo BB state to the CZ state has been described, the number of medals to be paid out may be a condition. For example, the pseudo-bonus 1 state may be maintained until 200 medals are paid out, and the pseudo-bonus 1 state may be maintained until 150 medals are paid out. Further, when either the number of digested games or the number of medals paid out exceeds the condition value, the state may be changed to the CZ state.

On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 74 (g), an animation of the lord running in the wilderness corresponding to the CZ state is displayed. Further, in the lower right of the display screen, the number of remaining games until the transition to the non-AT state is displayed, but neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed.

The transition from the CZ state to the non-AT state indicated by the arrow (i) is performed by digesting 32 games in the CZ state. That is, the CZ state is limited to 32 games. During the 32 games, when the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 shown in FIG. 72 (a) or the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 is stopped and displayed, the upward arrow (c) indicates from the CZ state. It returns to the pseudo BB state. Further, if the AT lottery corresponding to the number of games in the CZ state is won during the 32 games in which the CZ state is maintained, the game returns from the CZ state to the AT state as indicated by the upward arrow (d).

In the transition diagram of the effect state shown in FIG. 73 (b), the transition from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state is not set, but the pseudo BB direct hit lottery is executed every game, and the pseudo BB direct hit lottery is won. Then, when the pseudo BB symbol (the symbol of the replaying combination 2 or the replaying combination 3) is stopped and displayed, the transition from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state may be performed. Further, the pseudo BB direct hit lottery may be executed only when a specific combination (for example, a chance eye) is internally won.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a transition pattern of the effect state in the special role 2 internal winning state.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (a), first, the non-AT state is changed to the confrontation state. The confrontation state is a false confrontation state because it does not go through the confrontation precursor state. In this confrontation state, the scene in which the lord is defeated as shown in FIG. 74 (d') is displayed, and the state returns to the non-AT state.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (b), the non-AT state shifts to the confrontation state via the confrontation precursor state. The confrontation state is a true confrontation state because it goes through the confrontation precursor state. However, even in this confrontation state, the scene in which the lord is defeated as shown in FIG. 74 (d') is displayed, and the state returns to the non-AT state.

Even in the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (c), the non-AT state shifts to the confrontation state (true confrontation state) via the confrontation precursor state. During this confrontation state, the pseudo BB symbol (the symbol of the re-game combination 2 or the re-game combination 3) is stopped and displayed, and after the display of the scene in which the lord won in FIG. 74 (d) is displayed, the pseudo BB state is further shifted to. do. Eventually, it shifts from the pseudo BB state to the CZ state, and returns to the non-AT state without returning to the pseudo BB state and without shifting to the AT state.

Even in the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (d), when the non-AT state shifts to the confrontation state (true confrontation state) via the confrontation precursor state and the predetermined number of games out of 2 games to 4 games is exhausted, FIG. 74 The scene in which the lord shown in (d) wins is displayed, and the game further shifts to the AT state. Eventually, it shifts from the AT state to the CZ state, and returns to the non-AT state without returning to the AT state and without shifting to the pseudo BB state.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (e), the non-AT state shifts to the confrontation state (false confrontation state) without going through the confrontation precursor state, but during this confrontation state, by winning the AT direct hit lottery, FIG. The scene in which the lord won by 74 (d) is displayed, and the state further shifts to the AT state. Eventually, it shifts from the AT state to the CZ state, and returns to the non-AT state without returning to the AT state and without shifting to the pseudo BB state.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (f), the non-AT state shifts to the confrontation state (true confrontation state) via the confrontation precursor state. In this confrontation state, the scene in which the lord won as shown in FIG. 74 (d) is displayed, and the state shifts to the pseudo BB state. Eventually, the pseudo BB state shifts to the CZ state, and by winning the AT lottery according to the number of games in the CZ state, the state further shifts to the AT state. Eventually, the number of AT games (number of navigations) is exhausted, and the state shifts from the AT state to the CZ state again. In the second CZ state, the pseudo BB symbol (the symbol of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3) is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo BB state is resumed. Eventually, the pseudo BB state shifts to the third CZ state, and in the third CZ state, the AT lottery according to the number of games in the CZ state is won again, and the state shifts to the AT state again. Eventually, the number of AT games (number of navigations) is exhausted, and the state shifts from the AT state to the fourth CZ state. In the fourth CZ state, the state returns to the non-AT state without returning to the AT state and without shifting to the pseudo BB state. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 is more likely to perform a pseudo BB state or an AT state a plurality of times as in the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (f), rather than acquiring a medal in the BB1 operating state or the BB2 operating state. , Easy to get a lot of medals.

<Outline of processing>
Hereinafter, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 76 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, the setting change process is performed in step S10. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. Subsequently, in step S11, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interruption prohibition setting, the I / O 310 initial setting, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the operation permission to the WDT 314, and the operation permission to the WDT 314. Set the initial value, etc.

In step S12, the game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if a medal has been inserted, preparation for transmission of an insertion command indicating this is performed. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start the game.

In step S13, various lottery processes including an internal winner lottery process and the like are executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

In step S14, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S15, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer update process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set in the game interval timer. Further, at the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, preparations are made for transmitting a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 s in this example) and suppresses gambling.

In step S16, the reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time the stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, the reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, the reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) to the first sub-control unit 400 for each stop operation, and each time the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S17.

In step S17, the winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "cherry-ANY-ANY" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the small winning combination 3 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S18, if any winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the number of medals given is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S19, the state update process is executed. The details of this state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S12 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process of the main control unit is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (in this example) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Then, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. The state of the optical sensor is confirmed by this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, the timer update process is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in each time unit, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211 the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main process of the main control unit 300, the timer interrupt process, and the like are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (basic command, input command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, production command associated with effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, operation of stop buttons 137 to 139 1st to 3rd press commands, 1st to 3rd stop commands for stopping reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number command and payout end command for medal payout processing, status update command), bits 0 to 10 Is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S213, the external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is received (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is not received (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, the timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information (main control information and game information) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that the power failure processing has been performed is set to ON. The game information includes the count values of various counters (for example, the first P counter) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process in the main control unit main process.

In the setting change process (step S10), step S101 for determining whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied is executed. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, when the front door 102 is opened, a setting change switch (not shown) can be operated. This setting change switch is a switch for changing the setting related to the player's advantage such as the winning combination probability in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6. The setting change condition referred to here is a condition that at least includes that this setting change switch is operated and the setting value that has been set so far is changed to a new setting value. In addition to this, the start lever 135 is used. It may include that a specific operation such as being operated has been performed. If the setting change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S102, and if the setting change condition is not satisfied, the setting change process ends.

As described above, the setting change process shown in FIG. 78 is the process that is executed first when the power is turned on, and in step S102, the main process is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when the power is turned off before the power is turned on. Initialize the control information. Specifically, the stack pointer is initialized and the interrupt is initialized. Next, the game information saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is partially restored (step S103). Specifically, the information related to the special game state and the information related to RT are returned as they are (the state at the time of power failure is maintained without clearing or changing each information), and the small role / replay role. Information about and information about internally won wins are initialized and cleared (flags are turned off). Further, the count value of the first P counter included in the game information is cleared, and the count value becomes 0. In addition to clearing the count value of the 1st P counter to make it 0, a specific value different from 0 may be used, and a value selected by lottery or selected in a predetermined order from two or more types of values. It may be a value.

Further, in the setting change process, the count value of the first P counter is cleared and the count value becomes 0, but when the power is restored without performing the setting change process after the power is cut off (immediate power recovery after the power is cut off). In this case, the count value of the 1st P counter is not cleared and the count value included in the game information is not cleared. Return as it is.

After the partial return of the game information, the set value set at the time of setting change is stored in the set value information storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 as the set value after the setting change (step S104). Next, a setting change command indicating that the setting has been changed is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S105), and the information after the setting change (main control information and game information) is also transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. (Step S106), and this setting change process ends.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the flow of various lottery processes in the main process of the main control unit.

First, in step S131, which is executed first, an internal winning combination lottery is executed. In this process, the lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state and RT, and the internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this and the random number value acquired from the random number generation circuit 316. To determine the internal winners. For example, in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state and the RT2 state, the lottery table for the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 72 (b) is read out. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of that combination is turned on.

In step S132, the character addition / erasure process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

In step S133, the point setting process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In step S134, the point increase erasing process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 (a).

In step S135, the AT lottery process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

In step S136, preparation for transmission of the internal winning command is executed, and the various lottery processes are terminated. The internal winning command includes information that can specify the internal winning combination, the current production state, the number of AT games, the AT lottery, and the result of the AT addition lottery. Of the above information, the information regarding the number of AT games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, but may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Further, in the AT state or the pseudo BB state, the operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is given to the internal winning command of the internal winning combination (condition devices 6 to 11 shown in FIG. 72 (b)) including the small winning combination 5. The operation instruction information indicating the operation order of the correct answer of) is also included.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the flow of the character addition / erasure process in various lottery processes.

The character addition / erasure process (step S132) is a process relating to the character displayed in the character display area 1571 shown in FIG. 74. As characters, in addition to the default character, Tonosama, a grandfather character, a princess character, and a shinobi character are prepared.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a stay counter and an additional flag for each character other than the default character, Tonosama.

In the character addition / erasing process (step S132), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the grandfather stay counter is larger than 0 (step S132a), and if it is larger, the value of the grandfather stay counter is subtracted by 1 (step S132b), and the step. Proceed to S132g. On the other hand, if the value of the grandfather stay counter is 0 or less, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination is a weak cherry (small winning combination 2) (step S132c), and if it is a weak cherry, the grandfather character is additionally displayed. The lottery process (step S132d) to be performed is executed. In the lottery process here, there is a 30% probability that the grandfather's character will be added. In addition, another role may be used instead of the weak cherry (small role 2). In the grandfather stay counter setting process in step S132e following step S132d, when adding a grandfather character, the grandfather addition flag is set to ON, and the grandfather stay counter is set to a value of 1 or 2 determined by lottery. However, if the grandfather character is not added, the grandfather addition flag is left set to off, and the process proceeds to step S132g. If the internal winning combination is other than the weak cherry (small combination 2), the grandfather elimination lottery process (step S132f) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S132g. In the grandfather erasure lottery process, there is a 50% chance that the grandfather character will be erased. Once the grandfather character is displayed, it will not be erased until it wins the erase in this grandfather erasure lottery process. However, as in the display screens of FIGS. 74 (b) to 74 (g), (c'), and (d'), the character display area 1571 itself may not be visible because it is hidden. be. If you win to erase the grandfather's character, the grandfather addition flag is set to off.

In step S132g, it is determined whether or not the value of the princess stay counter is larger than 0, and if it is larger, the value of the princess stay counter is subtracted by 1 (step S132h), and the process proceeds to step S132m. On the other hand, if the value of the princess stay counter is 0 or less, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination is a weak cherry (small role 2) (step S132i), and if it is a weak cherry, the princess character is additionally displayed. The lottery process (step S132j) to be performed is executed. Even in the lottery process here, there is a 30% chance that the princess character will be added. In addition, another role may be used instead of the weak cherry (small role 2). The winning probability of the lottery for adding the princess character may be lower or higher than the winning probability of the lottery for adding the grandfather character. In the princess stay counter setting process in step S132k following step S132j, when adding a princess character, the princess addition flag is set to ON, and the princess stay counter is set to a value of 1 or 2 determined by lottery. If the princess character is not added, the princess addition flag is left set to off, and the process proceeds to step S132m. The value set in the princess stay counter may be smaller or larger than the value set in the grandfather stay counter in step S132e. If the internal winning combination is other than the weak cherry (small combination 2), the princess elimination lottery process (step S132l) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S132m. Even in the princess erasure lottery process, there is a 50% chance that the princess character will be erased. The winning probability of the lottery for erasing the princess character may be lower or higher than the winning probability of the lottery for erasing the grandfather's character. Once the princess character is displayed, it will not be erased until it wins the erasure in this princess erasure lottery process. However, as in the display screens of FIGS. 74 (b) to 74 (g), (c'), and (d'), the character display area 1571 itself may not be visible because it is hidden. be. If you win to erase the princess character, the princess addition flag is set to off.

In step S132m, it is determined whether or not the value of the shinobi stay counter is larger than 0, and if it is larger, the value of the shinobi stay counter is subtracted by 1 (step S132n), and the process proceeds to step S132s. On the other hand, if the value of the Shinobi stay counter is 0 or less, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination is a watermelon (small combination 1) unlike the previous two characters (step S132o). In addition, instead of the watermelon (small role 1), a weak cherry (small role 2) may be used, or another role may be used. If the internal winner is a watermelon, a lottery process (step S132p) for additionally displaying a Shinobi character is executed. In the lottery process here, unlike the winning probability of the previous two characters, the result is that a shinobi character is added with a probability of 15%. The winning probability of the lottery to add the Shinobi character may be the same as the winning probability of the lottery to add the grandfather character, or may be higher, and is the same as the winning probability of the lottery to add the princess character. It may be expensive or it may be expensive. In the shinobi stay counter setting process in step S132q following step S132p, when adding a shinobi character, the shinobi addition flag is set to on, and the shinobi stay counter is set to a value of 1 or 2 determined by lottery. If the Shinobi character is not added, the Shinobi addition flag is left set to off, and the process proceeds to step S132s. The value set in the shinobi stay counter may be smaller or larger than the value set in the grandfather stay counter in step S132e or the value set in the princess stay counter in step S132k. If the internal winning combination is other than watermelon (small combination 1), the shinobi elimination lottery process (step S132r) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S132s. Even in the Shinobi erasure lottery process, there is a 50% chance that the Shinobi character will be erased. The winning probability of the lottery to erase the Shinobi character may be lower or higher than the winning probability of the lottery to erase the old man character, or may be higher than the winning probability of the lottery to erase the princess character. It may be low. Once the Shinobi character is displayed, it will not be erased until it wins the erase in this Shinobi erasure lottery process. However, as in the display screens of FIGS. 74 (b) to 74 (g), (c'), and (d'), the character display area 1571 itself may not be visible because it is hidden. be. If you win to erase the Shinobi character, the Shinobi addition flag is set to off.

In step S132s, preparations are made for transmitting a character addition / erasure command indicating additional display or erasure of each character to the first sub-control unit 400, and this character addition / erasure process is terminated. The character addition / erasure command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S211) shown in FIG. 77. The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the transmitted character addition / erasure command. As a result, each character is additionally displayed in the character display area 1571 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, or is erased from the character display area 1571.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the flow of the point setting process in the various lottery processes, and FIG. 82 is a diagram showing various lottery tables used in the point setting process. The various lottery tables shown in FIG. 82 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

The point setting process (step S133) is a setting process relating to points counted by the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. That is, the setting process is performed for the points of the point number display PN displayed in the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 74.

In the point setting process (step S133), first, it is determined whether or not the point setting condition is satisfied (step S133a). The point setting condition here is the first game after the setting change condition in step S101 shown in FIG. 78 is satisfied and the setting is changed, or the CZ state indicated by the arrow (i) in FIG. 73 (b). It is the first game after the end of the game and it becomes a non-AT state, or it is the pattern shown in FIG. 75 (b). The condition is satisfied if it is the first game after (displayed), or if it is the first game after the loss in these first games. In the first game after the setting is changed and in the first game after the CZ state ends and the non-AT state ends, the point number display PN in the effect information display area 1572 is 000 points, and the lap The number of times display LN is also the 0th lap. If the point setting condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S133b, and if the point setting condition is not satisfied, the point setting process ends.

In step S133b, the point mode setting process is performed. In the point mode setting process, the normal point mode or the chance point mode is set with the probability of each setting. Here, the point setting table shown in FIG. 82 (a) is used. In the point setting table shown in FIG. 82 (a), the probability of setting the chance point mode is only 20% in the setting 1 where the player has the lowest degree of advantage, but the probability of setting the chance point mode increases as the set value increases. In setting 6, where the player has a relatively highest degree of advantage, the probability of setting the chance point mode increases to 50%, and the probability of setting the chance point mode is halved.

The chance point mode is more likely to have a lower number of true confrontation points than the normal point mode. As explained with reference to FIG. 73 (b), the number of true confrontation points is one of the transition conditions from the non-AT state to the confrontation precursor state, and the lower the set number of true confrontation points, the more the false confrontation state. It will be easier to move to a true confrontation state. Further, as will be described later, the chance point mode is easier to win the pseudo BB lottery than the normal point mode. Furthermore, since the number of laps is added by 1 when the true confrontation is defeated, when the number of true confrontation points is low, the number of laps is quick and it is easy to accumulate. As will be described later, in the chance point mode, if the number of laps is 5 or more, there is a 100% chance that the true confrontation will be won. Leads to. From the above, the chance point mode is more advantageous for the player than the normal point mode.

In step S133c following step S133b, the point zone setting process is performed. In the point zone setting process, a point zone for the number of true confrontation points at which the confrontation precursor effect is started and a point zone for the number of false confrontation points at which the fake confrontation effect is started are set with a lottery probability according to the point mode. The point zone is a count value counted by the first P counter, that is, a cumulative value of points divided by a certain range, and here, the point zone setting table shown in FIG. 82 (b) is used. For example, in the case of normal point pods, neither the number of true confrontation points nor the number of false confrontation points is set in the point zone of 1 or more and 50 or less, but in the chance point mode, the point zone of 1 or more and 50 or less. If the number of true confrontation points is 80%, and if the number of false confrontation points is 95%. In this point zone setting table, only one point zone is set in the range of 0 or more and 500 or less, and the confrontation effect is performed only once, but multiple point zones are set. , The confrontation effect may be performed multiple times.

In step S133d following step S133c, the point ceiling setting process is performed. In the point ceiling setting process, the number of true confrontation points is determined from the point zone where the number of true confrontation points is generated, and the number of false confrontation points is determined from the point zone where the number of false confrontation points is generated, which is set in the point zone setting process. do. For example, in the normal point mode, when a point zone of 101 or more and 150 or less is set for the number of true confrontation points, which point among 101 or more and 150 or less is set as the number of true confrontation points, that is, from which point. Whether to start the confrontation precursor production is decided by lottery with equal probability, and if a point zone of 201 or more and 250 or less is set for the number of false confrontation points, which point of 201 or more and 250 or less is false. The number of confrontation points, that is, from which point the fake confrontation effect is started, is determined by a lottery with the same probability.

In step S133e following step S133d, the true confrontation result setting process is performed. In the true confrontation result setting process, a pseudo BB lottery is performed. That is, whether or not the result of the true confrontation is a victory is drawn by lottery, and in the case of victory, the pseudo BB1 schedule flag or the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is set to ON. In the pseudo BB1 state, with the pseudo BB1 schedule flag set to ON, the replay combination of the condition device number 1 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is internally elected, and the symbol of the replay combination 2 is stopped and displayed. In the pseudo BB2 state, with the pseudo BB2 schedule flag set to ON, the player is internally elected to the replay combination of the condition device number 1 also shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the replay combination is selected. The transition is made when the symbol of 3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the true confrontation result setting table shown in FIG. 82 (c) is used. In the true confrontation result setting table shown in FIG. 82 (c), the lottery probability is determined separately for each setting in the normal point mode and the chance point mode. In addition, the lottery probability may differ depending on the number of laps (point laps). For example, in the chance point mode, after 5 laps, there is a 100% chance of winning the true confrontation. Further, if the result of the true confrontation is won, a lottery is separately performed to set the pseudo BB1 schedule flag to on or the pseudo BB2 schedule flag to be turned on. If the number of laps is defeated in a true confrontation, 1 will be added and the number of points will return to 0. Also, in a false confrontation, you will not win the confrontation unless you win the AT direct hit lottery.

FIG. 83A is a flowchart showing the flow of point increase erasure processing in various lottery processes, and FIG. 83B is a diagram showing a point increase setting table prepared in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

The point increase erasing process (step S134) is a process for increasing the points counted by the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. That is, the process is related to the increase of the points of the point number display PN displayed in the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 74.

In the point increase erasing process (step S134), first, it is determined whether or not the point increase condition is satisfied (step S134a). The point increase condition here is limited to the current effect state being one of the non-AT state, the confrontation precursor state, and the confrontation state shown in FIG. 73 (b). However, even in the non-AT state, when the value of the first P counter is 0 and the value of the first lap counter (details will be described later) is also 0, the point increase condition is not satisfied when the lost symbol is stopped. That is, when the player returns to the non-AT state, the number of laps and the number of points become 0, and the points are not increased until the player wins a role other than the loss after returning to the non-AT state. Further, even in the pseudo BB state, the AT state, and the CZ state in which the privilege is given, the points are not increased. As the privilege referred to here, for example, an operation condition notification effect can be mentioned. It is a privilege that the operation condition notification effect can be executed even if it is not actually executed. If the point increase condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S134b, and if the point increase condition is not satisfied, the point increase elimination process ends.

The point increase condition may be unsuccessful for one or more roles other than loss, or may be unsuccessful for one or more roles other than loss instead of loss. Furthermore, it may be unsuccessful in any of a plurality of lost roles.

In step S134b, the point increase setting process corresponding to each character is performed. Here, the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b) is used. In the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b), the number of points awarded for each winning combination is determined for each of the lord's character (character A), the grandfather's character (character B), and the princess's character (character C). There is. In the table in FIG. 83 (b), "replay" is any of the replay combinations 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 72 (a), and "bell" is a small combination shown in FIG. 72 (a). It is 5 or a small role 6 (the same applies to the following explanation). At least 1 point will be awarded for any character. Also, when the Shinobi character (Character D) is displayed, the points given to other displayed characters are doubled. In the point increase setting process, the value of the first P counter is added.

In step S134c following step S134b, preparations are made to send a point increase command for each character including the point value of the increase determined in the previous point increase setting process to the first sub-control unit 400, and this point increase is performed. The erasing process ends. That is, the point increase command does not include the count value (cumulative value) after the increase in the first P counter, but includes the value (increase amount) of the increased points. Further, since it is character-specific, the point increase amount for each character is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

The point increase display in the point number display PN displayed in the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 74 is performed between the time when the winning combination is determined and the time when the next game is started.

However, in this step S134c, when the lost symbol is stopped after the power failure / recovery is performed, the preparation for transmitting the point increase command for each character to the first sub-control unit 400 is not performed. Therefore, when the power is cut off and restored, the point increase command for each character is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 until a winning combination other than the loss is won, and the point number display PN in the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. It remains a value representing 0 and is not displayed as an increase.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT lottery process in the various lottery processes, and FIG. 85 is a diagram showing various lottery tables used in the AT lottery process. The various lottery tables shown in FIG. 85 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the AT lottery process (step S135), first, it is determined whether or not the specific combination has been internally won (step S135a). The specific roles here are the weak cherry of the small role 2, the watermelon of the small role 1, the strong cherry of the small role 3, and the chance of the small role 4. If the specific combination has not been internally elected, the process proceeds to step S135c, and if the specific combination has been internally elected, the AT lottery process according to the specific combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (a) (step S135b). ). With strong cherries and chances, there is a 100% chance that you will win the AT lottery. Further, when the AT lottery is won, the lottery for the number of AT games (number of navigations) is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (b).

In step S135c, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery has been won, and if it has been won, the process proceeds to step S135g. If not, in step S135d, whether the effect state is the CZ state. Judge whether or not. If the effect state is the CZ state, in step S135e, the AT lottery process according to the number of games in the CZ state is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (c), and the process proceeds to step S135g. In the AT lottery here, the winning probability of the third game and the thirtieth game is the highest. Further, when the AT lottery is won, the lottery for the number of AT games (number of navigations) is also performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (b). In the AT lottery process in the CZ state, the number of AT games may be set to a predetermined number.

If the effect state is not the CZ state, in step S135f, the AT direct hit lottery process is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (d), and the process proceeds to step S135g. In the AT direct hit lottery process, the lottery process is executed for each game. In the AT direct hit lottery process, the winning probability differs depending on the setting, and setting 6 is the easiest to win, but setting 2 has a higher winning probability than setting 3, and setting 4 wins more than setting 5. The probability is high. However, the winning probability may increase as the set value increases. Further, when the AT direct hit lottery is won, the lottery for the number of AT games (number of navigations) is also performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (b). In the AT direct hit lottery process, the number of AT games may be set to a predetermined number. Further, the AT direct hit lottery may not be executed every game, but may be executed only when a specific role (for example, a chance eye) is internally won.

In step S135g, the flag corresponding to the winning lottery result is set to on. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with two types, an AT schedule flag and an AT direct hit flag. If the AT lottery process according to the specific combination in step S135b and the AT lottery process according to the number of games in the CZ state of step S135e are won, the AT schedule flag is set to ON and the AT direct hit lottery process in step S135f. If you win, set the AT direct hit flag to on.

In step S135h following step S135g, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state. If the effect state is not the AT state, this AT lottery process ends. On the other hand, if the effect state is the AT state, in step S135i, the AT addition lottery process according to the winning combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (e). Even in the AT addition lottery process, the roles are limited to the weak cherry of the small role 2, the watermelon of the small role 1, the strong cherry of the small role 3, and the chance of the small role 4. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (e), the winning probability is determined for each winning combination, and when winning, the number of AT games to be added is determined by lottery. The number of additional games here is determined from 3 games, 5 games, 10 games, 20 games, and 30 games. When the AT addition lottery process is performed, this AT lottery process ends.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of the state update process in the main control unit main process.

First, in step S19a, which is executed first, RT is updated. As described above, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, the RT and the game state have a one-to-one relationship. Therefore, when the RT is updated, the game state is also updated.

In the following step S19b, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the non-AT state, and if it is not the non-AT state, the process proceeds to step S19c, and if it is the non-AT state, the process proceeds to step S191. In step S191, the non-AT state process is executed, and this state update process ends. Details of the non-AT state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

In step S19c, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation precursor state, and if it is not the confrontation precursor state, the process proceeds to step S19d, and if it is the confrontation precursor state, the process proceeds to step S192. In step S192, the confrontation precursor state process is executed, and this state update process ends. The details of the confrontation precursor state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

In step S19d, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state, and if it is not the confrontation state, the process proceeds to step S19e, and if it is the confrontation state, the process proceeds to step S193. In step S193, the confrontation state process is executed, and this state update process ends. The details of the confrontation state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

In step S19e, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pseudo BB state, and if it is not the pseudo BB state, the process proceeds to step S19f, and if it is the pseudo BB state, the process proceeds to step S194. In step S194, a pseudo BB state process is executed, and this state update process ends. The details of the pseudo BB state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 (a).

In step S19f, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state, and if it is not the AT state, the process proceeds to step S196, and if it is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S195. In step S195, the AT state process is executed, and this state update process ends. The details of the AT state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 (b).

In step S196, the CZ state process is executed, and this state update process ends. The details of the CZ state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

FIG. 87 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the non-AT state process in the state update process.

In the non-AT state processing (step S191), first, it is determined whether or not the AT direct hit flag is set to ON (step S1911). If the AT direct hit flag is set to on, the effect state is set to the AT state (step S1912), and the AT direct hit flag is set to off (step S1913). Next, preparations are made to transmit the first P counter value command including the count value of the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and this non-AT state processing ends.

On the other hand, if the AT direct hit flag is not set to ON, the G number ceiling determination process is executed (step S1915), and then the point ceiling determination process (step S1916) is executed, and this non-AT state process ends. Become.

FIG. 87B is a flowchart showing the flow of the G number ceiling determination process.

In addition to the first P counter, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a counter for the number of ceiling Gs. In the G number ceiling determination process (step S1915), first, 1 is added to the ceiling G number counter (step S1915a), and the count value of the ceiling G number counter is the number of ceiling games described in FIG. 73 (b). It is determined whether or not the 499 game has been reached (step S1915b), and if not, the G number ceiling determination process ends. On the contrary, if the number of ceiling games has been reached, as described with reference to FIG. 73 (b), the non-AT state shifts to the confrontation precursor state. In step S1915c, the effect state is set to the confrontation precursor state, and the number of games for maintaining the confrontation precursor state is set. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also has a confrontation precursor counter, and here, the value of the number of games determined by lottery between 2 games to 32 games is set in this confrontation precursor counter. In the following step S1915d, the pseudo BB1 schedule flag is set to on, and the G number ceiling determination process ends. By setting the pseudo BB1 schedule flag to on in step S1915d, when the number of ceiling games is exhausted, the state always shifts to the pseudo BB1 state.

FIG. 87 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point ceiling determination process.

If it is determined in the point increase setting process of step S134b shown in FIG. 83 (a) that the number of points corresponding to each character is to be increased, the main control is performed in step S1916a in this point ceiling determination process (step S1916). The point value of the increase is added to the count value of the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the unit 300.

In the following step S1916b, it is determined whether or not the count value of the first P counter becomes equal to or greater than the number of false confrontation points determined in the point ceiling setting process (step S133d) shown in FIG. If it is less than the number of false confrontation points, the process proceeds to step S1916d. On the contrary, if the number of false confrontation points is equal to or higher, the production state is set to the confrontation state, and the number of games for maintaining the confrontation state is set. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also has a confrontation counter, and here, the value of the number of games determined by lottery between the two games to the four games is set in the confrontation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S1916d.

In step S1916d, it is determined whether or not the count value of the first P counter becomes equal to or greater than the number of true confrontation points determined in the point ceiling setting process (step S133d) shown in FIG. 81. If it is less than the number of true confrontation points, this point ceiling determination process ends. On the other hand, if the number of true confrontation points is equal to or greater than the number of true confrontation points, the production state is set to the confrontation precursor state, and the number of games that maintain the confrontation precursor state is set in the confrontation precursor counter. Here, too, the number of games determined by lottery between 2 games and 32 games is set in the confrontation precursor counter. When step S1916d is executed, this point ceiling determination process ends.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow of the confrontation precursor state processing in the state update processing.

In the confrontation precursor state processing (step S192), first, the value of the confrontation precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1921), and it is determined whether or not the value of the confrontation precursor counter has become 0 (step S1922), and the value is 0. If not, this confrontation precursor state processing ends. On the other hand, if it is 0, in step S1923, the effect state is set to the confrontation state, the number of games that maintain the confrontation state is set in the confrontation counter, and this confrontation precursor state processing ends. Also in step S1923, the value of the number of games determined by lottery between the two games and the four games is set in the confrontation counter.

In addition, when the number of ceiling games is reached in the confrontation precursor state, if the lord is defeated in the confrontation precursor production following the confrontation precursor production that was being performed at that time, the situation returns to the confrontation precursor state again. In addition, when the number of true confrontation points is reached in the confrontation precursor state, if the lord is defeated in the confrontation precursor production following the confrontation precursor production that was being performed at that time, the lord will return to the confrontation precursor state again and reach the number of false confrontation points. Then, if the lord is defeated in the confrontation production following the confrontation precursor production that was being performed at that time, the situation shifts to the confrontation state.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the flow of the confrontation state process in the state update process.

In the confrontation state processing (step S193), first, it is determined whether or not the AT direct hit flag is set to ON (step S193a). If the AT direct hit flag is set to on, the effect state is set to the AT state (step S193b), and the AT direct hit flag is set to off (step S193c). Since the AT direct hit flag is set to ON, the scene in which the lord wins (see FIG. 74 (d)) is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. Next, preparations are made to transmit the first P counter value command including the count value of the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 (step S193d), and this confrontation state processing is completed. become. By executing step S193d, information on the count value (true point value) of the first P counter is transmitted to the sub-control side at the time of confrontation victory. The first sub-control unit 400 (sub-control side) also has a second P counter in the RAM 408, and counts the count value of the first P counter included in the first P counter value command transmitted from the main control unit 300. , Overwrite the 2nd P counter. This overwriting process for the second P counter is also the same when step S193k, step S193o, step S196e, and step S196i, which will be described later, are executed.

The second P counter of the first sub control unit 400 (sub control side) is reset by the power interruption and power recovery. The main control unit 300 includes a counter having the same behavior as the second P counter, that is, a third P counter that is reset by power interruption and recovery, and when the values of the third P counter and the first P counter are compared and do not match, The process of increasing the increase points may be performed so that the value of the 3rd P counter (the same value of the value of the 2nd P counter) approaches the value of the 1st P counter one or more times, and it attracts strong cherries and chances. In that case, all the difference points may be added. Further, the main control unit 300 sends the count value of the first P counter to the first sub control unit 400 (sub control side) for each game, and the first sub control unit 400 (sub control side) performs a process of matching the values. You may. Further, a backup power supply may be mounted on the first sub-control unit 400 (sub-control side), and the first sub-control unit 400 (sub-control side) may be provided with a first P counter and a second P counter to perform the above processing. ..

On the other hand, if the AT direct hit flag is not set to ON, the value of the confrontation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S193e), it is determined whether or not the value of the confrontation counter has become 0 (step S193f), and it has become 0. If not, this confrontation state processing ends. On the contrary, if it becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S193g. If the value of the confrontation counter is 0 in the process of step S193e, it remains 0. In step S193g, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB1 schedule flag or the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is turned on, and if either of the schedule flags is turned on, this time, the pseudo flag that is turned on is pseudo. It is determined whether or not the BB symbol is stopped and displayed (step S193h). That is, if the pseudo BB1 schedule flag is on, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is stopped and displayed, and if the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is on, the symbol of the replay combination 3 is determined. Determine if the combination is stopped and displayed. If the pseudo BB symbol is not displayed as stopped, this confrontation state process ends, and if the pseudo BB symbol is displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S193i. As described above, the pseudo BB1 state is maintained for 20 games and the pseudo BB2 state is maintained for 15 games. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a pseudo BB state counter for counting the digestion of these games. In step S193i, when the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is stopped and displayed, the effect state is set to the pseudo BB1 state, and the value of 20 is set in the pseudo BB state counter. When the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 is stopped and displayed, the effect state is set to the pseudo BB2 state, and the value of 15 is set in the pseudo BB state counter. Subsequently, the schedule flag of the pseudo BB symbol displayed as stopped is set to off (step S193j), and the first P counter value command is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as in step S193d described above. (Step S193k), this confrontation state processing ends.

If the judgment in step S193g is that neither the pseudo BB1 schedule flag nor the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is turned on, it is determined whether or not the AT schedule flag is turned on (step S193l), and the AT schedule is set. If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S193m. As described above, the lottery for the number of AT games (number of navigations) is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (b), and the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 counts the digestion of the number of AT games. An AT status counter for this is provided. In step S193m, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the value of the number of AT games (number of navigations) based on the lottery result is set in the AT state counter. Next, the AT schedule flag is set to off (step S193n), and again, as in step S193d, preparations are made to send the first P counter value command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S193o), and this confrontation state processing is performed. Is finished.

On the other hand, if the AT schedule flag is not turned on, it is determined whether or not the true confrontation has been defeated (step S193p). The judgment here is a judgment to determine whether the player was defeated in a true confrontation or a false confrontation. In addition to the first P counter, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a first lap counter that counts the number of laps (point laps). If the player is defeated in a true confrontation, the count value of the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset to 0, while 1 is added to the first lap counter (step S193q). Subsequently, the effect state is set to the non-AT state (step S193r), and this confrontation state process ends. If the player is defeated in a false confrontation, the counter is not updated and the process proceeds to step S193r. As a result, if you are defeated in a false confrontation, the number of points and the number of laps will continue.

In addition, when the number of ceiling games is reached in the confrontation state, if the lord is defeated in the confrontation state, it shifts to the confrontation precursor state. Also, in the confrontation state, when the number of true confrontation points is reached, if the lord is defeated in that confrontation state, it shifts to the confrontation precursor state, and when the number of false confrontation points is reached, the confrontation precursor production that was being performed at that time If the lord is defeated in the confrontation production that follows, the confrontation state will be restored again.

FIG. 90 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo BB state process in the state update process.

In the pseudo BB state processing (step S194), first, the value of the pseudo BB state counter is subtracted by 1 (step S194a), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo BB state counter has become 0 (step S194b), and the value is set to 0. If not, this pseudo BB state processing ends.

There is a grace period of 32 games from the start of the CZ state to the transition to the non-AT state. During the 32 games, the player needs to win the AT lottery or win the pseudo BB lottery to stop and display the pseudo BB symbol. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a CZ status counter for counting the digestion of the 32 games. If the value of the pseudo BB state counter is 0, in step S194c, the effect state is set to the CZ state, the value of 32 is set in the CZ state counter, and this pseudo BB state process ends.

FIG. 90B is a flowchart showing the flow of AT state processing in the state update processing.

In the AT state processing (step S195), first, it is determined whether or not the operation condition notification (navigation) effect is executed (step S195a), and if the operation condition notification effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S195c. On the other hand, if the effect of the operation condition notification is executed, the value of the AT state counter is subtracted by 1 (step S195b), and the process proceeds to step S195c.

In step S195c, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo BB state counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, this AT state processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the AT state counter is 0, in step S195d, the effect state is set to the CZ state, the value of 32 is set in the CZ state counter, and the AT state process ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the flow of CZ state processing in the state update processing.

In the CZ state processing (step S196), it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB1 schedule flag or the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is turned on (step S196a). In the CZ state, the pseudo BB lottery is performed every game by the main control unit 300, and by winning the pseudo BB lottery, the pseudo BB1 schedule flag or the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is set to ON. In the CZ state, if a specific combination (for example, a chance eye) is internally won, the main control unit 300 may perform a pseudo BB lottery. If any one of the schedule flags is turned on, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB symbol of the turned-on flag is stopped and displayed (step S196b). That is, if the pseudo BB1 schedule flag is on, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is stopped and displayed, and if the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is on, the symbol of the replay combination 3 is determined. Determine if the combination is stopped and displayed. If the pseudo BB symbol is not displayed as stopped, this CZ state processing ends, and if the pseudo BB symbol is displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S196c. In step S196c, when the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is stopped and displayed, the effect state is set to the pseudo BB1 state, and the value of 20 is set in the pseudo BB state counter. When the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 is stopped and displayed, the effect state is set to the pseudo BB2 state, and the value of 15 is set in the pseudo BB state counter. Subsequently, the schedule flag of the pseudo BB symbol displayed as stopped is set to off (step S196d), and the first P counter value command is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the same manner as in step S193d shown in FIG. (Step S196e), this CZ state processing ends.

If the determination in step S196a is that neither the pseudo BB1 schedule flag nor the pseudo BB2 schedule flag is turned on, it is determined whether or not the AT schedule flag is turned on (step S196f), and the AT schedule is set. If the flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S196g. In step S196g, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the value of the number of AT games (number of navigations) based on the lottery result is set in the AT state counter. Next, the AT schedule flag is set to off (step S196h), and again, as in step S193d shown in FIG. 89, preparations are made to transmit the first P counter value command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S196i). This confrontation state processing ends.

On the other hand, if the AT schedule flag is not turned on, the value of the CZ state counter is subtracted by 1 (step S196j), and the process proceeds to step S196k. In step S196k, it is determined whether or not the value of the CZ state counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, this CZ state processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the CZ state counter is 0, the effect state is set to the non-AT state in step S196l. Further, the count value of the 1st P counter is reset to 0, and the count value of the 1st round counter is also reset to 0, so that the CZ state processing is completed. As a result, when shifting from the CZ state to the non-AT state, the number of points and the number of laps become 0.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92. Note that FIG. 92A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 92B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 92 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S31, various initial settings are performed. The initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this initial processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S32, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S33, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S34, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S35, the effect control process is performed. Here, the process of expanding the effect data and setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command. Based on the information contained in the command and the command, the effect data is set and the control process is executed. In addition, the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the effect content is changed based on the overwritten data. The details of this effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 (a).

In step S36, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S35. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute the effect by sound.

In step S37, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S35. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the various lamps 420, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to execute the effect by the lamps.

In step S38, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S35. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 424 to execute the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S39, information output processing is performed in which control commands are set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on various processing results. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S32.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S30a of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S301, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S32 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 92A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S32, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S302, device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S38, and the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the details of the effect control process (step S35) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 92 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93 (a) is a flowchart of the effect control process (step S35) in FIG. 92 (a).

First, in step S351 that is executed first, the character addition / erasure process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 (b).

In the following step S352, the point increase erasure process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (a).

Next, in step S353, the zone display addition / erasure process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

In the following step S354, the counter display process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

In the final step S355, the navigation display process is executed, and this effect control process ends. The number of AT games is included in the internal winning command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of step S211 shown in FIG. 77. The first sub-control unit 400 also manages the digestion of the number of AT games, and if the number of AT games remains, the operation condition notification (navigation) shown in FIG. 74 (f) or the like is displayed. In the navigation display process, information instructing the display of the operation condition notification (navigation) is set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 93B is a flowchart of the character addition / erasure process (step S351).

The character addition / erasing command prepared in step S132s shown in FIG. 80 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of step S211 shown in FIG. 77. In step S351a in the character addition / erasure process, it is determined whether or not the transmitted character addition / erasure command includes information for adding the grandfather's character, and if it is included, the grandfather's character is additionally displayed. The information instructing the above is set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 (step S351b), and the process proceeds to step S351c. On the other hand, if the information for adding the old man's character is not included, on the contrary, it is determined whether or not the information for erasing the old man's character is included (step S351d), and if it is not included here, step S351c. If it is included, the grandfather erasing process for setting the information instructing to erase the display of the grandfather character in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 is performed (step S351e), and step S351c is performed. Proceed to.

In step S351c, it is determined whether or not the transmitted character addition / deletion command includes information for adding the princess character, and if it is included, information for instructing the addition display of the princess character is input. , The princess addition process set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 is performed (step S351f), and the process proceeds to step S351g. On the other hand, if the information for adding the princess character is not included, on the contrary, it is determined whether or not the information for erasing the princess character is included (step S351h), and if it is not included here, step S351g. If it is included, the princess erasing process is performed to set the information instructing to erase the display of the princess character in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 (step S351i), and step S351g. Proceed to.

In step S351g, it is determined whether or not the transmitted character addition / erasure command includes information for adding a Shinobi character, and if it is included, information for instructing additional display of the Shinobi character is provided. , The shinobi addition process set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 is performed (step S351j), and this character addition / erasure process is completed. On the other hand, if the information for adding the Shinobi character is not included, on the contrary, it is determined whether or not the information for erasing the Shinobi character is included (step S351k), and if it is not included here, the character is added. The erasing process is completed, and if it is included, the shinobi erasing process is performed to set the information instructing to erase the display of the shinobi character in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 (step S351l). ), The character addition / deletion process is completed.

FIG. 94A is a flowchart of the point increase erasing process (step S352).

The point increase command for each character prepared in step S134c shown in FIG. 83A is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of step S211 shown in FIG. 77. In step S352a in the point increase erasure process, it is determined whether or not the point increase command is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408. As described in the description in FIG. 83 (a), the point increase command is a command transmitted when the point increase condition is satisfied. That is, it is a command transmitted only when the effect state is any of the non-AT state, the confrontation precursor state, and the confrontation state. However, even in the non-AT state, the point increase command is not transmitted when the lost symbol is stopped when the number of laps is 0 and the number of points is also 0. As described above, the point increase command includes the value of the increased points (increase amount), not the count value (cumulative value) after the increase in the first P counter. When the point increase mand is stored as an unprocessed command, the point increase setting process is performed according to the point increase command for each character (step S352b). Further, in the effect image display device 157, the addition amount is displayed for each character. In the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, in addition to the second P counter, an additional recording area is prepared for each character. In the point increase setting process, the number of points for addition is recorded in the addition recording area for each character. Next, an increase point that is the sum of the additions (increases) for each character is added to the second P counter (step S352c), and this point increase elimination process is completed. For example, when 1 point is added as the character of the lord and 5 points are added as the character of the grandfather, 6 points are added to the second P counter.

Further, in addition to the point increase mand, the character addition / erasure command prepared in step S132s shown in FIG. 80 is also transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, additional flags are also prepared for each character for characters (old man, princess, shinobi) other than the default character, Tonosama's character. For example, if the character addition / deletion command includes information for adding an old man's character, the old man's addition flag is set to on. Steps S352b and S352c are executed only for characters other than the default character, the character of the lord, only for the character for which the additional flag is set to on. Here, when the power is cut off and restored, all the additional flags of each character prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 are turned off. Therefore, even if a point increase command for the character of the lord and a point increase command for a character other than the character of the lord are transmitted after the power is restored, only the point increase command of the character of the lord is in steps S352b and S352c. It is processed.

Further, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a second round counter. The point increase command also includes information indicating that the number of laps has increased or that the number of laps has been reset.

The timing at which the number of laps is reset is when the CZ state is changed to the non-AT state, when the setting is changed, and when the power is restored due to a power failure.

On the other hand, the timing when the number of laps increases is when you lose the true confrontation and when you win the first prize other than the loss after shifting from the CZ state to the non-AT state (the number of laps increases from 0 to 1). It was the first time that a prize was won other than the loss after the power was restored due to a disconnection. If the point increase command includes information indicating that the number of laps has increased, 1 is added to the second lap counter in step S352c.

When the true confrontation is defeated, the count value of the first P counter is reset to 0 (step S193q), and the first sub-control unit 400 clears the points in the command setting transmission process (see FIG. 77) of step S211. A command is sent. If the point increase mand is not stored as an unprocessed command, it is determined in step S352d whether or not the point clear command is stored as an unprocessed command. If the point clear command is not stored, the point increase erasure process ends, and if the point clear command is memorized, the value of the second P counter is reset to 0 (step S352e), and the point increase erasure process ends. Become. In addition, if the point clear command contains information indicating that the number of laps has been reset (corresponding to the case where the CZ state is changed to the non-AT state), the value of the second lap counter is also included in step S352e. Reset to 0. Further, in step S352e, the second P counter initial value setting flag described later is also cleared.

FIG. 94B is a flowchart of the zone display addition / erasure process (step S353).

In the effect image display device 157, the zone display is displayed, erased, or not displayed. This zone display is a display that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state, and more specifically, whether the point value displayed on the point number display PN is the number of true confrontation points or the number of false confrontation points is determined. Although it is unknown, it is a display notifying that the player is in a point zone where the number of confrontation points is likely to be reached. The zone display is displayed in the effect information display area 1572. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the value of the second P counter is a value corresponding to the zone display (step S353a), and if it is the corresponding value, displays the zone display. The zone display addition process for setting the instructed zone display information in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157 is performed (step S353b), and the zone display addition / erase process is completed. On the contrary, if the value of the second P counter is not a value corresponding to the zone display, the zone display erasing process is performed (step S353c), and the zone display additional erasing process ends. In the zone display erasing process, if the zone display information is set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, the zone display information is deleted from the effect execution area, and if the zone display information is not set, the zone display information is not set. No information is set.

FIG. 94 (c) is a table showing whether or not the zone display is displayed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 84 (c), the zone display is displayed, erased, or not displayed corresponding to the point zone described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). That is, in the point zone setting table shown in FIG. 82 (b), the zone display is displayed in the point zone having a relatively high probability, and the zone display is deleted or not displayed in the point zone having a relatively low probability. In addition, the zone display here does not distinguish between normal point mode and chance point mode, and if the probability is high in either mode, the zone display is displayed, and if the probability is low, the zone display is erased or not displayed. However, the zone display may be displayed, erased, or not displayed by distinguishing between the normal point mode and the chance point mode. For example, in the chance mode, the zone display is displayed when the value of the second P counter belongs to the point zone of 1 to 50 and the point zone of 51 to 100, and the zone display is displayed in the other point zones. It may not be displayed.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the counter display process (step S354).

In the counter display process (step S354), first, in step S354a, it is determined whether or not the counter display display condition is satisfied. The display condition of the counter display is limited to one of the non-AT effect, the false confrontation effect, and the confrontation victory effect. If this display condition is not satisfied, the counter display process ends. On the other hand, if this display condition is satisfied, in step S354b, it is determined whether or not the initial value setting condition of the second P counter is satisfied. The initial value setting condition of the second P counter is satisfied when the value of the second lap counter is 0, the value of the second P counter is 0, and the initial value setting flag of the second P counter is off. If the initial value setting condition of the second P counter is satisfied, 0 is set as the initial value in the second P counter in step S354c, and the second P counter initial value setting flag is turned on in step S354d. In addition to uniformly setting the count value of the second P counter to 0, a specific value different from 0 may be used, or a value selected by lottery or selected in a predetermined order from two or more types of values. It may be a value. In step S354e, whether or not the first P counter value command prepared in step S193d, step S193k, step S193o, step S196e, and step S196i described above is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408. Is determined. If the first P counter value command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S354g, and if it is stored, step S354f is executed before proceeding to step S354g. In step S354f, the count value of the first P counter included in the first P counter value command is overwritten on the second P counter of the RAM 408. By executing this step S354f, the value of the second P counter, which has not been matched with the value of the first P counter until then, matches the value of the first P counter.

In step S354g, information instructing the value of the second P counter of the RAM 408 to be displayed in the point number display PN in the effect information display area 1572 is set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, and the counter is displayed. The process ends.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. Note that FIG. 96A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 96B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 96C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 96D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S41 of FIG. 96 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S41. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of a storage area in RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S42, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S43.

In step S43, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S44, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S45, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S44, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S46, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S45. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S45, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (d). When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S42.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S40a of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S401, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S42 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 96A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S42, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S402, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S46 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S461, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S462, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S463, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S463, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S461, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S464, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S465, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S431. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered.

In step S466, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Subsequently, an effect example in the effect image display device 157 will be described.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example in which the count value of the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 rises in the non-AT state. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97, an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle corresponding to the non-AT state is continuously displayed. Further, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 displays a character display area 1571, and an effect information display area 1572 is also displayed below the character display area 1571. Further, under the effect image display device 157, a "counter 1" representing the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is written, and the count value of the first P counter is displayed on the right side thereof. ing. The first P counter is reset when the true confrontation is defeated, when the CZ state is changed to the non-AT state, and when the setting is changed, and the count value becomes 0. The 2nd P counter is reset when the true confrontation is defeated, when the CZ state shifts to the non-AT state, when the setting is changed, and when the power is restored due to a power failure, and the count value is set. It becomes 0. Further, a "counter 2" representing a second P counter prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is described, and a count value of the second P counter is also displayed on the right side thereof.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 97 is an example in which only one character of the lord is displayed as a character.

In the character display area 1571 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 (a1), one face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed. Further, "056" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572, and "first lap" is displayed as the lap count display LN. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 56, and the count value of the second P counter is also 56.

Immediately before FIG. 97 (a2), the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 97 (a2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 1 point to 57. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 57. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 (a2) remains “056”. Further, in FIG. 97 (a2), the animation of the first addition display ad1 is started. That is, the first addition display ad1 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears from the face image tp of the character of the lord, and a part of the face image tp is overlapped by the first addition display ad1. The face image tp is more difficult to see than before the first addition display ad1 appears.

In FIG. 97 (a3), the first addition display ad1 moves away from the face image tp of the character of the lord. The transparency of the first addition display ad1 increases while moving, and the first addition display ad1 shown in FIG. 97 (a3) is about to disappear. On the other hand, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the animation of the second addition display ad2 is started. That is, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the second addition display ad2 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears. The second addition display ad2 shown in FIG. 97 (a3) is not disappearing and is firmly displayed. The second addition display ad2 moves in a direction approaching the point number display PN, and the transparency increases while moving, and becomes a part of the point number display PN (display of "056") shown in FIG. 97 (a4). The overlapped second addition display ad2 is disappearing. In FIG. 97 (a4), the first addition display ad1 has completely disappeared.

In FIG. 97 (a5), the second addition display ad2 disappears completely, and the point number display PN is “057” representing the same value as the count value of the second P counter. That is, the point number display PN is changed to the display in which one point is added.

The example shown in the center of FIG. 97 is an example in which the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather are displayed as characters.

In the character display area 1571 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 (b1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image jp of the grandfather character is also displayed. A total of two face images are displayed. Further, "056" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572, and "first lap" is displayed as the lap count display LN. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 56, and the count value of the second P counter is also 56.

Immediately before FIG. 97 (b2), the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 97 (b2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 2 points to 58. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 58. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 (b2) remains "056". Further, in FIG. 97 (b2), the first addition amount display (here, "+1" is displayed) appears from the face image tp of the character of the lord, and the first addition amount display is also displayed from the face image jp of the grandfather character (in this case, the display of "+1"). Here, the display of "+1") has appeared. Hereinafter, the first addition display appearing from the face image tp of the character of the lord is referred to as the first addition display Tad1 for the lord, and the first addition display appearing from the face image tp of the grandfather character is referred to as the first addition display for the grandfather. Display for 1 addition Jad1 may be used to distinguish between the two (the same applies to other characters). A part of the face image tp of the character of the lord is overlapped by the first addition display Tad1 for the lord, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the first addition display Tad1 for the lord. A part of the face image jp of the grandfather's character is overlapped by the grandfather's first additional portion display Jad1, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the grandfather's first additional portion display Jad1.

In FIG. 97 (b3), each first addition amount display moves in a direction away from the face image of each character, and the transparency is increased while moving, and the first addition for the palace is shown in FIG. 97 (b3). Even if the minute display Tad1 or the first additional minute display Jad1 for the old man is disappearing. On the other hand, on the effect information display area 1572 side, two second addition display (here, "+1" is displayed) appears. The two second addition displays are not disappearing and are displayed firmly, one corresponding to the first addition display Tad1 for the palace and the one corresponding to the first addition display Tad1 for the old man. Is. Hereinafter, the second addition display corresponding to the first addition display Tad1 for the palace is referred to as the second addition display Tad2 for the palace, and the second addition display corresponding to the first addition display Jad1 for the grandfather is referred to as the grandfather. It is referred to as Jad2 for the second addition, and may be distinguished from each other (hereinafter, it is also referred to as other characters). The second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. Further, both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather increase in transparency while moving toward the point number display PN, and the point number display PN shown in FIG. 97 (b4). Both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather, which overlapped with a part of (display of "056"), are disappearing. In FIG. 97 (b4), both the first addition display Tad1 for the palace and the first addition display Jad1 for the grandfather have completely disappeared.

In FIG. 97 (b5), both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather disappear completely, and the point number display PN is set to "058", which represents the same value as the count value of the second P counter. It has become. That is, the point number display PN is changed to the display in which 2 points are added.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 97 is an example in which the character of the lord and the character of the princess are displayed as characters.

In the character display area 1571 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 (c1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image hp of the princess character is also displayed. A total of two face images are displayed. Further, "056" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572, and "first lap" is displayed as the lap count display LN. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 56, and the count value of the second P counter is also 56.

Immediately before FIG. 97 (c2), the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 97 (c2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 11 points to 67. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 67. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97 (c2) remains “056”. Further, in FIG. 97 (c2), the first addition display Tad1 (here, "+1" is displayed) for the princess appears from the face image tp of the character of the princess, and the face image hp of the princess character is the first for the princess. The 1-addition display Had1 (here, the display of "+10") has appeared. A part of the face image tp of the character of the lord is overlapped by the first addition display Tad1 for the lord, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the first addition display Tad1 for the lord. A part of the face image hp of the princess character is overlapped by the first addition display Had1 for the princess, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the first addition display Had1 for the princess.

In FIG. 97 (c3), each first addition amount display moves in a direction away from the face image of each character, and the transparency is increased while moving, and the first addition for the palace is shown in FIG. 97 (c3). Even if the minute display Tad1 or the first additional minute display Had1 for the princess is disappearing. On the other hand, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Had2 for the princess appear. The second addition display Tad2 for the palace is the second addition display corresponding to the first addition display Tad1 for the palace, and here, it is a display of "+1". On the other hand, the princess second addition display Had2 is a second addition display corresponding to the princess first addition display Had1, and is a display of "+10" here. Neither the second addition display Tad2 for the palace nor the second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather is about to disappear, and they are firmly displayed side by side in the vertical direction. Both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Had2 for the princess increase in transparency while moving toward the point number display PN, and the point number display PN ("" The second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Had2 for the princess, which overlapped with a part of "056"), are both disappearing. In FIG. 97 (c4), both the first addition display Tad1 for the palace and the first addition display Had1 for the princess have completely disappeared.

In FIG. 97 (c5), both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Had2 for the princess disappear completely, and the point number display PN becomes "067" representing the same value as the count value of the second P counter. It has become. That is, the point number display PN has changed to a display in which 11 points have been added.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing another example in which the count value of the first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 rises in the non-AT state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 98 also continuously displays the animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 98 is an example in which the character of the lord and the character of the princess are displayed as characters.

In the character display area 1571 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 98 (a1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image sp of the shinobi character is also displayed. A total of two face images are displayed. Further, "056" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572, and "first lap" is displayed as the lap count display LN. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 56, and the count value of the second P counter is also 56.

Immediately before FIG. 98 (a2), the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 98 (a2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 2 points to 58. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 58. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 98 (a2) remains "056". Further, in FIG. 98 (a2), the first addition display Tad1 for the lord (here, "+1" is displayed) appears from the face image tp of the character of the lord, and the face image sp of the shinobi character is the ninja first. One addition display Sad1 (here, "x2" display) has appeared. As a result, the first addition display Tad1 for the palace and the first addition display Sad1 for the ninja are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. A part of the face image tp of the character of the lord is overlapped by the first addition display Tad1 for the lord, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the first addition display Tad1 for the lord. A part of the face image sp of the Shinobi character is overlapped by the Shinobi 1st addition display Sad1, which makes it more difficult to see than before the appearance of the Shinobi 1st addition display Sad1.

In FIG. 98 (a3), each first addition amount display moves in a direction away from the face image of each character, and the transparency is increased while moving, and the first addition for the palace is shown in FIG. 98 (c3). Both the minute display Tad1 and the ninja first addition display Sad1 are disappearing. On the other hand, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Sad2 for the ninja appear. The second addition display Tad2 for the palace is the second addition display corresponding to the first addition display Tad1 for the palace, and here, it is a display of "+1". On the other hand, the Ninja 2nd addition display Sad2 is the 2nd addition display corresponding to the Ninja 1st addition display Sad1, but it is not the display of "x2" but the increase of "x2". It is a display of "+1" that directly displays the value. Neither of these two second addition displays is about to disappear, and they are firmly displayed side by side in a row in the left-right direction. In both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Sad2 for the ninja, the transparency increases while moving in the direction approaching the point number display PN, and the point number display PN ("" The second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Sad2 for the ninja that overlaps a part of the display of "056" are disappearing. In FIG. 98 (a4), both the first addition display Tad1 for the palace and the first addition display Sad1 for the ninja have completely disappeared.

In FIG. 98 (a5), both the second addition display Tad2 for the palace and the second addition display Sad2 for the ninja disappear completely, and the point number display PN is set to "058", which represents the same value as the count value of the second P counter. It has become. That is, the point number display PN is changed to the display in which 2 points are added.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 98 is an example in which all characters are displayed as characters.

In the character display area 1571 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 98 (b1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image jp of the grandfather character and the character of the princess The face image hp of the character and the face image sp of the Shinobi character are also displayed, and a total of four face images are displayed. Further, "056" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572, and "first lap" is displayed as the lap count display LN. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 56, and the count value of the second P counter is also 56.

Immediately before FIG. 98 (b2), the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 98 (b2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 24 points to 80. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 80. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 98 (b2) remains "056". Further, in FIG. 98 (b2), the first addition display Tad1 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears from the face image tp of the character of the lord, and the first addition for the lord appears from the face image jp of the character of the grandfather. The additional amount display Jad1 (display of "+1" here) appears, and the first additional amount display Had1 for the princess (display of "+10" here) appears from the face image hp of the princess character. Further, the ninja first addition display Sad1 (here, "x2" is displayed) appears from the face image sp of the shinobi character, and is continuously displayed on the princess first addition display Had1. A part of the face image tp of the character of the lord is overlapped by the first addition display Tad1 for the lord, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the first addition display Tad1 for the lord. A part of the face image jp of the grandfather's character is overlapped by the grandfather's first additional portion display Jad1, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the grandfather's first additional portion display Jad1. A part of the face image hp of the princess character is overlapped by the first addition display Had1 for the princess, and it is more difficult to see than before the appearance of the first addition display Had1 for the princess. Almost all of the face image sp of the Shinobi character is overlapped by the first addition display Had1 for the princess, and is invisible.

In FIG. 98 (b3), each first addition amount display moves in a direction away from the face image of each character, and the transparency is increased while moving, and each first addition is shown in FIG. 98 (b3). The minute display is disappearing. On the other hand, on the production information display area 1572 side, the second addition display Tad2 for the palace, the second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather, the second addition display Had2 for the princess, and the second addition display Sad2 for the princess appear. .. The second addition display Tad2 for the palace is the second addition display corresponding to the first addition display Tad1 for the palace, and here, it is a display of "+1". The second addition display Jad2 for the grandfather is the second addition amount display corresponding to the first addition amount display Jad1 for the grandfather, and is a display of "+1" here. The princess second addition display Had2 is a second addition display corresponding to the princess first addition display Had1, and is a display of “+10” here. On the other hand, the Ninja 2nd addition display Sad2 is the 2nd addition display corresponding to the Ninja 1st addition display Sad1, but it is not the display of "x2" but the increase of "x2". It is a display that directly displays each value. That is, the Ninja 2nd addition display Sad2 has a "+1" display next to the 2nd addition display Tad2 for the palace and a "+1" displayed next to the 2nd addition display Jad2 for the grandfather. Is displayed and "+10" is displayed next to Had2, which is the second addition display for princesses. None of these second addition displays are about to disappear and are displayed firmly. Further, the transparency of these second additions displays increases while moving toward the point number display PN, and all of these second additions shown in FIG. 98 (b4) are almost disappearing. In FIG. 98 (b4), the display of the first addition is completely erased.

In FIG. 98 (b5), all the second addition display is completely erased, and the point number display PN is "080" representing the same value as the count value of the second P counter. That is, the point number display PN has changed to a display in which 24 points have been added. In addition, the 2nd addition display Tad2 for the palace, the 2nd addition display Jad2 for the old man, and the 2nd addition display Had2 for the princess are collectively displayed as the total value "+12", and the 2nd addition display Sad2 for the ninja. May also display "+12" corresponding to the total value.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example in which the count value of the first P counter rises in the confrontation state. The example shown on the left side of FIG. 99 is also an example in which only one character of the lord is initially displayed as a character, and the differences from the example shown on the left side of FIG. 97 will be mainly described and overlapped below. The explanation may be omitted.

FIG. 99 (a1) shows a non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state. Further, in the character display area 1571 in FIG. 99 (a1), one face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is also displayed. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 55, the count value of the second P counter is also 55, and "055" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

Subsequently, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is a chance point mode, and the number of false confrontation points is set to 56 points. In FIG. 99 (a2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 1 point to 56. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 56. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 99 (a2) displays a confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, and the upper right of the display screen indicates that the effect is in the confrontation state. The characters of "confrontation production" are displayed. The confrontation production here is a false confrontation production. In FIG. 99 (a2), the effect state shifts from the non-AT state to the confrontation state. When the confrontation state is entered, the character display area 1571 disappears, and the face image tp of the character of the lord also disappears. On the other hand, the effect information display area 1572 is displayed, and here, the point number display PN has already increased by 1 point to become "056". That is, the point number display PN has the same value as the count value of the second P counter.

In FIG. 99 (a2), the first additional portion display ad1 (first additional portion display Tad1 for the palace) shown in FIG. 97 (a2) is not displayed, but the first additional portion shown in FIG. 97 (a2) is displayed. The display may be displayed in a less conspicuous manner than the display ad1. For example, at least one of the number of displays, the number of display colors, and the number of display animations is smaller, the display time is shorter, or the display size is smaller than the first addition display ad1 shown in FIG. 97 (a2). You may. Further, it may be displayed lighter than the first addition display ad1 shown in FIG. 97 (a2). Further, the first addition display ad1 shown in FIG. 97 (a2) may have a color change or a shape change during display, and in this case, it is displayed in FIG. 99 (a2). The color of the first addition display ad1 may not change during the display, and the shape may not change.

Immediately before FIG. 99 (a3), the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 99 (a3), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 1 point to 57. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 57. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 99 (a3) remains "056". Since the effect information display area 1572 is not displayed and the face image tp of the character of the lord is not displayed, the first addition display Tad1 for the lord is not displayed, and the first addition for the lord is not displayed. Display The animation of Tad1 is not displayed either.

In FIG. 99 (a4), the animation of the second addition display Tad2 for the palace is displayed on the effect information display area 1572 side. That is, the second addition display Tad2 for the palace appears on the effect information display area 1572 side, and in the figure (a5), the second addition display Tad2 for the palace moves in a direction approaching the point number display PN. It overlaps with a part of the point number display PN (display of "056"). The second addition display Tad2 for the hall shown in FIG. 99 (a5) is about to disappear, and in the following FIG. 99 (a6), the second addition display Tad2 for the hall disappears completely, and the point number display PN is the second P. It is "057" which represents the same value as the count value of the counter. That is, the point number display PN is changed to the display in which 2 points are added.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 99 described above, the animation time (scale) for displaying the point number display PN in the confrontation state is the animation for displaying the point number display PN in the non-AT state. It is the same length as the time (shaku) of.

The example shown in the center of FIG. 99 is also an example in which only one character of the lord is initially displayed as a character, but the point number display PN point increase display in the confrontation state is more than the example shown on the left side of the figure. An example of a short animation time (shaku) for. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown on the left side of FIG. 99 will be mainly described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

In the example shown in the center of FIG. 99, as soon as the third stop is performed, the second addition display Tad2 for the palace appears on the effect information display area 1572 side. That is, the animation of FIG. 99 (a3) is cut, and the time is shortened by the scale of the cut animation.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 99 is also an example in which only one character of the lord is initially displayed as a character, but the point number display PN point increase display in the confrontation state is larger than the example shown in the center of the figure. An example of an even shorter animation time (shaku) for. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in the center of FIG. 99 will be mainly described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 99, when the third stop is performed, the second addition display Tad2 for the palace appears immediately on the effect information display area 1572 side (FIG. 99 (c3)). The animation (animation in FIG. 99 (b4)) in which the second addition display Tad2 moves toward the point number display PN is cut, and the time is even shorter by the length of the cut animation.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing another example in which the count value of the first P counter rises in the confrontation state.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 100 is also an example in which only one character of the lord is initially displayed as a character, but the point number display PN point increase display in the confrontation state is larger than the example shown on the right side of FIG. 99. An example of an even shorter animation time (shaku) for. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown on the right side of FIG. 99 will be mainly described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 100, in the confrontation state, the first addition amount display ad1 and the second addition amount display ad2 are not displayed, and when the third stop is performed, the point number display PN immediately changes according to the winning combination. Addition is displayed. As a result, the time is further shortened by the scale of the animation (animation in FIG. 99 (c3)) in which the second addition display Tad2 for the palace appears.

The example shown in the center of FIG. 100 is an example in which the character of the lord and the character of the princess are initially displayed as characters. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown on the right side of FIG. 97 will be mainly described and duplicated. The explanation to be given may be omitted.

FIG. 100 (b1) shows a non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state. Further, in the character display area 1571 in FIG. 100 (b1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image hp of the princess character is also displayed, and a total of two face images are displayed. ing. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 55, the count value of the second P counter is also 55, and "055" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

Subsequently, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. This example is also in the chance point mode, and the number of false confrontation points is set to 56 points. In FIG. 100 (b2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 2 points to 57. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 57. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 100 (b2) displays a confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, and the characters "confrontation effect" are displayed in the upper right of the display screen. It has been done. The confrontation production here is also a false confrontation production. In FIG. 100 (b2), the effect state shifts from the non-AT state to the confrontation state. When the confrontation state is entered, the character display area 1571 disappears, and the face image tp of the lord's character also disappears from the face image hp of the princess character. On the other hand, the effect information display area 1572 is displayed, and here, the point number display PN has already increased by 2 points to become "057". That is, the point number display PN has the same value as the count value of the second P counter. Both the face image tp of the character of the lord and the face image hp of the character of the princess have disappeared, but the increased 2 points are the value of the addition of the character of the lord (+1) and the value of the addition of the character of the princess (+1). Is the total value of.

Immediately before FIG. 100 (b3), the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 100 (b3), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 11 points to 68. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 68. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 100 (b3) remains "057". In this example, as soon as the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, the second addition display Tad appears on the effect information display area 1572 side. That is, the animation of FIG. 97 (c2) is cut, and the time is shortened by the scale of the cut animation. The second addition display Tad shown in FIG. 100 (b3) is a display representing the total value of the addition value (+1) of the character of the lord and the addition value (+10) of the character of the princess (here, "+11"). Display).

Further, in this example, the animation (animation in FIG. 97 (c4)) in which the second addition display Tad moves in the direction approaching the point number display PN is cut, and only the length of the cut animation is cut. It's even shorter.

In FIG. 100 (b4), the second addition amount display Tad disappears, and the point number display PN is “068” representing the same value as the count value of the second P counter. That is, the point number display PN has changed to a display in which 11 points have been added.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 100 is an example in which a lord character, a princess character, and a shinobi character are initially displayed as characters, and is different from the example shown in the center of FIG. 100 described above. The explanation will be centered on the points, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 100 (c1) also shows the non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state. Further, in the character display area 1571 in FIG. 100 (c1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image hp of the princess character and the face image sp of the shinobi character are also displayed. And a total of three facial images are displayed. Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 55, the count value of the second P counter is also 55, and "055" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

Subsequently, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is a chance point mode, and the number of false confrontation points is set to 56 points. In FIG. 100 (c2), the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter each increase by 4 points to 59. These 4 points are 1 point for the lord and 1 point for the princess, doubled by the shinobi. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 100 (c2) displays a confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other corresponding to the confrontation state, and the character display of "confrontation effect" is displayed in the upper right of the display screen. It has been done. The confrontation production here is also a false confrontation production. Also in FIG. 100 (c2), the effect state shifts from the non-AT state to the confrontation state. When the confrontation state is entered, the character display area 1571 disappears, and all the face images of each character also disappear. On the other hand, the effect information display area 1572 is displayed, and here, the point number display PN has already increased by 4 points to become "059". That is, the point number display PN has the same value as the count value of the second P counter.

Immediately before FIG. 100 (c3), the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 100 (c3), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 22 points to 81. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 81. However, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 100 (c3) remains "059". Also in this example, as soon as the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, the second addition display Tad appears on the effect information display area 1572 side. The second addition display Tad shown in FIG. 100 (c3) is a total value (display of "+22") obtained by doubling 1 point for the lord and 10 points for the princess by the shinobi.

Further, also in this example, the animation in which the second addition display Tad moves is cut, and in FIG. 100 (c4), the second addition display Tad disappears, and the point number display PN is the count of the second P counter. It is "081" which represents the same value as the value. That is, the point number display PN has changed to a display in which 22 points have been added.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example in which a true confrontation effect is performed and the state shifts to a pseudo BB state and an AT state.

FIG. 101 (1) shows a non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state. Further, in the character display area 1571 in FIG. 101 (1), the face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed. Further, both the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown, are 1, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 is the display of "first lap". Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 55, the count value of the second P counter is also 55, and "055" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

Subsequently, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. This example is also in the chance point mode, and the number of true confrontation points is set to 56 points. In FIG. 101 (2), the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter each increase by 1 point to 56. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (2) displays an animation in which the lord holds a sword corresponding to the confrontation precursor state, and the characters "confrontation precursor effect" are displayed in the upper right of the display screen. ing. In FIG. 101 (2), the effect state has shifted from the non-AT state to the confrontation precursor state. When the confrontation precursor state is entered, both the character display area 1571 and the effect information display area 1572 have disappeared. In this way, when the state shifts from the default state (non-AT state), only the character display area 1571 out of the character display area 1571 and the effect information display area 1572 disappears (second state, which is a confrontation state). ) And a state in which both the character display area 1571 and the effect information display area 1572 disappear (the first state which is a confrontation precursor state).

Even in the first game after shifting to the confrontation precursor state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 101 (3), the count value of the 1st P counter and the count value of the 2nd P counter each increase by 1 point to 57. ing. However, since the effect information display area 1572 has disappeared, the player is not notified that the point has been increased.

Even in the second game after the transition to the confrontation precursor state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, when the two games are digested after the transition to the confrontation precursor state, the confrontation state is entered. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (4) displays a confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other corresponding to the confrontation state, and the character display of "confrontation effect" is displayed in the upper right of the display screen. It has been done. The confrontation production here is a true confrontation production. The confrontation animation includes a confrontation scene and a victory / defeat scene, and the confrontation scene is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (4). In the confrontation scene in the confrontation state started via the confrontation precursor state, that is, in the confrontation scene in the true confrontation state, the effect information display area 1572 remains disappeared together with the character display area 1571. In this way, even in a certain scene (confrontation scene) in the same second state (confrontation state), there is a case where the transition is made via the first state (confrontation precursor state) and a case where the transition is not made. The display / non-display of the information display area 1572 will be different. That is, when the state shifts to the second state (confrontation state) via the first state (confrontation precursor state), the number of points or the number of points and the lap in a certain scene (confrontation scene) in the second state. If the number of times is displayed and the player shifts to the second state (confrontation state) without going through the first state (confrontation precursor state), the number of points or the number of points in the certain scene (confrontation scene) in the second state is displayed. The number of points and the number of laps are not displayed. However, depending on whether or not the first state is passed, the number of points or the display / non-display of the number of points and the number of laps is not distinguished, but it is related to whether or not the first state is passed. Instead, in a certain scene in the second state, the number of points or the number of points and the number of laps may be unified so that they are not displayed or are displayed in the opposite direction. Further, in FIG. 101 (4), the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter are each further increased by 1 point to 58.

Even in the first game after shifting to this confrontation state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 101 (5), the count value of the 1st P counter and the count value of the 2nd P counter each increase by 1 point to 59. .. The confrontation scene in the confrontation animation is still displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (5). Eventually, the second game is started after the transition to the confrontation state, and a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, the state shifts after two games have been digested after the transition to the confrontation state. That is, it shifts to the pseudo BB state, shifts to the AT state, or shifts to the non-AT state. When shifting to the pseudo BB state or the AT state, the scene in which the lord wins is displayed as the winning / losing scene that continues from the confrontation scene. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (6) displays a scene in which the lord has won. In the scene where the lord won, the character display area 1571 still disappears, but the display of the production information display area 1572 is restored. In FIG. 101 (6), the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter each further increase by 1 point to 60, and the point number display PN in the revived effect information display area 1572 is the count of the second P counter. It is "060" which represents the same value as the value. Since the point number display PN (see FIG. 101 (1)) immediately before the effect information display area 1572 disappears was "055", it means that the number of points was increased by 5 points at once.

After the second game after the transition to the confrontation state, when the symbol combination of the re-game combination 2 or the symbol combination of the re-game combination 3 (pseudo BB symbol) shown in FIG. 72 (a) is stopped and displayed, the confrontation state is displayed. To the pseudo BB state. That is, if the pseudo BB symbols are aligned in the second game after shifting to the confrontation state, the scene in which the lord won is displayed and the screen shifts to the pseudo BB state, but the pseudo BB symbols are aligned in the second game. Even if it is not done, it will be carried over to the next game or later. If the pseudo BB symbols are not aligned in the second game, they may not be carried over to the next game or later, and the scene in which the lord is defeated may be displayed to shift to the non-AT state. Further, the pseudo BB symbol may be a symbol that is always aligned at one time by the pull-in control of the reels 110 to 112.

In FIG. 101 (7a), the symbol combination of the replaying combination 2 is stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the pseudo BB1 state. The animation is displayed. Further, in the lower right of the display screen, the number of medals acquired in the pseudo BB state is displayed. However, in the pseudo BB state, the effect information display area 1572 disappears again, and neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. Further, even in the pseudo BB state, the operation condition notification effect is executed as in the AT state, and the operation order "2 3 1" is notified on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (7a). The correct operation order is to perform the first stop with the right stop button 139, the second stop with the left stop button 137, and the third stop with the middle stop button 138. According to this operation condition notification, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order, the bell symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the medal is paid out. However, in the pseudo BB state, the points do not increase regardless of which symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the CZ state after 20 games have been digested. In FIG. 101 (8a), the symbol of the 20th game is stopped, and the effect image display device 157 is performing the end effect of the pseudo BB state. Even when the symbol of the 20th game is stopped, the symbol combination of the bell is stopped and displayed, and the screen shows that the number of medals acquired in the pseudo BB1 state this time is 100 on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (8a). It is displayed in the center. Further, in FIG. 101 (8a), neither the count value of the first P counter nor the count value of the second P counter has changed since the start of the pseudo BB state, and remains at 60. It is shown.

In FIG. 101 (9a), the state shifts to the CZ state, and the animation of the lord running in the wilderness corresponding to the CZ state is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. Further, in the lower right of the display screen, the number of remaining games until the transition to the non-AT state is displayed. Even in the CZ state, neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed.

In this example, the final game corresponding to the 32nd game after the CZ state is started is started without winning the AT lottery, winning the pseudo BB lottery, and stopping and displaying the pseudo BB symbol. On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (10a), it is displayed that the number of remaining games until the transition to the non-AT state is 0. Further, FIG. 101 (10a) also shows that neither the count value of the first P counter nor the count value of the second P counter has changed from the start of the pseudo BB state and remains at 60.

In the figure (11a) following FIG. 101 (10a), the CZ state is changed to the non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 has an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle corresponding to the non-AT state. It is displayed. When the state shifts from the CZ state to the non-AT state, the first P counter is reset, and as shown in FIG. 101 (11a), the count value of the first P counter is 0, and the count value of the second P counter is also 0. Further, the count value of the first lap counter (not shown here) is also reset to 0, and the count value of the second lap counter also becomes 0. On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (11a), the display of the character display area 1571 and the display of the effect information display area 1572 are restored, and the character display area 1571 is the face of the character of the lord. One image tp is displayed, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 is a display representing 0, and the lap count display LN is also a display representing the 0th lap.

If you have won the AT lottery, when 2 games are exhausted after shifting to the confrontation state, the scene where the lord won is displayed and the state shifts to the AT state. In FIG. 101 (7b), the state shifts to the AT state, and the display screen of the effect image display device 157 starts displaying an animation in which the lord is watching cherry blossoms with the castle in the background, corresponding to the AT state. There is. In addition, the cumulative number of medals earned since the start of the AT state is displayed in the lower right of the display screen, and the total number of AT games digested (total 0G (game)) and the remaining AT games are displayed in the lower left. The number (remaining 10G) is displayed. However, even in the AT state, the effect information display area 1572 disappears again, and neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. Further, the operation condition notification effect is also executed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (7b), the operation order of "1 3 2" is displayed, and the first stop is performed by pressing the left stop button 137. The correct operation order is to perform the second stop with the right stop button 139 and the third stop with the middle stop button 138. According to this operation condition notification, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order, the bell symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the medal is paid out. However, even in the AT state, the points do not increase regardless of which symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The AT state shifts to the CZ state when all the assigned AT game numbers (number of navigations) are exhausted. In FIG. 101 (8b), the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order according to the last operation condition notification, the symbol combination of the bells is stopped and displayed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the end effect of the AT state. It is done. In the end effect of the AT state, the total number of AT games digested (total 10G (game)) and the cumulative number of medals acquired since the start of the AT state (70 acquired) are displayed on the effect image display device 157. ing. Further, FIG. 101 (8b) shows that neither the count value of the first P counter nor the count value of the second P counter has changed from the start of the AT state and remains at 60.

In FIG. 101 (9b), the CZ state is entered, and in FIG. 101 (10b), the final game corresponding to the 32nd game after the CZ state is started is started. Then, in FIG. 101 (11b), the state shifts to the non-AT state. Since these FIGS. 101 (9b) to (11b) are the same as those of FIGS. (9a) to (11a) described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of defeating in a confrontation effect and shifting to a non-AT state.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 102 is an example of defeating in a true confrontation effect and shifting to a non-AT state. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 101 will be mainly described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

FIG. 102 (a1) is in a non-AT state as in FIG. 101 (1), and in FIG. 102 (a1), the count value of the first P counter is 55, and the count value of the second P counter is also 55. Is shown, and "055" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

Subsequently, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is a chance point mode, and the number of confrontation points is set to 56 points. In FIG. 102 (a2), the effect state shifts from the non-AT state to the confrontation precursor state. FIGS. 102 (a2) to 102 (a3) show the same confrontation precursor state as in FIGS. 101 (2) to (3). Further, in FIG. 102 (a4), the confrontation state is entered as in FIG. 101 (4), and FIGS. 102 (a4) to (a5) are the same as in FIGS. 101 (4) to (5). On the effect image display device 157, the confrontation scene in the confrontation animation is displayed. Also in this example, when two games are digested after shifting to the confrontation state, as described with reference to FIG. 101, the game shifts to the pseudo BB state or shifts to the AT state. Alternatively, it shifts to the non-AT state. When shifting to the non-AT state, the scene in which the lord is defeated is displayed as the winning / losing scene that continues from the confrontation scene. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 102 (a6) displays a scene in which the lord was defeated. In the scene where the lord was defeated in the confrontation animation in the true confrontation production, both the character display area 1571 and the production information display area 1572 still disappear. That is, unlike the scene in which the lord won, the display of the production information display area 1572 is not restored.

In FIG. 102 (a7), the transition from the true confrontation state to the non-AT state is performed, and the animation of the lord and the old man in the palace in the castle corresponding to the non-AT state is displayed again on the effect image display device 157. When the true confrontation state is changed to the non-AT state, that is, when the true confrontation is defeated and the non-AT state is changed, the first P counter is reset, but the first lap counter is not reset and 1 is added. As shown in FIG. 102 (a7), the count value of the first P counter is 0, the count value of the second P counter is also 0, and the point number display PN in the effect image display device 157 is also a display representing 0. On the other hand, although the count values of the first lap counter and the second lap counter are not shown, they are both set to 2, and the lap count display LN in the effect image display device 157 is also set to "second lap". Further, the display of the character display area 1571 is restored, and one face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed there.

When the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed after shifting to the non-AT state, the count value of the first P counter is incremented by 1 to become 1, as shown in FIG. 102 (a8), and the count value of the second P counter is counted. The value is also 1, and the point number display PN in the effect image display device 157 is also a display representing 1. The addition of the point number display PN is the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition display ad2 ("+1") described using FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). "Display) Animation is used, but those animations are omitted here. Further, the zone display is displayed in the effect information display area 1572 in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 102 (a8). The zone display here is represented by cross-hatching, and the zone display is displayed in the portion of the effect information display area 1572 excluding the lap count display LN. This zone display informs that it is unclear whether the number of true confrontation points or false confrontation points is reached, but it is highly likely that the number of confrontation points will be reached. The count values of the first lap counter and the second lap counter (not shown) remain at 2, and the lap count display LN in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 102 (a8) also remains at "second lap". be.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 102 is an example of defeating in a false confrontation effect and shifting to a non-AT state. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in the center of FIG. 100 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the character display area 1571 in FIG. 102 (b1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image jp of the grandfather character is also displayed, and a total of two face images are displayed. .. Further, FIG. 102 (b1) is also in the non-AT state, and FIG. 102 (b1) also shows that the count value of the first P counter is 55 and the count value of the second P counter is also 55. Then, "055" is displayed as the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

Subsequently, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is a chance point mode, and the number of false confrontation points is set to 56 points. In FIG. 102 (b2), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 2 points to 57. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 57. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 102 (b2) displays a confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, corresponding to the confrontation state. The confrontation production here is also a false confrontation production. Further, when the confrontation state is entered, the character display area 1571 disappears, and both the face image tp of the character of the lord and the face image jp of the character of the grandfather disappear. On the other hand, the effect information display area 1572 is displayed, and here, the point number display PN has already increased by 2 points to become "057". That is, the point number display PN has the same value as the count value of the second P counter. Both the face image tp of the character of the lord and the face image jp of the character of the grandfather have disappeared, but the increased 2 points are the value of the addition of the character of the lord (+1) and the value of the addition of the character of the grandfather (+1). Is the total value of.

Immediately before FIG. 102 (b3), the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in the grandfather erasing lottery process of step S132f shown in FIG. 80, the face image jp of the grandfather character is elected to be erased. Here, the face image jp of the grandfather's character was hidden due to the disappearance of the character display area 1571 together with the face image tp of the character of the lord, but as described above, in the addition of points, the grandfather's character The value of the addition of was added. However, by winning the grandfather erasure lottery process, the added value of the grandfather character cannot be added in the subsequent points addition.

In FIG. 102 (b3), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 1 point to 58. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 58. Further, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 on the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is also set to "058". The increase of 1 point here is the value of the addition of the character of the lord.

In this example, when two games are digested after shifting to the confrontation state, the game shifts to the non-AT state. When shifting to the non-AT state, the scene in which the lord is defeated is displayed as the winning / losing scene that continues from the confrontation scene. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 102 (b4) displays a scene in which the lord was defeated. In the confrontation animation in the fake confrontation production, in the scene where the lord was defeated, the character display area 1571 still disappears, but the display of the production information display area 1572 is restored.

Further, immediately before FIG. 102 (b4), the watermelon symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in the shinobi additional lottery process of step S132p shown in FIG. 80, the face image sp of the shinobi character is additionally displayed. Here, since the face image of each character disappears due to the disappearance of the character display area 1571, the face image sp of the Shinobi character is also hidden. The value is added. In FIG. 102 (b4), the count value of the first P counter is increased by 20 points to 78. In addition, the count value of the second P counter has also increased to 78. Further, the point number display PN of the revived production information display area 1572 is also set to "078". The increase of 20 points here is due to the fact that the watermelon symbol combination is stopped and displayed, so the added value of the character of the lord is as high as 10 points, and that 10 points is doubled by the shinobi. be.

The point number display PN in FIG. 102 (b2) is increased by 2 points, the point number display PN in FIG. 102 (b3) is increased by 1 point, and the point number display PN in FIG. 102 (b4) is increased by 20 points. It may be performed by the animation of the second addition display Tad shown in FIG. 100 (b3). Alternatively, when the number of characters is changed (erased or increased), the player does not know the change in the number of characters because the characters are hidden, and when the animation of the second addition display Tad is displayed, the game is played. Since the person may be confused on the contrary, the animation of the second addition display Tad may not be displayed.

In FIG. 102 (b5), the false confrontation state is changed to the non-AT state, and the animation of the lord and the old man in the palace in the castle corresponding to the non-AT state is displayed again on the effect image display device 157. When the false confrontation state is changed to the non-AT state, that is, when the false confrontation is defeated and the non-AT state is changed, neither the 1st P counter nor the 1st lap counter is reset, and the number of points and the number of laps up to that point are inherited. As shown in FIG. 102 (b5), the count value of the first P counter is 078, the count value of the second P counter is 078, and the point number display PN in the effect image display device 157 is also 078. Further, although the count values of the first lap counter and the second lap counter are not shown, they are both 1, and the lap count display LN in the effect image display device 157 is also “1st lap”. Furthermore, the display of the character display area 1571 has been restored, and in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the shinobi that was to have been won and additionally displayed in the shinobi additional lottery process. The face image sp of the character of is also displayed.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example in which the first P counter is reset.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 103 is an example when the setting is changed.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 103 is an example in the non-AT state, and the animation of the lord and the old man in the palace in the castle corresponding to the non-AT state is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157. .. Further, in the character display area 1571 in FIG. 103 (a1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image hp of the princess character and the face image jp of the grandfather character are also displayed. There is. Further, both the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown, are 2, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 is a display of "second lap". Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 115, the count value of the second P counter is also 115, and "115" is displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572. Further, the zone display is displayed in the effect information display area 1572 in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103 (a1). The zone display here is also represented by cross-hatching as in FIG. 102 (a8), and the zone display is displayed in the portion of the effect information display area 1572 excluding the lap count display LN.

In the state shown in FIG. 103 (a1), the front door 102 is opened, the power is temporarily turned off, the setting change switch (not shown) is operated, and then the power is turned on (power is restored).

FIG. 103 (a2) is a diagram showing a state after the setting is changed. As shown in FIG. 103 (a2), after the setting is changed, the count value of the first P counter is reset to 0, the count value of the second P counter is also 0, and the number of points in the effect information display area 1572. "000" is displayed on the display PN. Further, the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown here, are 0, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 is the display of "0th lap". After the setting is changed, the count value of the 1st P counter is not set to 0, but a predetermined value other than 0 is set, or a value based on the count value before the setting change (for example, a value obtained by halving 115). The value of the integer part (57)) may be set, the value selected by lottery from a plurality of values may be set, or the value of the integer part of the value obtained by halving the selected value may be set. The same applies to the count value of the first round counter. Further, in the character display area 1571, the face image hp of the princess character and the face image jp of the grandfather character disappear, and one face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character is displayed.

In the first game after the setting change is completed, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. That is, it corresponds to the stop of the lost symbol when the number of laps is 0 and the number of points is 0 in the non-AT state. As described above, the point increase condition in step S134a shown in FIG. 83A is not satisfied when the lost symbol is stopped when the number of laps is 0 and the number of points is 0 in the non-AT state. As shown in FIG. 103 (a3), the count value of the 1st P counter remains 0 and the count value of the 2nd P counter also remains 0 even after the lost symbol is stopped, and the effect information display. "000" is still displayed in the point number display PN of the area 1572. Further, the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown here, remain 0, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 also remains the display of "0th lap". Is.

Then, in the next game, the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned point increase condition is satisfied, and one point addition is won in the point distribution lottery. As shown in FIG. 103 (a4), the count value of the first P counter is 001, and the count value of the second P counter is also 001. Further, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 has also changed from the display of "000" to the display of "001". The addition of the point number display PN is the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition display ad2 (display of "+1") described with reference to FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). (Display of "+1") It is done by animation, but those animations are omitted here. Further, since the point number display PN is changed to the display of "001", the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572. Also, in the non-AT state, when the number of laps is 0 and the number of points is 0, when a prize is first won in addition to the loss, 1 is added to the count value of the first lap counter, and the count value of the second lap counter is also It becomes 1, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 also changes to the display of "first lap".

Subsequently, in the next game, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 103 (a5), the count value of the first P counter is incremented by 1 to become 002, and the count value of the second P counter is also the same. It is 002. Further, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 has also changed from the display of "001" to the display of "002". A zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 103 is an example in the case of shifting from the CZ state to the non-AT state.

In FIG. 103 (b1), the CZ state ends. As shown in FIG. 103 (a2), the count value of the first P counter at the end of the CZ state is 115, and the count value of the second P counter is also 115. In the CZ state, the effect information display area 1572 is not displayed, and the point number display PN is not displayed either. Further, although the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown here, are 2, neither the lap count display LN nor the lap count display LN is displayed.

In FIG. 103 (b2), the non-AT state has been entered, and the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state. Immediately after shifting from the CZ state to the non-AT state, the count value of the first P counter is reset to 0, the count value of the second P counter is also 0, and the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. Is displayed as "000". Further, the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown here, are 0, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 is the display of "0th lap". Immediately after shifting from the CZ state to the non-AT state, the count value of the first P counter does not become 0, but a predetermined value other than 0 is set, or a value based on the count value before the setting change (for example). , The value of the integer part of the value obtained by halving 115 (57)) is set, the value selected by lottery from multiple values is set, or the value of the integer part of the value obtained by halving the selected value. May be set. The same applies to the count value of the first round counter. Further, in the character display area 1571, one face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed.

In the first game after shifting to the non-AT state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. That is, it corresponds to the stop of the lost symbol when the number of laps is 0 and the number of points is 0 in the non-AT state. Again, the point increase condition in step S134a shown in FIG. 83 (a) is not satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 103 (b3), the count value of the first P counter remains 0 even after the lost symbol is stopped. The count value of the second P counter is also 0, and the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 is also displayed as "000". Further, the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown here, remain 0, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 also remains the display of "0th lap". Is.

Then, in the next game, the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned point increase condition is satisfied, and one point addition is won in the point distribution lottery. As shown in FIG. 103 (b4), the count value of the first P counter is 001, and the count value of the second P counter is also 001. Further, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 has also changed from the display of "000" to the display of "001". The addition of the point number display PN is the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition display ad2 (display of "+1") described with reference to FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). (Display of "+1") It is done by animation, but those animations are omitted here. Further, since the point number display PN is changed to the display of "001", the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572. Also, in the non-AT state, when the number of laps is 0 and the number of points is 0, when a prize is won for the first time other than a loss, 1 is added to the count value of the first lap counter, and the count value of the second lap counter is also It becomes 1, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 also changes to the display of "first lap".

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of power interruption and recovery. The examples shown in FIG. 104 are all in the non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle, corresponding to the non-AT state.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 104 is an example in which the power is cut off and restored in a state where the zone display is not displayed.

In the character display area 1571 in FIG. 104 (a1), one face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed. Further, both the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown, are 2, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 is a display of "second lap". Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 115, the count value of the second P counter is also 115, and "115" is displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572. The zone display is not displayed in the effect information display area 1572 in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 104 (a1).

In the state shown in FIG. 104 (a1), the power is cut off, but the power is restored immediately. The same applies when the power is turned off and then turned on the next morning in the state shown in FIG. 104 (a1).

As shown in FIG. 104 (a2), the count value of the first P counter after power recovery is 115, which is the same as the count value at the time of power failure, but the count value of the second P counter is 0, and the effect information. "000" is also displayed in the point number display PN of the display area 1572. Further, the count value of the first lap counter (not shown) is 2, which is the same as the count value at the time of power failure, but the count value of the second lap counter is 0, and the lap count display LN is also "0th lap." Is displayed.

In the first game after the power is restored, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. That is, it corresponds to the stop of the lost symbol when the value of the first P counter is not 0 and the value of the first lap counter is not 0 even in the non-AT state. Therefore, the point increase condition in step S134a shown in FIG. 83A is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 104A3, the count value of the first P counter is 156 by adding 1. However, as described above, when the power is cut off and restored, the point increase command for each character is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 until a winning combination other than the loss is won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104 (a3), the count value of the second P counter remains 0, and the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 also remains "000" and is displayed as an increase. Will not be done.

In the second game after the power is restored, the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104 (a4), the count value of the first P counter is 157 by further adding 1. In addition, by winning a role other than the loss, in step S134 (c) shown in FIG. 83 (a), a point increase command for the character of the lord indicating that the character is increased by 1 point is prepared, and step S211 shown in FIG. 77. It is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of. As a result, the count value of the second P counter becomes 1 by adding 1 to the value of 0 so far, and "001" is also displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (a4). Has been done. The addition of the point number display PN is the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition display ad2 (display of "+1") described with reference to FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). (Display of "+1") It is done by animation, but those animations are omitted here. Further, since the point number display PN is changed to the display of "001", the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572.

Also, regarding the number of laps, it is included to add a value of 1 to the point increase command by winning the first prize other than the loss after the power is restored due to the power failure. The count value also becomes 1 by adding 1 to the value of 0 so far, and "1st lap" is also displayed in the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (a4).

The example shown in the center of FIG. 104 is an example in which the power is cut off and restored while the zone display is displayed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown on the left side of FIG. 104 will be mainly described.

In the character display area 1571 in FIG. 104 (b1), one face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed. Further, both the count value of the first lap counter and the count value of the second lap counter, which are not shown, are 2, and the lap count display LN of the effect information display area 1572 is a display of "second lap". Further, it is shown that the count value of the first P counter is 35, the count value of the second P counter is also 35, and "35" is displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572. In addition, since the count value of the second P counter is 35, the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572.

In the state shown in FIG. 104 (b1), the power is cut off, but the power is restored immediately. The same applies when the power is turned off and then turned on the next morning in the state shown in FIG. 104 (b1).

As shown in FIG. 104 (b2), the count value of the first P counter after power recovery is 35, which is the same as the count value at the time of power failure, but the count value of the second P counter is 0, and the effect information. "000" is also displayed in the point number display PN of the display area 1572. Further, since the count value of the second P counter is 0, the zone display represented by cross-hatching is not displayed in the effect information display area 1572. Further, the count value of the first lap counter (not shown) is 2, which is the same as the count value at the time of power failure, but the count value of the second P counter is 0, and the lap count display LN is also "0th lap". Is displayed.

In the first game after the power is restored, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, but the point increase condition in step S134a shown in FIG. 83 (a) is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 104 (b3). , The count value of the 1st P counter is 36 by adding 1. However, also here, since the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the point increase command is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and as shown in FIG. 104 (b3), the count value of the second P counter remains 0. Yes, "000" is still displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

In the second game after the power is restored, the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104 (b4), the count value of the first P counter is 37 by further adding 1. Further, by winning a role other than the loss, the point increase command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the count value of the second P counter becomes 1, and the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (b4). "001" is also displayed in the point number display PN. The addition of the point number display PN here is also the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition described using FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). It is performed by display ad2 (display of "+1") animation, but those animations are omitted here. Further, since the point number display PN is changed to the display of "001", the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572.

As for the number of laps, the count value of the second lap counter (not shown) becomes 1 due to the first prize other than the loss, and the lap number display LN of the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (b4) also becomes. "First lap" is displayed.

After that, a plurality of games are digested with one face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character displayed in the character display area 1571, and the count of the first P counter is as shown in FIG. 104 (b5). The value becomes 101, and the count value of the second P counter becomes 65. Looking at the presence / absence of the zone display shown in FIG. 94 (c), if the count value is 101, the zone display should be displayed, but the presence / absence of the zone display is determined by the count value of the second P counter. In the state of FIG. 104 (b5), since the count value of the second P counter is 65, the zone display is not displayed, and the zone display is displayed in the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (b) 5. do not have.

The example shown in the upper half on the right side of FIG. 104 is an example in which two face images of the character are displayed and the power is cut off and restored. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown on the left side of FIG. 104 will be mainly described, and overlapping description will be omitted.

In the character display area 1571 in FIG. 104 (c1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image hp of the character of the princess is also displayed, and a total of two face images are displayed. As described in the description of FIG. 80, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an additional flag for each character other than the default character, Tonosama. In the state of FIG. 104 (c1), the princess addition flag is set to on.

In the state shown in FIG. 104 (c1), the power is cut off, but the power is restored immediately. The same applies when the power is turned off and then turned on the next morning in the state shown in FIG. 104 (c1).

As shown in FIG. 104 (c2), only the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character is displayed in the character display area 1571 after the power is restored, and the face of the princess character displayed at the time of power failure is displayed. The image hp is not displayed. However, the princess addition flag prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is set to ON. Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (c2), the count value of the first P counter after power recovery is 115, which is the same as the count value at the time of power failure, but the count value of the second P counter is 0. "000" is also displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

In the first game after the power is restored, the bell symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 104 (c3), the count value of the first P counter is obtained by adding 11 to the value of 115 so far. It is 126. Here, the added 11 points is the sum of 1 point for the lord and 10 points for the princess. On the other hand, as for the count value of the 2nd P counter, only 1 point for the lord is added to the value of 0 so far. As described above, for characters other than the default character, Tonosama's character, steps S352b and S352c shown in FIG. 94A are executed only for the character for which the additional flag is set to ON. By that. That is, since the additional flag of the princess is set to off by the power interruption and recovery, in step S352b and step S352c, even if the point increase command for the princess character is transmitted, it is not processed and the character of the lord is not processed. Since only the point increase command is processed, only 1 point for the lord is added to the count value of the 2nd P counter. One point is added to the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 in FIG. 104 (c3) according to the count value of the second P counter, and the value is "001". In addition, since the count value of the second P counter is 1, the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (c3).

The addition of the point number display PN here is also the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition described using FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). It is performed by display ad2 (display of "+1") animation, but those animations are omitted here.

The example shown in the lower half on the right side of FIG. 104 is an example in which the power is turned off and restored while three facial images of the character are displayed. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in the upper half on the right side of FIG. 104 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the character display area 1571 in FIG. 104 (d1), in addition to the face image tp of the character of the lord who is the default character, the face image hp of the princess character and the face image sp of the shinobi character are also displayed, for a total of three. The face image is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 104 (d1), the power is cut off, but the power is restored immediately. The same applies when the power is turned off and then turned on the next morning in the state shown in FIG. 104 (d1).

As shown in FIG. 104 (d2), only the face image tp of the character of the lord, which is the default character, is displayed in the character display area 1571 after the power is restored, and the face of the princess character displayed at the time of power failure. The image hp and the face image sp of the Shinobi character are not displayed. However, the princess addition flag and the shinobi addition flag prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are set to ON. Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (d2), the count value of the first P counter after power recovery is 115, which is the same as the count value at the time of power failure, but the count value of the second P counter is 0. "000" is also displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572.

In the first game after the power is restored, the bell symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 104 (d3), the count value of the first P counter is obtained by adding 22 to the value of 115 so far. It is 137. Here, the added 22 points are 1 point for the lord and 10 points for the princess, doubled by the shinobi. On the other hand, as for the count value of the 2nd P counter, only 1 point for the lord is added to the value of 0 so far. One point is added to the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 in FIG. 104 (d3) according to the count value of the second P counter, and the value is "001". In addition, since the count value of the second P counter is 1, the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572 shown in FIG. 104 (c3).

The addition of the point number display PN here is also the animation of the first addition display ad1 (display of "+1") and the second addition described using FIGS. 97 (a2) to 97 (a4). It is performed by display ad2 (display of "+1") animation, but those animations are omitted here.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example in which the count value of the second P counter matches the count value of the first P counter after the power is cut off and restored.

FIGS. 105 (1) to 105 (4) are the same as those of FIGS. 104 (a1) to 104 (a4) except that the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter are different. Therefore, the description is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 105 (5) and thereafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 101 will be mainly described, and duplicated explanations will be omitted.

In this example, the number of true confrontation points is set to 138 points. Therefore, in the next game, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the count value of the first P counter increases by 1 point to 138, the effect state shifts to the confrontation precursor state. However, as shown in FIG. 105 (4), the value of the point number display PN in the effect information display area 1572 is 001, and the player who sees this value thinks that he / she has shifted to the confrontation precursor effect with a small number of points. , I have the illusion that the pull is strong. As a result, the interest of the player's game may be enhanced.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105 (5) displays an animation in which the lord holds a sword corresponding to the confrontation precursor state, and the characters "confrontation precursor effect" are displayed in the upper right of the display screen. ing. Further, when the state shifts to the confrontation precursor state, both the character display area 1571 and the effect information display area 1572 disappear. In FIG. 105 (5), the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter are each increased by 1 point, the count value of the first P counter is 138, and the count value of the second P counter is 2.

Even in the first game after shifting to the confrontation precursor state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 105 (6), the count value of the 1st P counter and the count value of the 2nd P counter each increase by 1 point, and the second The count value of the 1P counter is 139, and the count value of the second P counter is 3.

Even in the second game after the transition to the confrontation precursor state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this example, when the two games are digested after the transition to the confrontation precursor state, the confrontation state is entered. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105 (7) displays a confrontation animation in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other corresponding to the confrontation state, and the character display of "confrontation effect" is displayed in the upper right of the display screen. It has been done. The confrontation production here is a true confrontation production. The confrontation scene in the confrontation animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105 (7). In FIG. 105 (7), the count value of the first P counter and the count value of the second P counter are each increased by 1 point, the count value of the first P counter is 140, and the count value of the second P counter is 4.

Even in the first game after shifting to the confrontation state, the lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 105 (8), the count value of the 1st P counter and the count value of the 2nd P counter each increase by 1 point, and the 1st P counter. The count value of is 141, and the count value of the second P counter is 5. Eventually, the second game is started after the transition to the confrontation state, and the symbol combination (pseudo BB symbol) of the replay combination 2 which is the replay symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105 (9) displays a scene in which the lord has won. In the confrontation precursor state and the true confrontation state, the effect information display area 1572 remained disappeared together with the character display area 1571, but in the scene where the lord won, the display of the effect information display area 1572 is restored. The character display area 1571 is still disappearing. In FIG. 105 (9), the count value of the first P counter is further increased by 1 point, and the count value of the first P counter is 142. Further, since the pseudo BB symbol is stopped and displayed, in step S196e shown in FIG. 91, the transmission preparation of the first P counter value command including the count value (here 142) of the first P counter is performed, and the first P is prepared. The counter value command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of step S211 shown in FIG. 77. As a result, in FIG. 105 (9), the count value of the second P counter is 142, which is the same as the count value of the first P counter, and “142” is also displayed in the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572. .. The player was notified of a different value (false value) after the power was restored, but the count value (true value) of the first P counter is notified. In addition, since the count value of the second P counter is 142, the zone display represented by cross-hatching is displayed in the effect information display area 1572. Further, the 1st P counter value command also includes the value of the 1st lap command, and the count value of the 1st lap counter and the count value of the 2nd lap counter, which are not shown, are 2, and the effect information. The lap count display LN of the display area 1572 is a display of "second lap".

Here, the count value of the first P counter is displayed by displaying the scene in which the lord has won, that is, confirming the transition to the pseudo BB state (step S193 (i) shown in FIG. 89, step S196 (c) shown in FIG. 91). Although the (true value) is notified, the count value (true value) of the first P counter is also confirmed by the confirmation of the transition to the AT state (step S193 (m) shown in FIG. 89, step S196 (g) shown in FIG. 91). Value) is notified. Further, the count value (true value) of the first P counter may be notified by winning a specific combination (for example, the chance eye).

In FIG. 105 (10), the state shifts to the pseudo BB1 state, and the animation in which the lord is raised corresponding to the pseudo BB state is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. In the pseudo BB state, the effect information display area 1572 disappears again, and neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed. On the other hand, the effect of the operation condition notification is executed, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order according to the operation condition notification. As a result, the combination of bell symbols is stopped and displayed, and medals are paid out. The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the CZ state after 20 games have been digested. In FIG. 105 (11), the symbol of the 20th game is stopped, and the effect image display device 157 is performing the end effect of the pseudo BB state. Further, FIG. 105 (11) shows that neither the count value of the 1st P counter nor the count value of the 2nd P counter has changed since the scene in which the lord won was displayed, and remains 142. Has been done.

In FIG. 105 (12), the transition to the CZ state is entered, and the animation of the lord running in the wilderness corresponding to the CZ state is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. Even in the CZ state, neither the character display area 1571 nor the effect information display area 1572 is displayed.

In this example as well, the final game corresponding to the 32nd game after the CZ state is started is started without winning the AT lottery, winning the pseudo BB lottery, and stopping and displaying the pseudo BB symbol. On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105 (13), it is displayed that the number of remaining games until the transition to the non-AT state is 0. Further, FIG. 105 (13a) also shows that neither the count value of the first P counter nor the count value of the second P counter has changed and remains 142.

In the figure (14) following FIG. 105 (13), the CZ state is changed to the non-AT state, and the effect image display device 157 has an animation in which the lord and the old man are in the palace in the castle corresponding to the non-AT state. It is displayed. When the state shifts from the CZ state to the non-AT state, the first P counter is reset, and as shown in FIG. 105 (14), the count value of the first P counter is 0, and the count value of the second P counter is also 0. Further, the count value of the first lap counter (not shown here) is also reset to 0, and the count value of the second lap counter also becomes 0. On the display screen of the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101 (11a), the display of the character display area 1571 and the display of the effect information display area 1572 are restored, and the character display area 1571 is the face of the character of the lord. One image tp is displayed, the point number display PN of the effect information display area 1572 is a display representing 0, and the lap count display LN is also a display representing the 0th lap.

As described above, when the CZ state is changed to the non-AT state, the 1st P counter is reset and the count value of the 1st P counter becomes 0, but at the time of the transition to the confrontation precursor state (FIG. 105 (5)). , The first P counter may be reset. By doing so, the player may be able to know the points of increase from the confrontation precursor state to the confrontation state. Further, the advantage of the pseudo BB (for example, the difference in the number of games in which the pseudo BB continues) may be changed by the points increased in the period from the start of the confrontation precursor state to the end of the confrontation state.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect example described so far is applied to a pachinko machine.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 106 is an example of an animation in which the point display increases.

FIG. 106 (a1) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 in which a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (a1), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed. A character display area 1571 is also provided on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect information display area 1572 is also provided below the character display area 1571. In the effect information display area 1572, a point number display PN and a lap count display LN are displayed. Further, a variable icon ci is displayed next to the effect information display area 1572, and a hold icon hi is displayed next to the variable icon ci. The variable icon ci is larger than the hold icon hi, and the display mode is also different. In this example, it is a display mode of hatching that descends to the left. The variable icon ci is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon hi becomes the change icon ci at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon hi. The variable icon ci is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified, and can be seen as an icon related to hold, and is held in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held. You can think of it as a kind of icon. It should be noted that the erasure timing of the fluctuation icon may be a timing before, a timing of the same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the result of the change is notified. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (a1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, on the right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved number display of special figure 1 (here, "3") is displayed in order from the top, and it lights up in gray to notify that special figure 1 is changing. The 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed, the number of pending numbers of the special figure 2 is displayed (here, "3"), and the black color is turned off to notify that the special figure 2 is stopped. 4 symbols, the number of reserved numbers of the normal figure are displayed (here, "0"), and the 4th symbol of the normal figure, which is turned off in black to notify that the normal figure is stopped, is displayed.

In FIG. 106 (a2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 6) is stopped and displayed. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the animation of the first addition display ad1 is started. That is, the first addition display ad1 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears from the face image tp of the character of the lord, and a part of the face image tp is overlapped by the first addition display ad1. The face image tp is more difficult to see than before the first addition display ad1 appears.

FIGS. 106 (a2) to 106 (a5) correspond to the final display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 106 (a2), the first addition display ad1 moves away from the face image tp of the character of the lord. ing. The transparency of the first addition display ad1 increases while moving, and the first addition display ad1 shown in FIG. 106 (a3) is about to disappear. On the other hand, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the animation of the second addition display ad2 is started. That is, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the second addition display ad2 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears. The second addition display ad2 shown in FIG. 106 (a3) is not disappearing and is firmly displayed. The second addition display ad2 moves in a direction approaching the point number display PN, and the transparency increases while moving, and becomes a part of the point number display PN (display of "056") shown in FIG. 106 (a4). The overlapped second addition display ad2 is disappearing. In FIG. 106 (a4), the first addition display ad1 has completely disappeared.

In FIG. 106 (a5), the second addition display ad2 disappears completely, and the point number display PN is “057” representing the same value as the count value of the second P counter. That is, the point number display PN is changed to the display in which one point is added.

The example shown on the left side of FIG. 106 described above is an example in which the increase points are added for each fluctuation stop, but even if they are added during the fluctuation, the pseudo-stop of the pseudo-continuous notice, the reach, and the SP reach. Often, when a specified point is reached, a privilege (for example, reach, SP reach, small hit, big hit, wallpaper, music, etc.) may be given to the player.

The example shown in the center of FIG. 106 is an example of giving a point increase notice using the fluctuation icon. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown on the left side of FIG. 106 will be mainly described, and overlapping description will be omitted.

The variable icon ci shown in FIG. 106 (b1) has a different display mode from the variable icon ci shown in FIG. 106 (a1), and a number 5 is displayed in the hatching at the lower left. The display of the number 5 is started when the currently performed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the addition amount in the animation of the addition amount display, that is, the increase amount of the number of points displayed on the point number display PN. It is a display that announces. In the pachinko machine, the point increase setting process of step S134b shown in FIG. 83 is executed immediately before the start of the symbol change.

In addition, with respect to the reserved portion, it is possible to pre-read the point increase setting process according to the fact that the ball has entered the special drawing start opening. The first and second hold icons hi from the left shown in FIG. 106 (b1) have different display modes from the other hold icons hi, and the first hold icon hi from the left displays a number 10 from the left. The number 20 is displayed on the second hold icon hi. The number displayed on the hold icon is a look-ahead notice that announces an increase in the number of points that will increase when the hold of the hold icon hi is exhausted and the symbol is stopped.

In FIG. 106 (b2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 6) is stopped and displayed. Also, the variable icon ci has been erased. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the animation of the first addition display ad1 is started, and the display of "+5" appears as the first addition display ad1. That is, the number displayed on the variable icon ci appears as the first addition display ad1.

The following is the same as the example shown on the left side of FIG. 106, except that the numbers of the first addition display ad1 and the second addition display ad2 are different (in this example, it is "+5" instead of "+1"). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As a result of pre-reading, if there is a big hit in the hold, the zone display may be performed separately from the point arrival, or may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 106 is an example of a point increase animation using a variable icon. Hereinafter, the differences between the example shown on the left side and the example shown in the center of FIG. 106 will be mainly described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

The variable icon ci shown in FIG. 106 (c1) is also a display mode in which the number 5 is displayed in the hatching downward to the left, and the increase in the number of points displayed on the point number display PN is foretold. The first hold icon hi from the left is a look-ahead notice display mode for notifying that the hold icon hi will increase by 10 points when the hold is exhausted and the symbol is stopped, and is the second from the left. The hold icon hi of is a display mode of the look-ahead notice that announces an increase of 20 points.

In FIG. 106 (c2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 6) is stopped and displayed. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the animation of the first addition display ad1 is started, and the first addition display ad1 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears. Further, the variable icon ci foretelling an increase of 5 points has finished its role as a variable icon, and has begun to move in a direction approaching the point number display PN as one of the second addition display. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as a second addition icon adi. The 5 points of the second addition icon adi may be the increase of the character of the lord, or may be the increase of the icon adi itself of the second addition, which is irrelevant to the character of the lord.

The first addition display ad1 shown in FIG. 106 (c3) is about to disappear. On the other hand, on the effect information display area 1572 side, the second addition display ad2 (here, "+1" is displayed) appears. The second addition icon adi and the second addition display ad2 overlap, and in FIG. 106 (c4), a part of the point number display PN (display of "056") and the second addition icon adi , The second addition display ad2 overlaps. Further, the transparency of both the second addition icon adi and the second addition display ad2 is increased.

In FIG. 106 (c5), both the second addition icon adi and the second addition display ad2 disappear completely, and in the point number display PN, 6 points are added to the previous 56 points, and the count value of the second P counter. The display is "062", which represents the same value as.

In the above description,
"Setting change to change the setting value previously set to the new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b)] having different degrees of advantage of the player. Setting change means for processing [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 for executing the setting change process shown in FIG. 78] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means can easily win a lottery for shifting to an effect state (pseudo BB state) in which the operation condition notification effect is performed (for example, the table of FIG. 785). It is a means capable of displaying the first display [for example, the point number display PN or the display in the effect information display area 1572].
When the setting change process is performed, the display means displays a certain display content [for example, a predetermined display content (for example, a display content representing an initial value or a specific value, or a specific symbol is displayed). Displayed content that is displayed or display content that does not display anything), display content that is not predetermined but is inevitably displayed (as an example, display content that represents a certain value or a certain symbol is displayed. Display content to be displayed or display content in which nothing is displayed) is a means for displaying the first display by [display content determined randomly or in order from two or more] [for example, FIG. 103 (a2)].
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the same display content as the certain display content when there is a power interruption / recovery [for example, FIG. 104 (a2)].
The first condition including that the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter, referred to as "first result") [for example, the result of winning other than the loss] after the setting change process is performed [for example, , (1) Win a replay, (2) Win a bell and win with a 97% probability shown in the point increase setting table shown in Fig. 83 (b), (3) Win a bell and see Fig. 83 (b) When [Winning with a probability of 3% shown in the indicated point increase setting table] is established, the display content of the first display is the first degree of change [for example, if the above (1), the increase is 1 point, the above ( Even if it is 2), it increases by 1 point, and if it is (3) above, it increases by 5 points] [for example, FIG. 103 (a4)].
When the first condition is satisfied after the power is restored [for example, the power may be restored immediately after the power is cut off, or the power may be turned off at night and the power may be restored the next morning]. Further, the display content of the first display changes according to the first degree of change [for example, FIG. 104 (a4)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game console, since the first display changes with the same degree of change after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off and restored, the player is not determined whether the setting is deferred or not. May be able to play.

In addition, in the above description,
"Setting change to change the setting value previously set to the new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b)] having different degrees of advantage of the player. Setting change means for processing [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 for executing the setting change process shown in FIG. 78] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means can easily win a lottery for shifting to an effect state (pseudo BB state) in which the operation condition notification effect is performed (for example, the table of FIG. 785). It is a means capable of displaying the first display [for example, the point number display PN or the effect information display area 1572].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display related to the effect [for example, a zone display].
The second display is a display displayed according to the display content [for example, the displayed value] of the first display [for example, FIG. 94 (c)].
When the setting change process is performed, the display means displays a certain display content [for example, a predetermined display content (for example, a display content representing an initial value or a specific value, or a specific symbol is displayed). Displayed content that is displayed or display content that does not display anything), display content that is not predetermined but is inevitably displayed (as an example, display content that represents a certain value or a certain symbol is displayed. Display content to be displayed or display content in which nothing is displayed) is a means for displaying the first display by [display content determined randomly or in order from two or more] [for example, FIG. 103 (a2)].
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the same display content as the certain display content when there is a power interruption / recovery [for example, FIG. 104 (a2)].
The first condition including that the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter, referred to as "first result") [for example, the result of winning other than the loss] after the setting change process is performed [for example, , (1) Win a replay, (2) Win a bell and win with a 97% probability shown in the point increase setting table shown in Fig. 83 (b), (3) Win a bell and see Fig. 83 (b) When [Winning with a probability of 3% shown in the indicated point increase setting table] is established, the display content of the first display is the first degree of change [for example, if the above (1), the increase is 1 point, the above ( Even if it is 2), it increases by 1 point, and if it is (3) above, it increases by 5 points] [for example, FIG. 103 (a4)].
When the first condition is satisfied after the power is restored [for example, the power may be restored immediately after the power is cut off, or the power may be turned off at night and the power may be restored the next morning]. Further, the display content of the first display changes according to the first degree of change [for example, FIG. 104 (a4)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even with this game console, the first display changes with the same degree of change after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off, so that the player cannot determine whether the setting is deferred or not. You may be able to play. In addition, since the display ratio of the second display can be matched between after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off and restored, the player is allowed to play without being determined whether the setting is deferred or not. May be possible.

Here, "related to the production" may be "related to the privilege" or "related to the production point".

Further, a counting means for counting the benefits may be provided.

The counting means may be a means in which the count value may change depending on the result of the game.

The counting means may be a means in which the count value becomes a certain value when the setting change process is performed.

Further, the first display may be a display of display contents relating to the count value in the counting means or a display of display contents different from the count value in the counting means.

The count value in the counting means does not have to be a value that changes due to the occurrence of power interruption and recovery.

Further, the second display may be a display that is displayed or hidden according to the display content of the first display.

The second display may be a display indicating that the player's advantage is relatively high.

A second counting means for obtaining information representing the count value of the counting means and updating the value is provided, and the second display may be a display displayed according to the value of the second counting means. Alternatively, the display may be displayed or hidden according to the value of the second counting means.

The value of the second counting means may be a value that may change due to the occurrence of power interruption and recovery.

again,
"The certain display content is a display content based on a certain rule [for example, a display content according to a processing program, more specifically, a display content defined by the processing program (as an example, an initial value or a specific display content). Display content that represents the value of, display content that displays a specific symbol, display content that does not display anything), display content that is determined by lottery or in order from two or more items]].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the display means is a means for displaying the first display with display contents based on a certain rule when the setting change process is performed, and the display means has a power failure / recovery. In some cases, it may be a means for displaying the first display with the display contents based on the certain rule.

Further, the certain display content may be a display content representing an amount based on a certain rule.

again,
"A certain result in which the result of the first game after the setting change process is performed is different from the first result (hereinafter referred to as" second result ") [for example, the result of winning a loss]. Before and after, there was no change in the display content of the first display [for example, the display content in which the point number display PN represents 0] [for example, FIG. 103 (a3)].
The result of the first game after the power failure recovery [for example, the power recovery may be immediate after the power failure, or the power may be restored at night and the next morning] is the second result. There is no change in the display content of the first display before and after the result of [For example, FIG. 104 (a3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

If the second result is obtained both after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off and restored, the display content of the first display does not change, so it is determined whether or not the setting is deferred. It may be possible to let the player play the game without being played.

Also here, since the display ratio of the second display can be matched between after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off and restored, the player can play the game without determining whether or not the setting is deferred. You may be able to do it.

again,
"A counting means for counting the effect [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] is provided.
The counting means may change the count value according to the result of the game [for example, a winning combination] [for example, the point distribution shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b)].
The counting means is a means in which the count value becomes a certain value [for example, 0] when the setting change process is performed [for example, FIG. 103 (a2)].
The first display includes a case where the display content related to the count value in the counting means is displayed [for example, FIG. 105 (9)] and a case where the display content is different from the count value in the counting means []. For example, there is FIG. 105 (2)].
The count value in the counting means changes due to the occurrence of power interruption / recovery [for example, immediate recovery after power failure or power recovery at night and recovery the next morning]. [For example, FIG. 105 (2)], instead of the value to be
The count value in the counting means is a value that does not change when the result of the first game after the setting change process is the second result [for example, the result of winning a loss]. [For example, FIG. 103 (a3)],
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes when the result of the first game after the power interruption and recovery is the second result [for example, the result of winning a loss] [. For example, FIG. 104 (a3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if it is the second result after the power is cut off and restored, the count value in the counting means changes, so that the player does not lose.

again,
"The certain display content is a display content related to the count value in the counting means [for example, a numerical value representing the count value, a non-numerical symbol representing the count value (0 as a specific example) (as a specific example). Is a horizontal bar symbol), a meter display that represents the count value, a color or shade that represents the count value, a shape or size that represents the count value, and a number that represents the count value].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A result in which the result of the game is different from the second result after the setting change process is performed [for example, the first result or a result other than the first result (for example, the third result)]. After that, the second condition including the fact that the result of the subsequent game is the second result [for example, the result of winning a loss] [for example, only the face image tp of the character of Mr. (A) is Display, (B) Winning with a 97% probability shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b) with only the face image jp of the grandfather displayed, (C) Face image jp of the grandfather. When only is displayed and the winning is established with a probability of 3% shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b), the display content of the first display is changed to the second degree of change [for example. , The above (A) increases by 1 point, the above (B) also increases by 1 point, and the above (C) increases by 5 points] [for example, FIG. 103 (a5)].
Even if the second condition is satisfied in the result of the subsequent game after the result of the game is different from the second result after the power is cut off and restored, the first display is displayed. The display content of is changed by the second degree of change [for example, FIG. 104 (a5)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

If the second condition is satisfied after the result is different from the second result both after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off and restored, the first display is displayed. Since the display content of the above changes with the degree of the second change, it may be possible for the player to play the game without determining whether or not the setting is deferred.

The result different from the second result may be, for example, the first result or a result other than the first result (for example, a third result).

The second degree of change may be the same as or different from the first degree of change.

When the result of the game is different from the second result after the setting change process is performed and then the second result is obtained, the count value in the counting means is the second result. The change before and after the change is represented by the first display.
Even when the result of the game is different from the second result after the power is cut off and the power is restored and the second result is obtained, the count value in the counting means is the same as the second result. The change before and after the change may be represented by the first indication.

again,
"The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the first display content when the setting change process is performed in a state where the count value in the count means is 1 or more [for example,. FIG. 103 (a1)],
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first display content when there is a power interruption / recovery in a state where the count value in the counting means is 1 or more [for example, FIG. 104 (a2)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the display content of the first display is the same after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off, it is possible to let the player play the game without further determining whether or not the setting is deferred. You may be able to do it.

again,
"The first display content is a display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is 0.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the display content of the first display is the same 0 after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off, the player is allowed to play the game without being further determined whether the setting is deferred or not. May be possible.

Further, in the above description, as a means for solving the problem of providing a game table that has been devised to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the set value has been changed.
"Setting change to change the setting value previously set to the new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b)] having different degrees of advantage of the player. Setting change means for processing [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 for executing the setting change process shown in FIG. 78] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
Counting means for counting the effect [for example, RAM 3 of the main control unit 300]
1st P counter prepared in 08] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means can easily win a lottery for shifting to an effect state (pseudo BB state) in which the operation condition notification effect is performed (for example, the table of FIG. 82 (c)) related to the effect [for example, the operation condition notification effect]. )] The first display [for example, the point number display PN or the display in the effect information display area 1572] is a means capable of displaying.
When the setting change process is performed, the display means displays a certain display content [for example, a predetermined display content (for example, a display content representing an initial value or a specific value, or a specific symbol is displayed). Displayed content that is displayed or display content that does not display anything), display content that is not predetermined but is inevitably displayed (as an example, display content that represents a certain value or a certain symbol is displayed. Display content to be displayed or display content in which nothing is displayed) is a means for displaying the first display by [display content determined randomly or in order from two or more] [for example, FIG. 103 (a2)].
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the same display content as the certain display content when there is a power interruption / recovery [for example, FIG. 104 (a2)].
After the setting change process is performed, the first condition including that the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") [for example, the result of winning a prize other than the loss] [ For example, (1) winning a replay, (2) winning a bell and winning with a 97% probability shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b), (3) winning a bell and drawing 83 (b). When [Winning with a probability of 3% shown in the point increase setting table] is established, the display content of the first display is the first degree of change [for example, if the above (1) is used, the above is increased by 1 point. Even if it is (2), it increases by 1 point, and if it is (3) above, it increases by 5 points] [for example, FIG. 103 (a4)].
When the first condition is satisfied after the power is restored [for example, the power may be restored immediately after the power is cut off, or the power may be turned off at night and the power may be restored the next morning]. Further, the display content of the first display changes according to the first degree of change [for example, FIG. 104 (a4)].
In the first game after the setting change process is performed, a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "second result") in which the result of the game is different from the first result (for example, the result of winning a loss). ], And before and after the second condition is satisfied, there is no change in the display content of the first display [for example, the display content in which the point number display PN represents 0] [for example, FIG. 103 (a3)). ],
In the first game after there is a power failure recovery [for example, the power may be restored immediately after the power failure, or the power may be restored at night and the next morning]. Even before and after the condition was satisfied, there was no change in the display content of the first display [for example, FIG. 104 (a3)].
The counting means may change the count value according to the result of the game [for example, a winning combination] [for example, the point distribution shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b)].
The counting means is a means in which the count value becomes a certain value [for example, 0] when the setting change process is performed [for example, FIG. 103 (a2)].
The first display includes a case where the display content related to the count value in the counting means is displayed [for example, FIG. 105 (9)] and a case where the display content is different from the count value in the counting means []. For example, there is FIG. 105 (2)].
The count value in the counting means changes due to the occurrence of power interruption / recovery [for example, immediate recovery after power failure or power recovery at night and recovery the next morning]. [For example, FIG. 105 (2)], instead of the value to be
The count value in the counting means is a value that does not change when the result of the first game after the setting change process is the second result [for example, the result of winning a loss]. [For example, FIG. 103 (a3)],
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes when the result of the first game after the power interruption and recovery is the second result [for example, the result of winning a loss] [. For example, FIG. 104 (a3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this solution, it is possible to provide a game table that has been devised to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the set value has been changed.

again,
"The certain display content is a display content based on a certain rule [for example, a display content according to a processing program, more specifically, a display content defined by the processing program (as an example, an initial value or a specific display content). Display content that represents the value of, display content that displays a specific symbol, display content that does not display anything), display content that is determined by lottery or in order from two or more items].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Electricity recovery means that the power was restored without performing the above setting change process after the power was cut off.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, it may be said that all of the power interruption and power recovery described so far means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut off.

In addition, in the above explanation,
"Setting change means for performing setting change processing [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 78] and
A counting means for counting the effect [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The count value in the counting means is a certain condition [for example, non-AT state] including that the result of the game is a certain result [for example, loss] in the first game after the setting change process is performed. It is a value that does not change before and after the confrontation precursor state or the confrontation state is satisfied [for example, the counter 1 shown in FIG. 103 (a2) and the counter 1 shown in FIG. 103 (a3)].
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example, the same as the counter 1 shown in FIG. 104 (a2). The counter 1] shown in a3).
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

again,
"A display means [for example, an effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a certain display related to the effect [for example, a point number display PN] is provided.
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the setting change process is performed [for example, the point number display PN shown in FIG. 103 (a2). Point number display PN shown in the same figure (a3)],
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example, the point number display PN shown in FIG. 104 (a2). Point number display PN shown in the figure (a3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above explanation,
"A counting means for counting the effect [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] is provided.
From the first state [for example, the CZ state or the state in which the setting 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is set] to the second state [for example, the non-AT] in which the player's advantage is lower than that of the first state. A game table in which the state may be changed to the state or the state in which setting 1 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is set].
The count value in the counting means is the result of a certain game [for example, in the first game after the state change [for example, the state change from the CZ state to the non-AT state or the setting change]]. It is a value that does not change before and after a certain condition including [loss] [for example, a non-AT state, a confrontation precursor state, or a confrontation state] is satisfied [for example, the counter 1 shown in FIG. 103 (b2)]. And the counter 1 shown in FIG. 103 (b3), or the counter 1 shown in FIG. 103 (a2) and the counter 1 shown in FIG. 103 (a3)].
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example, the same as the counter 1 shown in FIG. 104 (a2). The counter 1] shown in a3).
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A display means [for example, an effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a certain display related to the effect [for example, a point number display PN] is provided.
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the state change is performed [for example, the point number display PN shown in FIG. 103 (b2). Point number display PN shown in FIG. 10B, or point number display PN shown in FIG. 103 (a2) and point number display PN shown in FIG. 103 (a3)],.
The display content of the certain display does not change before and after the certain condition is satisfied in the first game after the power interruption and recovery [for example, the point number display PN shown in FIG. 104 (a2). Point number display PN shown in the figure (a3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Electricity recovery means that the power was restored without performing the above setting change process after the power was cut off.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. 106].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A counting means for counting the production [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
Equipped with
First state [For example, the value of the second lap counter is N and the value of the second lap counter is 0, the value of the second lap counter is 0 and the value of the second P pointer is M, the value of the second lap counter is N and The value of the second P pointer is M (however, N> 0, M> 0)] to the second state in which the player's advantage is lower than that of the first state [for example, the value of the second lap counter is 0 and The value of the second P pointer is 0] in the game console where the state may be changed [for example, the state may be changed by changing the setting, or the state may be changed by shifting the effect state from the CZ state to the non-AT state]. ,
The counting means is a means having a case where the count value changes according to the result of the game [for example, FIG. 83 (b)].
When the state change is made, the count value of the counting means is a certain value [for example, a value of 0].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display [for example, the point number display PN or the display in the effect information display area 1572].
The first display includes a case where the display content related to the count value in the counting means is displayed [for example, FIG. 105 (9)] and a case where the display content is different from the count value in the counting means []. For example, there is FIG. 105 (2)].
The count value in the counting means changes due to the occurrence of power interruption / recovery [for example, immediate recovery after power failure or power recovery at night and recovery the next morning]. [For example, FIG. 105 (2)], instead of the value to be
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the first display content when the state change is performed [for example, FIG. 103 (a2), FIG. 103 (b2)].
The display means is said to be the first when there is a power failure recovery [for example, the power may be restored immediately after the power failure, or the power may be restored at night and the next morning]. It is a means for displaying the first display by the display contents of [for example, FIG. 104 (a2)].
The first display content is a display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is the certain value.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the first display is displayed with the display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is 0, as in the case where the state change is performed when the power is cut off and restored from the first display, the first display is displayed. In some cases, the player may be allowed to play the game without determining whether or not the count value of the counting means is 1 or more, and further, how many.

The first display content may be a display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is 0.

In addition, in the above description,
"A counting means for counting the production [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
Equipped with
First state [For example, the value of the second lap counter is N and the value of the second lap counter is 0, the value of the second lap counter is 0 and the value of the second P pointer is M, the value of the second lap counter is N and The value of the second P pointer is M (however, N> 0, M> 0)] to the second state in which the player's advantage is lower than that of the first state [for example, the value of the second lap counter is 0 and The value of the second P pointer is 0] in the game console where the state may be changed [for example, the state may be changed by changing the setting, or the state may be changed by shifting the effect state from the CZ state to the non-AT state]. ,
The counting means is a means having a case where the count value changes according to the result of the game [for example, FIG. 83 (b)].
When the state change is made, the count value of the counting means is a certain value [for example, a value of 0].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display [for example, the point number display PN or the display in the effect information display area 1572].
The first display includes a case where the display content related to the count value in the counting means is displayed [for example, FIG. 105 (9)] and a case where the display content is different from the count value in the counting means []. For example, there is FIG. 105 (2)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
The second display is a display [for example, a zone display] displayed according to the display content of the first display.
The count value in the counting means changes due to the occurrence of power interruption / recovery [for example, immediate recovery after power failure or power recovery at night and recovery the next morning]. Not the value to do
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the first display content when the state change is performed [for example, FIG. 103 (a2), FIG. 103 (b2)].
The display means is said to be the first when there is a power failure recovery [for example, the power may be restored immediately after the power failure, or the power may be restored at night and the next morning]. It is a means to display the first display in the display contents of.
The first display content is a display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is the certain value.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the first display is displayed with the display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is 0, as in the case where the state change is performed when the power is cut off and restored from the first display, the first display is displayed. In some cases, the player may be allowed to play the game without determining whether or not the count value of the counting means is 1 or more, and further, how many. In addition, since the display ratio of the second display can be matched between after the setting change process is performed and after the power is cut off and restored, the player is allowed to play without being determined whether the setting is deferred or not. May be possible.

The first display is a display including a display of display contents related to the count value in the counting means, and may include a display different from the display of the display contents related to the count value in the counting means. It may include only the display of the display content regarding the count value in the counting means.

The first display content may be display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is 0. The display content indicating that it is 0 may be a numerical value of 0 or a symbol other than a numerical value (for example, a horizontal bar symbol). Alternatively, the content may be such that the meter is displayed at the end of the meter display or is not displayed.

A second counting means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 provided in the first sub-control unit 400) that obtains information representing the count value of the counting means (for example, the first P counter provided in the main control unit 300) and updates the value. 2P counter)
The first state is a state in which the value of the second counting means is 1 or more.
The second state may be a state in which the value of the second counting means is 0.

A third counting means (for example, a second lap counter provided in the first sub-control unit) for counting the value related to the effect is provided.
The first state is a state in which at least one of the value of the second counting means and the value of the third counting means is 1 or more.
In the second state, the value of the second counting means may be 0, and the value of the third counting means may also be 0.

The second display may be a display [for example, FIG. 94 (c)] that is displayed or hidden according to the display content of the first display.

The second display may be a display indicating that the player's advantage is relatively high.

A second counting means (for example, a second P counter provided in the first sub-control unit 400) that obtains information representing the count value of the counting means and updates the value is provided.
The second display may be a display displayed according to the value of the second counting means, or may be displayed or hidden according to the value of the second counting means. It may be a display.

The value of the second counting means may be a value that may change due to the occurrence of power interruption and recovery.

again,
"When the result of the game is a certain result (hereinafter referred to as" first result ") [for example, a result of winning a prize other than a loss] after the state change is performed, the count in the counting means is performed. The change in the value is represented by the first display [for example, FIG. 103 (a4), FIG. 103 (b4)].
Even when the result of the game is the first result after the power is cut off and restored, the first display indicates that the count value in the counting means has changed [for example, FIG. 104. (A4)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the first display, when the result of the game is the first result after the state change is performed and after the power is cut off and the power is restored, the count value in the counting means has changed. Since both are represented, the player can be made aware that the count value in the counting means has changed.

The count value in the counting means is a first condition including that the result of the game is the first result [for example, (1) winning a replay, (2) winning a bell, as shown in FIG. 83 (b). A certain value when (3) winning a bell and winning with a 3% probability shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b)] is established. It is a value that changes by a minute [for example, if it is (1) above, it increases by 1 point, if it is (2) above, it increases by 1 point, and if it is (3) above, it increases by 5 points].
The first display is displayed as a display of display contents related to the count value in the counting means when the result of the game satisfies the first condition after the state change is performed [for example, FIG. 103 (a4), FIG. 103 (b4)],
The first display may be displayed as a display of display contents relating to the count value in the counting means even when the first condition is satisfied after the power is cut off and restored [for example, FIG. 104. (A4)]. That is, in any case, the display content regarding the changed count value in the counting means may be displayed.

The count value in the counting means may be a value that changes by the first value when the first condition is satisfied.

When the first condition is satisfied after the state change is performed, the first display indicates that the count value in the counting means has changed by the first value.
When the first condition is satisfied after the power is cut off and restored, the first display may indicate that the count value in the counting means has changed by the first value.

The count value in the counting means is the probability of 97% shown in the first condition [for example, (1) winning a replay, (2) winning a bell and the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b). Whenever (3) winning a bell and winning with a probability of 3% shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b) is established, the first value change [for example, (for example, the above (for example) If it is 1), it may be increased by 1 point, if it is (2), it may be increased by 1 point, and if it is (3), it may be increased by 5 points].

The count value in the counting means is a value that changes by the value selected by the first selection probability when the result of the game becomes the first result after the state change is performed [for example, FIG. 83. (B)] [for example, FIG. 103 (a4), FIG. 103 (b4)],
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes by the value selected by the first selection probability even when the result of the game becomes the first result after the power is cut off and restored [for example. FIG. 83 (b)] [for example, FIG. 104 (a4)].

again,
"The result of the first game after the state change is made is different from the first result (hereinafter referred to as" second result ") [for example, the result of winning a loss]. There is no change in the display content of the first display before and after [for example, FIG. 103 (a3), FIG. 103 (b3)].
The result of the first game after the power failure recovery [for example, the power recovery may be immediate after the power failure, or the power may be restored at night and the next morning] is the second result. There is no change in the display content of the first display before and after the result of [For example, FIG. 104 (a3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the result of the game is the second result between after the state change is performed and after the power is cut off and the power is restored, the display content of the first display does not change, so that the count is counted. In some cases, the player may be allowed to play without being able to determine whether or not the count value of the means is 1 or more, and further, how many.

The count value in the counting means does not change when the result of the game is the second result [for example, FIG. 103 (a3), FIG. 103 (b3), FIG. 104 (a3)]. There is a case where the value changes by two values [for example, FIG. 97 (a5)].
Before and after the result of the first game after the state change is the second result, there is no change in the display content of the first display [for example, FIGS. 103 (a3) and 103 (for example). b3)],
Even before and after the result of the first game after the power interruption and recovery is the second result, there may be no change in the display content of the first display [for example, FIG. 104 (a3)]. ..

again,
"The count value in the counting means is a value that does not change when the result of the first game after the state change is the second result [for example, FIG. 103 (a3), FIG. 103 (b3)],
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes when the result of the first game after the power interruption and recovery is the second result [for example, FIG. 104 (a3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if it is the second result after the power is cut off and restored, the count value in the counting means changes, so that the player does not lose.

The count value in the counting means changes by the second value when the result of the first game after the power interruption and recovery is the second result [for example, if only the character A is displayed. It may be a value that increases by 1 point].

The count value in the counting means changes by the value selected by the second selection probability when the result of the game becomes the second result after the power is cut off and restored [for example, FIG. 83 (b). ) May be a value that changes by the amount of the lottery result using the table shown in).

again,
"The result of the game is different from the second result after the state change is made [for example, the first result or a result other than the first result (for example, the third result)]. After that, the second condition including the fact that the result of the subsequent game is the second result [for example, the result of winning a loss] [for example, only the face image tp of the character of Mr. (A) is displayed. , (B) Winning with a 97% probability shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b) while only the face image jp of the grandfather character is displayed, (C) Only the face image jp of the grandfather character When is established with a probability of 3% shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b) while is displayed, before and after the count value in the counting means becomes the second result. The change is represented by the first indication [eg, FIG. 103 (a5)].
Counting in the counting means even when the second condition is satisfied in the result of the subsequent game after the result of the game is different from the second result after the power is cut off and restored. The change in the value before and after the second result is represented by the first indication [eg, FIG. 104 (a5)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the second condition including that the second result is obtained after the result different from the second result is satisfied after the state change is performed and after the power is cut off and restored. Is indicated by the first display that the count value in the counting means has changed, so that the player can be made aware that the count value in the counting means has changed.

The count value in the counting means changes by a certain value when the result of the game is different from the second result and then the second result is obtained [for example, shown in FIG. 83 (b). It is a value that changes by the lottery result using the table].
The first display relates to a count value in the counting means when the result of the game is different from the second result after the state change is performed and then the second result is obtained. It is displayed as a display of the display contents [for example, FIG. 103 (a5), FIG. 103 (b5)],
The first display is a count in the counting means even when the result of the game is different from the result of the second result after the power is cut off and the power is restored and the second result is obtained. It may be displayed as a display of display contents related to the value [for example, FIG. 104 (a5)]. That is, in any case, it may be displayed as a display of display contents regarding the count value after the change in the counting means.

The count value in the counting means changes by the second value when the result of the game is different from the result of the second result and then becomes the second result [for example, only the character A is displayed. If so, it will increase by 1 point].
When the result of the game is different from the second result after the state change is performed and then the second result is obtained, the count value in the counting means is the second value. The change is represented by the first display [for example, FIG. 103 (a5), FIG. 103 (b5)].
Even if the result of the game is different from the second result after the power is cut off and the second result is obtained, the count value in the counting means is the second value. The minute change may be represented by the first indication [eg, FIG. 104 (a5)].

As for the count value in the counting means, after the result of the game is different from the result of the second condition, the second condition [for example, only the face image tp of the character of Mr. (A) is displayed, ( B) With only the face image jp of the grandfather character displayed, there is a 97% chance of winning as shown in the point increase setting table shown in FIG. 83 (b), and (C) only the face image jp of the grandfather character is displayed. Whenever the second value change [for example, 1 point in the case of (A) above] is established when the point increase setting table shown in FIG. It may be an increase, even if it is the above (B), it is increased by 1 point, and if it is the above (C), it is increased by 5 points].

The count value in the counting means is a second selection probability when the result of the game is different from the second result after the state change is performed and then the second result is obtained. It is a value that changes by the selected value [for example, changes by the lottery result using the table shown in FIG. 83 (b)].
The count value in the counting means is the second selection even when the result of the game is different from the second result after the power is cut off and the second result is obtained. It may be a value that changes by a value selected by probability [for example, FIG. 104 (a5)].

The result different from the second result may be, for example, the first result or a result other than the first result (for example, a third result).

When the display content of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 103 (a4), FIG. 103 (b4)] after the state change is performed, and then the result of the game becomes the second result. , The first display indicates that the count value in the counting means changed before and after the second result [for example, FIG. 103 (a5), FIG. 103 (b5)].
Even when the result of the game is the second result after the display content of the first display is changed [for example, FIG. 104 (a4)] after the power is cut off and restored, the counting means is used. It may be in the aspect [for example, FIG. 104 (a5)] that the change in the count value before and after the second result is represented by the first display.

again,
"Setting change to change the setting value previously set to the new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b)] having different degrees of advantage of the player. A setting changing means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 for executing the setting changing process shown in FIG. 78] is provided.
The power recovery means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, it may be said that all of the power interruption and power recovery described so far means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut off.

In addition, in the above description,
"For example, it becomes easier to win a lottery to shift to an effect state (pseudo BB state) in which an operation condition notification effect is performed" related to a privilege [for example, execution of an operation condition notification effect] (table in FIG. 785 (c)). Related] Counting means for counting [for example, a first P counter prepared in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means having a case where the count value changes according to the result of the game [for example, FIG. 83 (b)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display [for example, the point number display PN or the display in the effect information display area 1572].
The first display includes a case where the display content related to the count value in the counting means is displayed [for example, FIG. 105 (9)] and a case where the display content is different from the count value in the counting means []. For example, there is FIG. 105 (2)].
The count value in the counting means changes due to the occurrence of power interruption / recovery [for example, immediate recovery after power failure or power recovery at night and recovery the next morning]. Not the value to do
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the first display content regardless of the count value in the counting means when there is a power failure / recovery.
The first display content is a display content different from the count value in the counting means [for example, "000" of the point number display PN shown in FIG. 105 (2)].
When a certain condition is satisfied after the power is cut off and restored, the display means [for example, display of the scene in which the lord has won (determination of transition to the pseudo BB state (step S193 (i) shown in FIG. 89, FIG. In step S196 (c) shown in 91, confirmation of transition to the AT state (step S193 (m) shown in FIG. 89, step S196 (g) shown in FIG. 91)], the first display content is described above. It is a means for displaying the display [for example, it is displayed according to the first P counter value command shown in step S193 (k), step S193 (o) shown in FIG. 89, step S196 (e) shown in FIG. 91, and step S196 (i). ],
The second display content is a display content representing a count value in the counting means [for example, “142” of the point number display PN shown in FIG. 105 (9)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a player who remembers the counter value that he stopped playing in the evening at a game store learns the second display content (real value) the next day, is another player playing in the meantime? You may know whether or not. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many count values were at the time of power interruption when the power was restored by displaying the display content indicating that the value was 0.

The display content different from the count value in the counting means, which is the first display content, may be a display content of a numerical value different from the count value, or a display content (symbol or alphabet) different from the numerical value. , The display content may be blank. Further, the first display content may be display content indicating that the count value in the counting means is 0.

again,
"A setting to change the setting value previously set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b)] having different degrees of advantage to the player. A setting changing means for performing a change process [for example, a CPU 304 of a main control unit 300 for executing the setting change process shown in FIG. 78] is provided.
The counting means is a means in which the count value becomes a certain value [for example, 0] when the setting change process is performed [for example, FIG. 103 (a2)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A player who remembers the counter value that he stopped playing in the evening at a game store may know whether or not the setting change process was performed the next day.

again,
"The certain condition is a condition that is satisfied when the privilege [for example, execution of the operation condition notification effect] is given [for example, the transition to the pseudo BB state is confirmed (step S193 (i) shown in FIG. 89). Step S196 (c) shown in FIG. 91, determination of transition to the AT state (step S193 (m) shown in FIG. 89, step S196 (g) shown in FIG. 91)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It may be possible to continue the game until the privilege is given to the player who wants to know the true value. In addition, it may be possible to suppress the decline in the interest by giving a privilege to the player who knows the true value and the interest is reduced.

again,
"When the privilege is given to the player when the count value in the counting means becomes a predetermined value [for example, the number of true confrontation points] [for example, the number of points reaches the number of true confrontation points and the confrontation effect is produced. In the state where the number of laps is increased by 1 and the winning probability is increased, there is a case where the player wins in the true confrontation result setting process (step S133e) using the table shown in FIG. 82 (c)].
The counting means has a count value of 0 when the granting of the privilege ends [for example, when the CZ state in which the operation condition notification effect has been executed ends] [for example, shown in FIG. 91]. Step S196l],
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first display content after the granting of the privilege is completed [for example, FIG. 103 (b2)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By clearing the count value after granting the privilege, the player may be allowed to play in a state where the value of the counting means and the display content of the first display are matched.

In the display means, after the granting of the privilege is completed and the first display is displayed in the first display content, the result of the game is the first result [for example, the result of winning a prize other than the loss]. In that case, the means for displaying the first display in the second display content [for example, FIG. 103 (b4)] may be used.

again,
"When the result of the game is a certain result [for example, the result of winning a prize in the chance eye] in a state where the first display displays the display content different from the count value in the counting means, the said Display the first display with the second display content,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By correcting the situation where the value of the counting means and the value of the first display do not match after the power is cut off and restored, it may be possible to increase the difficulty of determining whether or not another player is playing in the meantime. ..

again,
"Setting change to change the setting value previously set to the new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 72 (b)] having different degrees of advantage of the player. A setting changing means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 for executing the setting changing process shown in FIG. 78] is provided.
The power recovery means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, it may be said that all of the power interruption and power recovery described so far means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut off.

In addition, in the above description,
"A counting means [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] for counting related to the effect [for example, the effect point].
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means in which the count value may change depending on the result of one game.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
The first display is a display of display contents related to the count value in the counting means [for example, a point number display PN or a display in the effect information display area 1572].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a third display, and is a means capable of displaying the third display.
The third display suggests that when the count value in the counting means changes, the first display changes according to the amount of change in the count value [for example, the first addition display ad1. ], And
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth display.
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed over one or a plurality of games [for example, a confrontation animation display of a false confrontation effect shown in FIGS. 99 (a2) to 99 (a6)].
When the count value in the counting means changes while the fourth display is not displayed, the third display is displayed [for example, FIG. 97 (a2)].
When the count value in the counting means changes while the fourth display is displayed, the third display is not displayed [for example, FIG. 99 (a2)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in a state where the fourth display displayed over one or a plurality of games is displayed, the display effect of the fourth display is reduced by the third display. May be suppressed and the fourth display may be noticeable. In addition, there are cases where the player's interest can be induced at the end of the fourth display. On the other hand, in the state where the fourth display is not displayed, the third display may be displayed so that the player can play the game without getting bored.

Further, the first display may be a display of display contents relating to the count value in the counting means or a display of display contents different from the count value in the counting means.

The fourth display may be a display showing an effect state or a display corresponding to the effect state. Further, the fourth display may be a background display or a background animation.

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A counting means [for example, a first P counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] for counting related to the effect [for example, the effect point].
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, an effect image display device 157] and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means in which the count value may change depending on the result of one game.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
The first display is a display of display contents related to the count value in the counting means [for example, a point number display PN or a display in the effect information display area 1572].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a third display, and is a means capable of displaying the third display.
The third display suggests that when the count value in the counting means changes, the first display changes according to the amount of change in the count value [for example, the first addition display ad1. ], And
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth display.
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed over one or a plurality of games [for example, an animation display of a false confrontation effect shown in FIGS. 99 (a2) to 99 (a6)].
In the counting means in the state where the fourth display is displayed, rather than the third display displayed when the count value in the counting means changes in the state where the fourth display is not displayed. The third display displayed when the count value changes is an inconspicuous display [for example, dimmed].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in a state where the fourth display displayed over one or a plurality of games is displayed, the display effect of the fourth display is reduced by the third display. May be suppressed and the fourth display may be noticeable. In addition, there are cases where the player's interest can be induced at the end of the fourth display. On the other hand, in a state where the fourth display is not displayed, the third display may be conspicuous so that the player can play the game without getting bored.

For example, the third display in the latter case may be displayed lighter or smaller than the third display in the former case. Alternatively, in the former case, the third display changes color or shape during display, whereas in the latter case, the third display does not change color during display and has a shape. May not change.

The first display may be a display of display contents relating to the count value in the counting means, or may be a display of display contents different from the count value in the counting means.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying the fifth display.
Similar to the third display, the fifth display is a display suggesting that when the count value in the counting means changes, the first display changes according to the amount of change in the count value. Yes [For example, display for the second addition ad2],
The fifth display is a display displayed closer to the first display than the third display [for example, FIG. 99 (a4)].
The fifth display is a change amount of the count value so as to correspond to a change amount of the count value when the count value in the counting means changes in a state where the fourth display is not displayed. It is a display [for example, two "+1" displays in FIG. 97 (b3)] that may be displayed more than once so as to be divided into two.
The fifth display is displayed so as to collectively represent the amount of change in the count value when the count value in the counting means changes in the state where the fourth display is displayed. In some cases, the display [for example, the display of “+11” in FIG. 100 (b3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the state where the fourth display displayed over one or more games is displayed, the amount of change in the count value can be collectively represented by one display, so that the display can be simplified and made easier to see. In some cases, it may be easier to concentrate the player's consciousness on the fourth display.

again,
"The display means can display one or more character displays [for example, face image tp of the character of the lord, face image jp of the grandfather character, face image hp of the princess character, face image sp of the shinobi character]. Means
The third display [for example, the first addition display ad1] is a display displayed closer to the character display than the fifth display [for example, the second addition display ad2].
The third display is a display that may be displayed in plurality depending on the number of the displayed characters [for example, FIG. 97 (b2)].
When the count value in the counting means changes while the fourth display is displayed, the character display is not displayed [for example, FIG. 99 (a2)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By not displaying the character display, it may be possible to draw attention to the fourth display.

The character display may be a display that is not displayed when the fourth display is displayed.

again,
"When the character display is not displayed, the third display [for example, the first addition display ad1] is not displayed [for example, FIG. 99 (a2)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By not displaying both the character display and the third display, the fourth display may be more noticeable.

Even if the character display is not displayed, the fifth display may be displayed.

again,
"The counting means in the state where the fourth display is displayed rather than the third display displayed when the count value in the counting means changes in the state where the fourth display is not displayed. The third display displayed when the count value in is changed is smaller in at least one of the number of displays, the number of display colors, and the number of display animations, the display time is short, or the display size. Is small,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix A-1)
A setting changing means for performing a setting changing process of setting value information indicating that the lottery data used when performing a lottery is selected from a plurality of types of lottery data, and a setting changing means.
Counting means for benefits and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means whose value can be increased according to the result of the game.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first value") when the setting change processing is performed.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes the second value when there is a power failure / recovery in a state where the value is a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second value").
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display regarding the value of the counter means.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") after the setting change process is performed, the first display is made in consideration of the first increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game becomes the first result after the power interruption and recovery, the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which the first increase amount is added.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A-2)
The game console described in Appendix A-1.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "second result") after the setting change process is performed, the first display is not taken into consideration in the second increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game is the second result after the power is cut and restored, the first display is displayed in a manner that does not take into account the second increase amount.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A-3)
The game console described in Appendix A-2.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the setting change process is performed, the value of the counting means does not increase.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the power is cut and restored, the value of the counting means increases.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A-4)
The game console described in Appendix A-2 or Appendix A-3.
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the setting change process is performed, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner,
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the power interruption and recovery, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A-5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A-1 to Supplementary A-4.
The display means is means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when the setting change process is performed in a state where the value of the counting means is 1 or more.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when there is a power interruption / recovery in a state where the value of the counting means is 1 or more.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A-6)
The game console described in Appendix A-5.
The first display of the first aspect is a display indicating a value of 0.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B-1)
A setting changing means for performing a setting changing process of setting value information indicating that the lottery data used when performing a lottery is selected from a plurality of types of lottery data, and a setting changing means.
Counting means for benefits and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means whose value can be increased according to the result of the game.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first value") when the setting change processing is performed.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes the second value when there is a power failure / recovery in a state where the value is a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second value").
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display regarding the value of the counter means.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display displayed according to the value of the first display.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") after the setting change process is performed, the first display is made in consideration of the first increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game becomes the first result after the power interruption and recovery, the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which the first increase amount is added.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B-2)
The game console described in Appendix B-1.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "second result") after the setting change process is performed, the first display is not taken into consideration in the second increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game is the second result after the power is cut and restored, the first display is displayed in a manner that does not take into account the second increase amount.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B-3)
The game console described in Appendix B-2.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the setting change process is performed, the value of the counting means does not increase.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the power is cut and restored, the value of the counting means increases.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B-4)
The game console described in Appendix B-2 or B-3.
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the setting change process is performed, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner,
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the power interruption and recovery, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B-5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B-1 to B-4.
The display means is means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when the setting change process is performed in a state where the value of the counting means is 1 or more.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when there is a power interruption / recovery in a state where the value of the counting means is 1 or more.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B-6)
The game console described in Appendix B-5.
The first display of the first aspect is a display indicating a value of 0.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix C-1)
A state changing means for performing a state changing process for changing a state from a first state to a second state having a lower advantage than the first state.
Counting means for benefits and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means whose value can be increased according to the result of the game.
The first state is a state in which the value of the counting means is 1 or more.
When the value of the counting means becomes a predetermined value, a privilege may be given to the player.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first value") when the state change processing is performed.
The first value is 0,
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes the second value when there is a power failure / recovery in a state where the value is a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second value").
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display regarding the value of the counter means.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when the state change process is performed.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when there is a power failure / recovery.
The first display of the first aspect is a display indicating a value of 0.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix C-2)
The game console described in Appendix C-1.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") after the state change processing is performed, the first display is made in consideration of the first increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game becomes the first result after the power interruption and recovery, the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which the first increase amount is added.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix C-3)
The game console described in Appendix C-1 or C-2.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "second result") after the state change process is performed, the first display is not taken into consideration in the second increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game is the second result after the power is cut and restored, the first display is displayed in a manner that does not take into account the second increase amount.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix C-4)
The game console described in Appendix C-3.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the state change process is performed, the value of the counting means does not increase.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the power is cut and restored, the value of the counting means increases.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix C-5)
The game console described in Appendix C-3 or C-4.
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the state change process is performed, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner,
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the power interruption and recovery, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix D-1)
A state changing means for performing a state changing process for changing a state from a first state to a second state having a lower advantage than the first state.
Counting means for benefits and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means whose value can be increased according to the result of the game.
The first state is a state in which the value of the counting means is 1 or more.
When the value of the counting means becomes a predetermined value, a privilege may be given to the player.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first value") when the state change processing is performed.
The first value is 0,
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes the second value when there is a power failure / recovery in a state where the value is a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second value").
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display regarding the value of the counter means.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display displayed according to the value of the first display.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when the state change process is performed.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in the first aspect when there is a power failure / recovery.
The first display of the first aspect is a display indicating a value of 0.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix D-2)
The game console described in Appendix D-1.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") after the state change processing is performed, the first display is made in consideration of the first increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game becomes the first result after the power interruption and recovery, the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which the first increase amount is added.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix D-3)
The game console described in Appendix D-1 or D-2.
When the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "second result") after the state change process is performed, the first display is not taken into consideration in the second increase amount. Is displayed,
When the result of the game is the second result after the power is cut and restored, the first display is displayed in a manner that does not take into account the second increase amount.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix D-4)
The game console described in Appendix D-3.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the state change process is performed, the value of the counting means does not increase.
When the result of the game becomes the second result after the power is cut and restored, the value of the counting means increases.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix D-5)
The game console described in Appendix D-3 or D-4.
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the state change process is performed, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner,
When the result of the game is the second result after the first display is displayed in an embodiment in which a certain increase amount is added after the power interruption and recovery, the second increase amount is used. The first display is displayed in an added manner.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix E-1)
Counting means for benefits and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means for increasing the value according to the result of the game.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display regarding the value of the counter means.
The counting means has a value when there is a power failure / recovery in a state where the value is a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first value") (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). It is a means to obtain the first value.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in an manner indicating that the value is 0 in the first case.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display in an embodiment showing the value of the counting means when a certain condition is satisfied after the first case.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix E-2)
The game console described in Appendix E-1.
It is equipped with a setting changing means for performing a setting changing process of setting value information indicating that the lottery data used when performing a lottery is selected from a plurality of types of lottery data.
The counting means is a means in which the value becomes a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second value") when the setting change process is performed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix E-3)
The game console described in Appendix E-1 or E-1.
The certain condition is a condition that is satisfied when the privilege is granted.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix E-4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices E-1 to E-3.
A state changing means for performing a state changing process for changing a state from a first state to a second state having a lower advantage than the first state is provided.
The first state is a state in which the counting means has a value.
When the value of the counting means becomes a predetermined value, a privilege may be given to the player.
When the grant of the privilege is completed, the state change process is performed, and the state change process is performed.
The counting means is a means whose value becomes the second value when the state change processing is performed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix E-5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices E-1 to E-4.
When the result of the game is a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") in a state where the value of the counting means and the value indicated by the first display are the same, the first increase amount is added. The first display is displayed in the above-mentioned manner.
When the result of the game is the first result in a state where the value of the counting means and the value indicated by the first display are different, a second increase amount larger than the first increase amount is added. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix F-1)
Counting means for benefits and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The counting means is a means for increasing the value according to the result of one game.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display regarding the value of the counter means.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display indicating a value to be added to the value of the first display.
When the value of the counting means increases (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the first display is displayed in an embodiment showing the value obtained by adding the increased value.
In the first case, the second display is displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a fourth display that may be displayed over a plurality of games.
When the first case is reached in a state where the fourth display is not displayed, the second display is displayed with the first amount of information.
In the case where the first case is obtained in the state where the fourth display is displayed, the second display is displayed with the second amount of information.
The second amount of information is smaller than the first amount of information.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix F-2)
The game console described in Appendix F-1.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a third display indicating a value to be added to the value of the first display.
The third display is displayed at a position closer to the first display than the second display.
When the value of the counting means increases (hereinafter, referred to as "second case") in a state where the fourth display is not displayed, a plurality of the third display (hereinafter, "plural third cases"). "Display") may be displayed.
In the state where the fourth display is displayed, in the case of the second case, one of the third displays indicating the total value of the values of the plurality of third displays is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix F-3)
The game console described in Appendix F-2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying one or a plurality of character displays.
The second display is displayed at a position closer to the character display than the third display.
The second display may be displayed more than once depending on the number of character displays.
In the state where the fourth display is displayed and the first case is reached, the character display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix F-4)
The game console described in Appendix F-3.
When the character display is not displayed, the second display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix F-5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices F-1 to F-4.
The second display of the second information amount has at least one element of number, display time, size, number of colors, and presence / absence of animation, as compared with the second display of the first information amount. The amount of
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix R0-1)
A setting change means that performs a setting change process that changes the setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player.
Display means that can display multiple displays and
Counting means to count the production and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display related to the effect.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with a certain display content when the setting change process is performed.
The display means is a means for displaying the first display with the same display content as the certain display content when there is a power failure / recovery.
When the first condition including the fact that the result of the game becomes a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") is satisfied after the setting change process is performed, the first display is performed. The displayed content of is changed by the first degree of change,
Even when the first condition is satisfied after the power is cut off and restored, the display content of the first display changes according to the first degree of change.
A second game including that in the first game after the setting change process is performed, the result of the game is a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "second result") different from the first result. Before and after the conditions were met, there was no change in the display content of the first display.
In the first game after the power was cut off and restored, there was no change in the display content of the first display even before and after the second condition was satisfied.
The counting means is a means in which the count value may change depending on the result of the game.
The counting means is a means in which the count value becomes a certain value when the setting change process is performed.
The first display may be a display of display contents relating to a count value in the counting means, or may be a display of display contents different from the count value in the counting means.
The count value in the counting means is not a value that changes due to the occurrence of power interruption and recovery.
The count value in the counting means is a value that does not change when the result of the first game after the setting change process is performed is the second result.
The count value in the counting means is a value that changes when the result of the first game after the power interruption and recovery is the second result.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1.
The certain display content is a display content based on a certain rule.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1 or R0-2.
The power recovery means that the power was restored without performing the setting change process after the power was cut.
A game table featuring that.

In the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above is "must be". It may be replaced with "○○".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 272,277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control Department

Claims (1)

With the start lever ,
Directing means and
It is a game table equipped with
The game console is a slot machine.
The effect means is a means capable of executing the effect of the interlocking pattern .
The effect means is a means capable of executing the effect of the demo display .
The interlocking pattern effect is an effect in which the first effect is started and then the second effect is started.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the effect of the demo display is executed.
When the power is cut off and restored during the execution of the effect of the demo display after the first case , the effect of the demo display is executed.
An effect that is executed when the start lever is operated without going through the power cutoff / recovery after the start of the first effect, and an effect that is performed after the power failure / recovery is performed after the start of the first effect. Unlike the effect that is performed when the start lever is operated,
The effect executed when the start lever is operated after the start of the first effect without going through the power interruption and recovery is the second effect.
The effect executed when the start lever is operated after the power is cut off and restored after the start of the first effect is the first effect.
A game table featuring that.

Images